Fiat - Fullback - Owners Manual - 2012 - 2012

COP FULL BACK LUM GB.qxp_500 UM ITA 23/02/16 09:50 Pagina 1 F I A T F U L L B A C ENGLISH The data contained in this publication is intended merely as a guide. Fiat Chrysler Automobiles reserves the right to modify the models and versions described in this booklet at any time for technical and commercial reasons. If you have any further questions please consult your FIAT dealer. Printed in recycled paper without chlorine. O W N E R H A N D B O O K K COP FULL BACK LUM IT.qxp_500 UM ITA 23/02/16 09:51 Pagina 2 PERCHÈ SCEGLIERE RICAMBI ORIGINALI Noi che abbiamo ideato, progettato e costruito il tuo veicolo, lo conosciamo davvero in ogni singolo dettaglio e componente. Nelle officine autorizzate Fiat Professional Service trovi tecnici formati direttamente da noi che ti offrono qualità e professionalità in tutti gli interventi di manutenzione. Le officine Fiat Professional sono sempre al tuo fianco per la manutenzione periodica, i controlli di stagione e per i consigli pratici dei nostri esperti. Con i Ricambi Originali Fiat Professional, mantieni nel tempo le caratteristiche di affidabilità, comfort e performance per cui hai scelto il tuo nuovo veicolo. Chiedi sempre i Ricambi Originali dei componenti che utilizziamo per costruire le nostre auto e che ti raccomandiamo perché sono il risultato del nostro costante impegno nella ricerca e nello sviluppo di tecnologie sempre più innovative. Per tutti questi motivi affidati ai Ricambi Originali: i soli appositamente progettati da Fiat Professional per il tuo veicolo. SICUREZZA: SISTEMA FRENANTE ECOLOGIA: FILTRI ANTIPARTICOLATO, MANUTENZIONE CLIMATIZZATORE COMFORT: SOSPENSIONI E TERGICRISTALLI PERFORMANCE: CANDELE, INIETTORI E BATTERIE LINEA ACCESSORI: BARRE PORTA TUTTO, CERCHI Dear Customer We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing Fiat Fullback. We have written this handbook to help you get to know all the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way. Here you will find information, advice and important warnings regarding use of your vehicle and how to achieve the best performance from the technical features of your Fiat Fullback. You are advised to read it right through before taking to the road for the first time, to become familiar with the controls and above all with those concerning brakes, steering and gearbox; at the same time, you can understand the vehicle behaviour on different road surfaces. This document also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care and maintenance of your vehicle over time. After reading it, you are advised to keep the handbook inside the vehicle, for an easy reference and for making sure it remains on board the vehicle should it be sold. In the attached Warranty Booklet you will also find a description of the Services that Fiat offers to its customers, the Warranty Certificate and the detail of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate your new vehicle and the service provided by the people at Fiat. Enjoy reading. Happy motoring! This Owner Handbook describes all Fiat Fullback versions. Options, equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not explicitly indicated in the text: as a consequence, you should only consider the information which is related to the trim level, engine and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the production of the model, outside the specific request of options at the time of purchase, will be identified with the wording (where provided). All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA Italy S.p.A. aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact a Fiat Dealership. READ THIS CAREFULLY REFUELLING Only refuel with automotive diesel conforming to the European specification EN590. The use of other products or mixtures may damage the engine beyond repair and consequently invalidate the warranty, due to the damage caused. STARTING THE ENGINE Make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gear lever to neutral; fully depress the clutch pedal without pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to MAR-ON and wait for the warning lights and to switch off; turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine has started. PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable material: fire hazard. RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT The vehicle is fitted with a system that allows continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the environment. ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES If, after buying the vehicle, you decide to add electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), visit a Fiat Dealership. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electrical system can support the required load. SCHEDULED SERVICING Correct maintenance enables the vehicle to perfectly maintain performance and safety characteristics, its environmental friendliness and low running costs over time. USE OF THE OWNER HANDBOOK OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Each time direction instructions (left/right or forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are given, these must be intended as regarding an occupant in the driver's seat. Special cases not complying with this rule will be properly specified in the text. The figures in the Owner Handbook are provided by way of example only: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. In addition, the Handbook has been conceived considering vehicles with steering wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible that on vehicles with steering wheel on the right side, some controls position or construction is not exactly mirror-like with respect to the figure. To identify the chapter with the information needed you can consult the index at the end of this Owner Handbook Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd page. A few pages further there is a key for getting to know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. There is anyway a textual indication of the current chapter at the side of each even page. Abbreviations used in this Owner Handbook: LHD— Left-Hand Drive RHD— Right-Hand Drive M/T— Manual Transmission A/T— Automatic Transmission This manual explains operation of LHD ans RHD vehicles. Illustrations represent LHD operation. Depending on the item, however, RHD illustrations may also appear. WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS While reading this Owner Handbook you will find a series of WARNINGS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle. There are also PRECAUTIONS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries. Therefore all WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS must always be carefully followed. WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols: vehicle safety; personal safety; environmental protection. NOTE These symbols, when necessary, are indicated besides the title or at the end of the line and are followed by a number. That number recalls the corresponding warning at the end of the relevant section. 4 VEHICLE CHANGES / ALTERATIONS IMPORTANT Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road holding, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants could even be fatally injured. ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER If after buying the vehicle, you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories that in any case burden the electrical supply, contact a Fiat Dealership, whose personnel will check whether the vehicles's electrical system is able to withstand the load required, or whether it needs to be integrated with a more powerful battery. IMPORTANT Take care when fitting additional spoilers, alloy wheels or non-standard wheel hubs: they could reduce the ventilation of the brakes and affect efficiency under sharp, repeated braking or on long descents. Make sure that nothing obstructs the pedal stroke (mats, etc.). INSTALLING ELECTRICAL / ELECTRONIC DEVICES Electrical and electronic devices installed after buying the vehicle in the context of after-sales service must carry the following label : FCA Italy S.p.A. authorises the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialised centre, in a workmanlike fashion and in compliance with manufacturer's specifications. Traffic police may not allow the vehicle on the road if devices have been installed which modify the features of the vehicle. This may also cause invalidation of warranty in relation to faults caused by the change either directly or indirectly related to it. FCA Italy S.p.A. shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA Italy S.p.A. and not installed in compliance with the provided instructions. RADIO TRANSMITTERS AND MOBILE PHONES Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle unless a separate aerial is mounted externally. Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use of EC-approved mobile phones is concerned (GSM, GPRS, UMTS, LTE), follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone Manufacturer. The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external aerial) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction. This could compromise the safety of the vehicle in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health. If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance of the Passive Entry/Keyless Entry-N-Go system may occur. INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES Before fitting any accessories, please consult your authorised Fiat Dealership. 5 IMPORTANT Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnosis connector for checking and servicing the electronic control system. Do not connect a device other than a diagnosis tool for inspections and service to this connector. Otherwise, the battery could be discharged, the electronic devices of the vehicle could malfunction, or other unexpected problems could result. In addition, malfunctions caused by connecting a device other than a diagnosis tool may not be covered under warranty. The installation of accessories, optional parts, etc., should only be carried out within the limits prescribed by law in your country, and in accordance with the guidelines and warnings contained within the documents accompanying this vehicle. Only FCA Italy S.p.A. approved accessories should be fitted to your vehicle. Improper installation of electrical parts could cause fire, please refer to the Modification/ alteration to the electrical or fuel systems section within this owner’s manual. Using a cellular phone or radio set inside the vehicle without an external antenna may cause electrical system interference, which could lead to unsafe vehicle operation. Tyres and wheels which do not meet specifications must not be used. Refer to the “Specifications” section for information regarding wheel and tyre sizes. Do not fail to read the accessories manuals prior to the installation of accessories, parts or other modifications to the vehicle! IMPORTANT POINTS! Due to a large number of accessories and replacement parts of different manufactures available in the market, it is not possible, not only for FCA Italy S.p.A. but also an authorised Fiat Dealership, to check whether the attachment or installation of such parts affects the overall safety of your vehicle. Even when such parts are officially authorised, for example by a “general operators permit” (an appraisal for the part) or through the execution of the part in an officially approved manner of construction, or when a single operation permit following the attachment or installation of such parts, it cannot be deduced from that alone, that the driving safety of your vehicles has not been affected. Consider also that there basically exists no liability on the part of the appraiser or the official. Maximum safety can only be ensured with parts recommended, sold and fitted or installed by an authorised Fiat Dealership (replacement with original FCA Italy S.p.A. spare parts). The same also pertains to modifications of vehicles with respect to the production specifications. For safety reasons, do not attempt any modifications other than those that follow the recommendations of an authorised Fiat Dealership. 6 GRAPHICAL INDEX GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX GRAPHICAL INDEX 1 HEADLIGHTS Bulb types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Dipper beam headlights . . . . . . . . . 44 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 WHEELS Tyres and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Replacing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRRORS Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 ENGINE Checking levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . 274 DOORS Central opening/closing . . . . . . . . . 28 WINDSCREEN WIPERS Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 9 GRAPHICAL INDEX 2 REAR LIGHTS Bulb types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 LOAD COMPARTMENT Cargo loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 HIGH-MOUNTED STOP Bulb types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 10 3 AIR VENTS Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 ELECTRIC WINDOW CONTROLS Driver's switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Passenger's switches . . . . . . . . . . . 70 INSTRUMENT PANEL Control panel and on-board instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Multi information display . . . . . . . . . 90 Indicator and warning lamps . . . . . 98 HEATER/CLIMATE CONTROL Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Heater /Manual air conditioning . . 58 Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 DRIVE MODE SELECTOR Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 FRONT AIRBAG Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . 127 GLOVE COMPARTMENT Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 GEARSHIFT LEVER Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . 159 STEERING WHEEL Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Steering wheel lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 11 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE In-depth knowledge of your new vehicle starts here. The handbook that you are reading simply and directly explains how it is made and how it works. That’s why we advise you to read it seated comfortably on board, so that you can see immediately what is described here for yourself. KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . .24 DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . .36 STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . .38 REAR VIEW MIRRORS . . . . . . . . .40 EXTERNAL LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . .44 INTERIOR LAMPS . . . . . . . . . . . .50 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH. . . .52 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM . . . . .56 WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 CATALYTIC CONVERTER. . . . . . . .72 DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF).72 ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . . .74 CARGO AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . .76 INTERIOR FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .78 FUEL SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . .84 FILLING THE FUEL TANK. . . . . . . .86 ENTERING OR LEAVING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 KEYS 4 AH3101213 1. Master key 2. Keyless entry key 3. Keyless operation key 4. Emergency key 1) NOTE The key is a precision electronic part with a built-in signal transmitter. Please observe the following in order to prevent a malfunction. Do not leave anywhere that is exposed to direct sunlight, for example on the dashboard. Do not disassemble or modify. Do not excessively bend the key or subject it to a strong impact. Do not expose to water. Keep away from magnetic key rings. Keep away from audio systems, personal computers, TVs, and any other equipment that generates a magnetic field. Keep away from devices that emit strong electromagnetic waves, such as cellular phones, wireless devices and high frequency equipment (including medical devices). Do not wash with ultrasonic cleaners or similar equipment. Do not leave the key where it may be exposed to high temperature or high humidity. NOTE The engine is designed so that it will not start if the ID code registered in the immobilizer computer and the key’s ID code do not match. Refer to the section entitled “Electronic immobilizer” for details and key usage. KEY NUMBER TAG The key number is stamped on the tag as indicated in the illustration. Make a record of the key number and store the key and key number tag in separate places, so that you can order a key from your Fiat Dealership in the event the original keys are lost. 5 AA0109480 ELECTRONIC IMMOBILIZER (where provided) 2) The electronic immobilizer is designed to reduce significantly the possibility of vehicle theft. The purpose of the system is to immobilize the vehicle if an invalid start is attempted. A valid start attempt can only be achieved, using a key “registered” to the immobilizer system. Vehicles without keyless operation system In the following cases, the vehicle may not be able to receive the registered ID code from the registered key and engine may not start. When the key contacts a key ring or other metallic or magnetic object 13 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (where provided) Press the key switch to lock or unlock the doors. It is also possible to operate the outside rear view mirrors (vehicles equipped with the mirror retractor switch). 6 AGZ000345 When the key grip contacts metal of another key 7 AGZ000576 When the key contacts or is close to other immobilizing keys (including keys of other vehicles). 14 8 AGZ000361 In cases like these, remove the object or additional key from the vehicle key. Then try again to start the engine. If the engine does not start, we recommend you to contact a Fiat Dealership. NOTE If you lose one of the master keys, the keyless entry keys or the keyless operation keys, contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. Refer to “Keys”. To obtain a key, take your vehicle and all remaining keys to a Fiat Dealership. If you need an extra spare key, take your vehicle and all the keys to a Fiat Dealership. All the keys have to be re-registered in the immobilizer computer unit. For further information, please contact a Fiat Dealership. 9 AHA101774 1. LOCK switch 2. UNLOCK switch 3. Indicator lamp To lock Press the LOCK switch (1). All the doors will be locked. The turn-signal lamps will blink once. When they are locked with the room lamp switch in the middle (●) position, the room lamp also blink once. To unlock Press the UNLOCK switch (2). All the doors will be unlocked. If the room lamp switch is in the middle (●) position at this time, the room lamp will come on for approximately 15 seconds and the turn-signal lamps will blink twice. NOTE For vehicles equipped with the mirror retractor switch, the outside rear view mirrors automatically retract or extend when all the doors are locked or unlocked using the key switches of the keyless entry system. Refer to “Outside rear view mirrors”. NOTE If the UNLOCK switch (2) is pressed and no door is opened within approximately 30 seconds, relocking will automatically occur. It is possible to modify functions as follows: The time from pressing of the UNLOCK switch (2) to the moment of automatic locking can be changed. Activating the operation confirmation function (blinking of the turn-signal lamps) only during locking, or only during unlocking. The confirmation function (this indicates locking or unlocking of the doors with the blink of the turn-signal lamps) can be deactivated. The number of times the turn-signal lamps are blinked by the confirmation function can be changed. On vehicles with keyless operation system, the buzzer sound can be activated when a keyless operation is done.For further information, please contact a Fiat Dealership. Operation of the Dead Lock System With a vehicle that has a Dead Lock System, it is possible to set the Dead Lock System by pressing the LOCK switch (1) two times. Refer to “Dead Lock System”. Operation of the outside rear view mirrors (Vehicles equipped with the mirror retractor switch) To fold — Locking the doors using the LOCK switch (1), the outside rear view mirrors are folded automatically. To extend — Unlocking the doors using the UNLOCK switch (2), the outside rear view mirrors are extended automatically. NOTE Functions can be modified as stated below. Please consult a Fiat Dealership. Automatically extend when the driver’s door is closed, and then the following operation is performed. Except for vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system: turn the ignition switch to the “ON” or “ACC” position. Vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system: put the operation mode in ON or ACC Automatically retract when the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” position or the operation mode is put in OFF, and the driver’s door is then opened. Automatically extend when the vehicle speed reaches 30 km/h. Deactivate the automatic extension function. NOTE The outside rear view mirrors can be folded or extended by the following operations, even if changing to the any of above. After pressing the “LOCK” switch to lock the doors, if the “LOCK” switch is pressed again twice in a row within about 30 seconds, the outside rear view mirrors will retract. After pressing the “UNLOCK” switch to unlock the doors, if the “UNLOCK” switch is pressed again twice in a row within about 30 seconds, the outside rear view mirrors will extend again. NOTE The keyless entry system does not operate in the following conditions: The key is left in the ignition switch (except for vehicles with keyless operation system). The operation mode is not in OFF (vehicles with keyless operation system). The door is open. 15 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The key switch will operate within approximately 4 m from the vehicle. However, the operating range of the key switch may change if the vehicle is located near a TV transmitting tower, power station, or radio broadcasting station. NOTE If either of the following problems occurs, the battery may be exhausted. The key switch is operated at the correct distance from the vehicle, but the doors are not locked/unlocked in response. The indicator lamp (3) is dim or does not come on. For further information, please contact a Fiat Dealership. If you replace the battery yourself, refer to “Procedure for replacing key battery”. NOTE If your key is lost or damaged, please contact a Fiat Dealership for a replacement key. NOTE If you wish to add key, please contact a Fiat Dealership. The following numbers of the keys are available: Keyless entry key: up to 4 keys Keyless operation key: up to 4 keys. Procedure for replacing the key battery 1) 3) Before replacing the battery, remove static electricity from your body by touching a metal grounded object. NOTE You may purchase a replacement battery at an electric appliance store. Fiat Dealership can replace the battery for you if you prefer. 1. Remove the screw (A) from the key (Keyless Entry Key only). 10 AHA106809 2. With the Fiat mark facing you, insert the cloth-covered tip of a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver into the notch in the key case and use it to open the case. 16 11 AHA109044 12 AHA109057 NOTE Be sure to perform the procedure with the Fiat mark facing you. If the Fiat mark is not facing you when you open the key case, the switches may come out. 3. Remove the old battery. 4. Install a new battery with the + side (B) up. Keyless entry key 13 AHA106812 Coin type battery CR1620 Keyless operation key KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM The keyless operation system allows you to lock and unlock the doors, start the engine and change the operation mode simply by carrying the keyless operation key with you. The switches on the keyless operation key can also be used as the key switch of keyless entry system. Refer to “Starting and stopping the engine”. Refer to “Keyless entry system”. The driver should always carry the keyless operation key. This key is necessary for locking and unlocking the doors, starting the engine and otherwise operating the vehicle, so before locking and leaving the vehicle, be sure to check that you have the keyless operation key. 4) 5) 14 AHA106825 Coin type battery CR2032 5. Close the transmitter firmly. 6. Attach the screw (A) removed in step 1 (Keyless Entry Key only). 7. Check the keyless entry system to see that it works. 15 AH3100287 16 AH3100229 You can limit the possible operations of the keyless operation system. Please consult a Fiat Dealership. The keyless operation key uses an ultra-weak electromagnetic wave. In the following cases, the keyless operation system may not operate properly or may be unstable. When there is equipment nearby that emits strong radio waves, such as: a power station, a radio/TV broadcasting station or an airport. The keyless operation system is carried together with a communications device such as a cellular phone or radio set, or with an electronic device such as a personal computer. The keyless operation key is touching or covered by a metal object. A keyless entry system is being used nearby. When the keyless operation key battery is worn out. 17 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE When the keyless operation key is set down in an area with strong radio waves or noise. In such cases, use the emergency key. Refer to “To lock/unlock without using the keyless operation function”. NOTE Because the keyless operation key receives signals in order to communicate with the transmitters in the vehicle, the battery continually wears down regardless of keyless operation key use. The battery life is 1 to 2 years, depending on usage conditions. When the battery wears out, replace the battery according to the description in this manual or have it replaced a Fiat Dealership. Refer to “Procedure for replacing the key battery”. NOTE Because the keyless operation key continually receives signals, strong radio wave reception could affect battery wear. Do not leave the key near a TV, personal computer, or other electronic device. Operating range of the keyless operation system If you are carrying the keyless operation key, enter the operating range of the keyless operation system, and press the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch, the ID code for your key is verified. 18 You can lock and unlock the doors, start the engine and change the operation mode only if the ID codes of your keyless operation key and the vehicle match. NOTE If the keyless operation key battery is wearing out or there are strong electromagnetic waves or noise present, the operating range may become smaller and operation may become unstable. Operating range for locking and unlocking the doors The operating range is approximately 70 cm from the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch. NOTE Locking and unlocking operate only when you press a door switch that detects the keyless operation key. NOTE Operation may not be possible if you are too close to the front door or window. NOTE Even if the keyless operation key is within 70 cm of the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch, if the key is near to the ground or high up, the system may not operate. NOTE If the keyless operation key is within the operating range, even someone not carrying the key can lock and unlock the doors by pressing the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch. Operating range for starting the engine and changing the operation mode The operating range is the interior of the vehicle. NOTE Even if it is within the operating range, if the keyless operation key is in a small item holder such as the glove box, on top of the instrument panel, door pocket or in the luggage compartment, it may be impossible to start the engine and change the operation mode. NOTE If a keyless operation key is too close to the door or door window, it may be possible to start the engine or change the operation mode even when the key is outside the vehicle. To operate using the keyless operation function 17 AHA105437 Locking the doors When you are carrying the keyless operation key, if you press the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch (A), within the operating range, the doors are locked. The turn-signal lamps will blink once and the outer buzzer will sound once. Also refer to “Locking and unlocking: Doors, Central door locks”. Unlocking the doors When you are carrying the keyless operation key, if you press the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch (A), within the operating range, all the doors are unlocked. If the room lamp switch is in the middle position at this time, the room lamp will turn on for 15 seconds. The turn-signal lamps will blink twice and the outer buzzer will sound twice. If the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch is pressed and any of the doors is not opened within approximately 30 seconds, relocking will automatically occur. Refer to “Locking and unlocking: Doors, Central door locks”. NOTE For vehicles equipped with the mirror retractor switch, the outside rear view mirrors automatically retract/extend when all the doors are locked/unlocked using the keyless operation function. Refer to “Outside rear view mirrors”. NOTE For vehicles equipped with the Dead Lock System, pressing the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch (A) two times in succession causes the Dead Lock System to be set (refer to “Setting the system”). NOTE The keyless operation function does not operate under the following conditions: The keyless operation key is inside the vehicle. A door is open or ajar. The operation mode is not in OFF. NOTE The time between unlocking and automatic locking can be adjusted. Please consult a Fiat Dealership. Operation confirmation when locking and unlocking Operation can be confirmed as shown below. However, the room lamp will illuminate only if the room lamp switch is in the middle position. When locking — the turn-signal lamps blink once and the outer buzzer sounds once. When unlocking — the room lamp illuminates for approximately 15 seconds, the turn-signal lamps blink twice, and the outer buzzer sounds twice. NOTE Functions can be modified as stated below. For further information, please contact a Fiat Dealership. NOTE Activating the operation confirmation function (blinking of the turn-signal lamps) only during locking, or only during unlocking. NOTE Disabling the operation confirmation function (blinking of the turn-signal lamps) and outer buzzer. NOTE Changing the number of blinks for the operation confirmation function (blinking of the turn-signal lamps). To lock/unlock without using the keyless operation function Emergency key The emergency key (A) can only be used to lock and unlock the door. To use the emergency key, unlock the lock knob (B) and remove it from the keyless operation key (C). 19 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 18 AG0010823 NOTE Only use the emergency key for emergencies. If the keyless operation key battery wears out, replace it as quickly as possible so that you can use the keyless operation key. NOTE The emergency key is built in the keyless operation key. NOTE After using the emergency key, always return it into the original position. Locking and unlocking the door Turning the emergency key in the forward direction locks the door, and turning it in the rear direction unlocks the door. Also refer to “Locking and unlocking: Doors”. 20 19 AHA105440 1 — Lock 2 — Unlock Operation of the Dead Lock System For vehicles equipped with the Dead Lock System, it is possible to set the Dead Lock System using the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch. Refer to “Dead Lock System”. Warning activation In order to prevent vehicle theft or the accidental operation of the keyless operation system, the lamp and buzzer are used to alert the driver. Buzzer Item Cause Note / Solution Keyless operation key take-out monitoring system When the vehicle is parked with the operation mode in any mode other than OFF, if you close the door after opening any of the doors and taking the keyless operation key out of the vehicle. Outer buzzer sounds 4 times at this time. And when a vehicle starts, inner buzzer sounds once. If you take the keyless operation key out of the vehicle through a window without opening a door, this system does not operate. It is possible to change the setting to make the system operate if you take the keyless operation key out from the vehicle through a window without opening a door. For further information, please contact a Fiat Dealership. Even if you have the keyless operation key within the engine start operating range, if the key and vehicle ID codes cannot be matched, for example due to the ambient environment or electromagnetic conditions, the warning may be activated. Key lock-in prevention system When the operation mode is in OFF, if you close all the doors with the keyless operation key left in the vehicle and you try to lock the doors by pressing the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch. Make sure you have the keyless operation key with you before locking the doors. Even if you leave the keyless operation key inside the vehicle, it is possible that the doors will lock depending on the surrounding environment and wireless signal conditions. — Replace the battery as soon as possible at a Fiat Dealership. Blinks Outer buzzer sounds 4 times. Inner buzzer sounds. Blinks Outer buzzer 3 sounds approximately 3 seconds Blinks Outer buzzer sounds approximately 3 seconds Door ajar prevention system When the operation mode is in OFF, if you try to lock the doors by pressing the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch with one of the doors not completely closed. Blinks No sound Keyless operation system The battery of the keyless operation key has worn out. 21 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 22 Buzzer Item Cause Note / Solution Please confirm that the keyless operation key is in the vehicle. If the key is in the vehicle, insert the slot. Starting the engine and changing the operation mode should be now possible. Illuminates No sound Keyless operation system A power supply is not switched over from OFF because the keyless operation key in the vehicle cannot be detected. When a warning is issued to being in the vehicle, it is because the battery of the keyless operation key has worn out or the state of the surrounding radio wave is bad. Illuminates No sound Keyless operation system There is a fault in the keyless operation system. If the warning lamp illuminates, please contact a Fiat Dealership. Illuminates Inner buzzer sounds (intermittent sounds) Keyless operation system There is a fault in the electrical system. If the warning lamp illuminates, please contact a Fiat Dealership. Illuminates Inner buzzer sounds (continuous sounds) Keyless operation system There is a fault in the electrical system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact a Fiat Dealership. Blinks Outer buzzer sounds approximately 3 seconds. Inner buzzer sounds approximately 1 minute. Keyless operation key reminder When the operation mode is in OFF with the keyless operation key left in the key slot, if you try to open the driver’s door. Remove the keyless operation key from the key slot. Refer to “Starting and stopping the engine”. Illuminates Inner buzzer 3 sounds Steering wheel lock There is a fault in the steering wheel lock system. Refer to “Steering wheel lock”. Buzzer Blinks Outer buzzer sounds approximately 3 seconds Buzzer Item Operation mode OFF reminder system Item Cause When the operation mode is in any mode other than OFF with all the doors are closed, if you try to lock by using the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch. Note / Solution Refer to “Operation mode OFF reminder system”. Cause Note / Solution Illuminates No sounds Immobilizer system There is a fault in the electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system). Put the operation mode in OFF and then start the engine again. If the warning is not cancelled, contact a Fiat Dealership. Blinks Inner buzzer sounds Steering wheel lock Steering wheel does not unlock. Unlock the steering wheel lock following the procedure of reference page. Refer to “Steering wheel lock” Illuminates No sounds Steering wheel lock Steering wheel lock is abnormal. Refer to “Steering wheel lock”. WARNING 1) When carrying a key on flights, do not press any switches on the key while on the plane. If a switch is pressed on the plane, the key emits electromagnetic waves, which could adversely affect the plane’s flight operation. When carrying a key in a bag, be careful that no switches on the key can be easily pressed by mistake. 2) Don’t make any alterations or additions to the immobilizer system; alterations or additions could cause failure of the immobilizer. 3) When the key case is opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc. out. Also, do not touch the internal components. 4) People with implantable cardiac pacemakers or implantable cardiovasculardefibrillators should not go near the exterior transmitters (A) or the interior transmitters (B). The radio waves used by the keyless operation system could adversely affect implantable cardiac pacemakers or implantable cardiovascular-defibrillators. 23 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 5) When using electro-medical devices other than implantable cardiac pacemakers or implantable cardiovascular-defibrillators, contact the electro-medical device manufacturer ahead of time to determine the adverse effects of radio waves on the devices. Electro-medical device operations could be affected by radio waves. IGNITION SWITCH (where provided) IMPORTANT 1) Used batteries are harmful to the environment. You can dispose of them either in the correct containers as specified by law or by taking them to a Fiat Dealership, which will deal with their disposal. 22 AG0004466 LOCK The engine is stopped and the steering wheel locked. The key can only be inserted and removed in this position. NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with an electronic immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code which the transponder inside the key sends must match the one registered in the immobilizer computer. Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)”. To remove the key For vehicles equipped with a M/T, when removing the key, push the key in at the “ACC” position and keep it depressed until it is turned to the “LOCK” position and remove it. For vehicles equipped with A/T, when removing the key, first set the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position, and push the key in at the “ACC” position and keep it depressed until it is turned to the “LOCK” position, and remove it. ACC The engine is stopped, but the audio system and other electric devices can be operated. ON All the vehicle’s electrical devices can be operated. START The starter motor operates. After the engine has started, release the key and it will automatically return to the “ON” position. 23 AHA103488 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 1) 2) 3) 24 transponder inside the key sends must match the one registered in the immobilizer computer. Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)”. ENGINE SWITCH (where provided) In order to prevent theft, the engine will not start unless a pre-registered keyless operation key is used. (Engine immobilizer function) If you are carrying the keyless operation key, you can start the engine. 25 24 AHA105990 4) 5) 6) 7) NOTE When operating the engine switch, press the switch all the way in. If the switch is not fully pressed, the engine may not start or the operation mode may not change. If the engine switch is pressed correctly, there is no need to hold the engine switch down. NOTE When the battery in the keyless operation key has worn out, or the keyless operation key is out of the vehicle, a warning lamp will blink for 5 seconds. AHA103505 Operation mode of the engine switch and its function OFF The indicator lamp on the engine switch turns off. The operation mode cannot be put in OFF when the selector lever is in any position other than the “P” (PARK) position (A/T). ACC Electrical devices such as the audio and accessory socket can be operated. The indicator lamp on the engine switch illuminates orange. ON All vehicle’s electrical devices can be operated. The indicator lamp on the engine switch illuminates green. The indicator lamp turns off when the engine is running. NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code which the Changing the operation mode If you press the engine switch without depressing the brake pedal (A/T) or the clutch pedal (M/T), you can change the operation mode in the order of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF. 26 AG0022644 8) 9) ACC power auto-cutout function After about 30 minutes has elapsed with the operation mode in ACC, the function automatically cuts out the power for the audio system and other electric devices that can be operated with that position. (only that driver’s door has closed and the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position). 25 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE When you open driver’s door or the engine switch operate again, the power is supplied again. NOTE When ACC power supply automatic stop, the steering wheel can’t lock and you can’t lock and unlock the doors by the keyless entry key and keyless operation key. NOTE It is possible to modify functions as follows: The time until the power cuts out can be changed to about 60 minutes. The ACC power auto-cutout function can be deactivated. For details, we recommend you to consult a Fiat Dealership. Operation mode OFF reminder system 27 26 AHA103505 When the operation mode is in any mode other than OFF, if you close all the doors then try to lock the doors by pressing the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch, a warning lamp will blink and the outer buzzer will sounds and you cannot lock the doors. Operation mode ON reminder system If the driver’s door is opened with the engine stopped and the operation mode in any mode other than OFF, the operation mode ON reminder inner buzzer sounds intermittently to remind you to put the operation mode in OFF. WARNING 6) Do not remove the ignition key from the ignition switch while driving. The steering wheel will be locked, causing loss of control. 7) If the ignition device has been tampered with (e.g. an attempted theft), have it checked over by a Fiat Dealership before driving again. 8) Always remove the key when you leave your vehicle to prevent someone from accidentally operating the controls. Remember to engage the handbrake. Engage first gear if the vehicle is parked uphill or reverse gear if the vehicle is parked downhill. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. 9) Never extract the key while the vehicle is moving. The steering wheel will lock as soon as it is turned. This also applies to cases in which the vehicle is towed. 10) Under no circumstances should aftermarket operations be carried out involving steering system or steering column modifications (e.g. installation of anti-theft device). This could negatively affect performance and safety, invalidate the warranty, cause serious safety problems and also result in vehicle non-compliance with type-approval requirements. IMPORTANT 1) If the engine is stopped while driving, the brake servomechanism will cease to function and braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also, the power steering system will not function and it will require greater manual effort to operate the steering. 2) Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for a long time when the engine is not running, doing so will cause the battery to be discharged. 3) Do not turn the key to the “START” position while the engine is running. Doing so could damage the starter motor. 4) The indicator lamp (A) fig. 24 will flash orange when there is a problem or malfunction in the keyless operation system. Never drive if the indicator lamp on the engine switch is flashing orange. Immediately contact your Fiat Dealership. 5) If the engine switch operation is not smooth and feels like it is sticking, do not operate the switch. Immediately contact your Fiat Dealership. 6) When the engine is not running, put the operation mode in OFF. Leaving the operation mode in ON or ACC for a long time when the engine is not running may cause the battery to be discharged, making it impossible to start the engine, lock and unlock the steering wheel. 7) When the battery is disconnected, the current operation mode is memorized. After reconnecting the battery, the memorized mode is selected automatically. Before disconnecting the battery for repair or replacement, make sure to put the operation mode in OFF. Be careful if you are not sure which operation mode the vehicle is in when the battery is run down. 8) The operation mode cannot be changed from OFF to ACC or ON if the keyless operation key is not detected to be in the vehicle. Refer to “Keyless operation system: Operating range for starting the engine and changing the operation mode”. 9) When there is the keyless operation key in the vehicle and the operation mode isn’t change, the keyless operation key may have worn out. DOORS To lock or unlock from inside the vehicle 11) 12) 13) NOTE To prevent the key from being locked inside the vehicle, neither the lock knob on the driver’s door nor the key can be used to lock the driver’s door when it is open. To lock or unlock with the key 29 AHA105466 A — Lock B — Unlock 28 AHA105453 A — Lock B — Unlock NOTE On vehicles with central door locks, when locking or unlocking with the key, all doors will be locked or unlocked. Refer to “Central door locks”. NOTE The driver’s door can be opened without using the lock knob by pulling on the inside door handle. On vehicles with central door locks, all other doors are unlocked at the same time. NOTE In a vehicle that has a Dead Lock System, it is not possible to unlock the door by pushing the lock knob to the unlock side while the Dead Lock System is set. (Refer to “Dead Lock System”). NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with the keyless operation system, the driver’s door can be locked or unlocked with the emergency key. Refer to “Emergency key”. 27 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 28 To open or close the rear door (Club cab) You can open or close the rear door while the front door is opened. 1. Open the front door wide. 2. Pull the door handle (A) of the rear door. 3. Open the rear door. 4. When closing these doors, close the front door after closing the rear door. To lock without using the key 30 Driver’s door with key Using the key on the driver’s door locks or unlocks. AHA105479 Set the inside lock knob (1) to the locked position, and close the door (2). NOTE The driver’s door cannot be locked using the inside lock knob while the driver’s door is opened. Ignition key reminder Except for vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system If the ignition switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the key in the ignition switch, the key reminder buzzer will sound intermittently to remind you to remove the key. “Forgotten-key-prevention” mechanism If the key is in the ignition switch or the operation mode is other than OFF, when you push the lock knob forward with the driver’s door open, the lock knob will automatically return to the unlocked position. 32 31 AHA104036 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19) CENTRAL DOOR LOCKS Repeated continuous operation between lock and unlock could activate the central door locking systems built-in protection circuit and prevent the system from operating. If this occurs, wait approximately 1 minute before operating the central door lock system. All of the doors can be locked and unlocked as described hereafter. AHA105453 A — Lock B — Unlock NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with the keyless operation system, the driver’s door can be locked or unlocked with the emergency key. Refer to “Emergency key”. Driver’s door with inside lock knob Using the door lock knob on the driver’s door locks or unlocks all doors. 33 AHA105466 A — Lock B — Unlock NOTE Be careful not to lock the doors while the key is inside the vehicle when getting off the vehicle. Vehicle-speed sensitive automatic door lock (with impact sensitive unlock mechanism) All of the doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 15 km/h. In addition, all of the doors unlock when a strong impact that could be very dangerous to the occupants is sustained by the collision of the vehicle. This is prepared for rescue activities when an unexpected accident occurs. 20) NOTE Even if the vehicle suffers significant deformation from a collision etc., depending on the location and angle of the collision, as well as on the shape and condition of the other object in the collision, the doors may not unlock. The extent of deformation or damage to the vehicle does not necessarily correlate with unlock of the doors. NOTE These functions are activated when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. If you wish to activate or deactivate these functions, please contact a Fiat Dealership. Unlock using the ignition switch, the engine switch or the selector lever It is possible to unlock all of the doors whenever as follows. Vehicles with M/T — The ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” position or the operation mode is put in OFF. Vehicles with A/T — The selector lever placed the “P” (PARK) position while the operation mode is in ON. Or the operation mode is put in OFF. These functions are deactivated when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. If you wish to activate or deactivate these functions, please contact a Fiat Dealership. DEAD LOCK SYSTEM The Dead Lock System helps prevent theft. When the keyless entry system or the keyless operation function has been used to lock all of the doors, the Dead Lock System makes it impossible to unlock the doors using the inside lock knobs. NOTE Do not set the Dead Lock System when someone is inside the vehicle. With the Dead Lock System set, it is not possible to unlock the doors using the inside lock knobs. If you erroneously set the Dead Lock System, unlock the doors using the UNLOCK switch on the key or using the keyless operation function. Setting the system 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position and then remove the key (vehicles with keyless entry system), or put the operation mode in OFF (vehicles with keyless operation system). 2. Get out of the vehicle. Close all of the doors. 3. Press the LOCK switch (A) on the key, the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch (C) to lock all of the doors. The turn-signal lamps will blink once. 4. Press the switch again within 2 seconds. The turn-signal lamps will blink three times to show that the Dead Lock System has been set. 29 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The UNLOCK switch (B) on the key is pressed. The driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch (C) is pressed while you are carrying the keyless operation key. 34 35 AA0111155 AHA106450 NOTE Pressing the LOCK switch (A) on the key once while the Dead Lock System is set causes the turn-signal lamps to blink three times, so it is possible to confirm that the Dead Lock System is set. Cancelling the system When the following operation is performed, the doors will unlock and the Dead Lock System will be simultaneously cancelled. 30 NOTE If a door is opened within 30 seconds of unlocking, the doors are automatically relocked and the Dead Lock System is simultaneously set again. NOTE Even when it is not possible to use the keyless entry system or keyless operation function to unlock the doors, it is possible to use the key to unlock the driver’s door. When the key is used to unlock the driver’s door, the Dead Lock System is cancelled for only the driver’s door. If you wish to subsequently unlock all other doors, turn the ignition switch to the “ON” or “ACC” position, or put the operation mode in on or ACC. NOTE It is possible to adjust the time between pressing of the UNLOCK switch (B) on the key or the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch (C) and automatic locking. For details, please contact a Fiat Dealership. NOTE It is possible to lock the doors and set the Dead Lock System at the same time with a single push of the LOCK switch (A) on the key, the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch (C). For details, please contact a Fiat Dealership. Testing the system Open all of the door windows, then set the Dead Lock System. (Refer to “Setting the system”.) After setting the Dead Lock System, reach into the vehicle through the windows and confirm that you cannot unlock the doors using the lock knobs. NOTE If you need advice on how to set the Dead Lock System, please contact a Fiat Dealership. CHILD PROTECTION REAR DOORS (Double Cab) 36 A — Lock B — Unlock AHA101862 Child protection helps prevent doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the rear seat. A lever is provided on each rear door. If the lever is set to the locked position, the rear door cannot be opened using the inside handle. To open the rear door while the child protection is in use, pull the outside door handle. If the lever is set to the “Unlock” position, the child protection mechanism does not function. To close Raise the rear gate and close with enough force to latch the assembly securely into position. 39 2 — Remove the wire (1) on one side while aligning the hole in the wire with the hook (2). 21) 22) 23) REAR GATE 38 To open Lift up the handle and lower the rear gate. AHA113263 AHA101888 24) 25) 26) 27) 28) 29) To swing down 30) 31) The rear gate can be swung down in two stages except some models. To lower it to the second stage, proceed as follows: 1 — Swing open the rear gate to the first position. Then, lift it up to the position shown in the illustration while holding the link or wire (1). 37 40 AHA113276 AHA101875 31 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 32 3 — Remove the wire on the other side in the same manner, and have the rear gate swing down slowly. 41 AHA112934 WARNING 11) Make sure the doors are closed: driving with doors not completely closed is dangerous. 12) NEVER leave children unattended inside the car, let alone leave the car with the doors unlocked in a place that children can access easily. Children may seriously, or even fatally, injure themselves. Also ensure that children do not inadvertently operate 13) Be careful not to lock the doors while the key is inside the vehicle. 14) When opening the rear door, confirm that the occupant of the front seat has taken off the seat belt before opening the rear door. If you open the rear door with the front seat belt being worn, the occupant of the front seat may be tightened with the locked seat belt and could result in serious injury. 15) When closing the rear door, make sure not being trapped your hands or your fingers in the doors. 16) Before driving, make sure that the rear door is securely closed. If a door is ajar, the door ajar warning lamp will illuminates. If a door is not completely closed, the rear door could open while driving and this could cause an accident such as occupants being thrown from the vehicle. 17) When opening or closing the rear door, please observe the followings. If you do not follow them, it could result in damage to your vehicle. Do not open or close the rear door and the front door at the same time. 18) Do not open or close the rear door when the front door is not completely opened. 19) Do not close the rear door after closing the front door. 20) When the vehicle-speed sensitive automatic door lock/Impact-sensitive unlock mechanism may not operate in the following conditions, have the vehicle inspected at a Fiat Dealership immediately. 1– The door does not lock automatically even when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 15 km/h. 2 — The door unlocks automatically while driving. 3 — Even when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON, the SRS warning lamp does not come on or it remains on. 4 — The SRS warning lamp comes on while driving. 5 — The central door lock system is broken down. 21) When driving with a child in the rear seat, please use the child protection to prevent accidental door opening which may cause an accident. 22) If the child lock was engaged and the previously described locking procedure carried out, operating the internal opening handle will not open the door: in this case, to open the door, the outside handle must be used. The door central locking/ unlocking button is not disabled by the engagement of the emergency lock. 23) Always use this device when carrying children. After engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for effective engagement by trying to open a door with the internal handle. 24) Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when loading and unloading luggage. Heat from the exhaust could lead to burns. 25) Pay attention not to catch your fingers in the rear gate. 26) Do not weight the rear gate. 27) Before driving, make sure that the rear gate is securely closed. If the rear gate opens while driving the vehicle, objects stored in the cargo area could fall out onto the road. 28) Once the dead lock system is engaged it is impossible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Therefore, before engaging the system check that there is no one left inside. If the remote control battery is flat, the system can be disengaged only by inserting the key metal insert in either of the door locks as described previously: in this case the device remains active only for the rear doors. 29) This spring loaded system has activation forces that were designed for optimum comfort. Accidental knocks or a strong gust of wind may release the springs and close the doors spontaneously. 30) On vehicles with the rear bumper, never swing down the rear gate because the rear gate could be damaged. 31) Never close the rear gate with the link or wire left unhooked. SEATS Power type (where provided) SEAT ADJUSTMENT Adjust the driver’s seat so that you are comfortable and that you can reach the pedals, steering wheel, switches etc. while retaining a clear field of vision. 32) 33) 34) 35) 36) 37) 38) 39) 40) 41) 42) 43) 44) 45) 10) FRONT SEATS Manual type 43 42 AHA105626 1 — To adjust forward or backward: Lift the handle and adjust the seat to the desired position, and release the handle. 2 — To recline the seatback: Pull the lever up and then lean backward to the desired position, and release the lever. 3 — To adjust seat cushion height (driver’s side only of Club cab and Double cab): Turn the dial and adjust the seat cushion height to the desired position. AHA105639 1 — To adjust forward or backward: Operate the switch as indicated by the arrows and adjust the seat to the desired position. 2 — To recline the seatback: Operate the switch as indicated by the arrows and adjust the seatback angle to the desired position. 3 — To adjust seat height: Operate the switch as indicated by the arrows and adjust the seat height to the desired position. If the entire switch is operated, then the entire seat moves. 4 — To adjust seat cushion angle: Operate the switch as indicated by the arrows and adjust the seat cushion angle to the desired position. NOTE To prevent the battery from running down, operate the switch with the engine running. 33 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Passenger’s seat (Single cab and Double cab) To access the onboard tool kit (Single cab): fold forward the seatback of the passenger’s seat. Refer to “Tools, jack and jack handle”. Pull the band and fold the seatback forward. To recline the seatback: pull the band and then learn backward to the desired position, and release the band. 45 AHA106216 46 AHA102999 47 AHA103996 1. (HI) — Heater high (for quick heating). 2. Heater off. 3. (LO) — Heater low (to keep the seat warm). 46) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 44 AHA105642 Heated seats The heated seats can be operated with the ignition switch or the operation mode in ON. Operate the switch as indicated by arrows. The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while the heater is on. REAR SEAT (Club cab and Double cab) When a person is sitting in the middle seating position of the rear seat, adjust the head restraint to height at which it lock in position. Refer to “Head restraints”. Folding the seatback forward (Double cab) Pull up the band on the top of the seatback and fold it forward. To return Raise the seatback until it is locked securely in place. Push and pull the seatback lightly to be sure it is secure. Folding up the seat cushion (Club cab) The right and left seat cushions can be folded up separately. To fold the seat cushions up, raise the seat cushions. 34 Securely retain the seat cushion by hooking the retaining band (A) onto the head restraint (B) of the rear seat. NOTE Do not climb or sit on the armrest. Doing so could damage the armrest. NOTE The top surface of the armrest contains a cup holder for rear seat occupants. Refer to “Cup holder”. WARNING 48 AHA105121 Armrest (Double cab) To use the armrest, fold it down. To return to the original position, push it backward (into the seatback) until it is flush with the seat. (Double cab). 49 32) All adjustments must be made with the vehicle stationary. 33) Do not attempt to adjust the seat while driving. This can cause loss of vehicle control and result in an accident. After adjustments are made, ensure the seating is locked in position by attempting to move the seat forward and rearward without using the adjusting mechanism. 34) After releasing the adjustment lever, always check that the seat is locked on the guides by trying to move it back and forth. If it is not locked, the seat may move unexpectedly and make you lose control of the vehicle. 35) For maximum safety, keep the back of your seat upright, lean back into it and make sure the seat belt fits closely across your chest and pelvis. 36) Make sure the backrests are properly secured at both sides (not visible "red notches”) to prevent them from moving forward, in the event of sharp braking, with possible impact with of the passengers. 37) It is extremely dangerous to ride in the cargo area of a vehicle. Also, the cargo area and rear seats should never be used as a play area by children. In a collision, people or children riding unrestrained in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. 38) Do not allow people or children to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts, and make sure that everyone travelling in your vehicle is in a seat and wearing a seat belt, or in the case of a child is strapped in a child restraint. 39) To minimize the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision or sudden braking, the seatbacks should always be in the almost upright position while the vehicle is in motion. The protection provided by the seat belts may be reduced significantly when the seatback is reclined. There is greater risk that the passenger will slide under the seat belt, resulting in serious injury, when the seatback is reclined. 40) Do not place objects under the seats. This could prevent the seat from locking securely, and it could lead to an accident. It may also cause damage to the seat or other parts. 41) Make sure the seat is adjusted by an adult or with adult supervision for correct and safe operation. 42) Do not place a cushion or the like between your back and the seatback while driving. The effectiveness of the head restraints will be reduced in the event of an accident. AHA103000 35 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43) The reclining mechanism of the front manual seat's seatback is spring loaded, causing it to fold the seatback forward when the lock lever is operated. When using the lever, sit close to the seatback or hold it with your hand to control its return motion. 44) When sliding the seats, be careful not to catch your hand or foot. 45) If your vehicle is equipped with the rear seat, when sliding or reclining the seat rearward, pay careful attention to the rear seat passengers. 46) If the following types of persons use the heated seats, they might become too hot or receive minor burns (red skin, heat blisters, etc.): children, elderly or ill people, people with sensitive skin, excessively tired people, people under the influence of alcohol or sleep inducing medication (cold medicine, etc.). IMPORTANT 10) The fabric upholstery of the seats has been designed to withstand long-term wear deriving from normal use of the car. Some precautions are however required. Avoid prolonged and/or excessive rubbing against clothing accessories such as metal buckles and Velcro strips which, by applying a high pressure on the fabric in a small area, could cause it to break, thereby damaging the upholstery. 36 11) Operate in the “HI” position for quick heating. Once the seat is warm, set the heater switch to the “LO” position to keep it warm. Slight variations in seat temperature may be felt while using the heated seats. This is caused by the operation of the heater’s internal thermostat and does not indicate a malfunction. 12) Do not place heavy objects on the seat or stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects into it. 13) Do not use a blanket, cushion, or other material with high heat insulation properties on the seat while using the heater; this might cause the heater element to overheat. 14) Do not use benzine, kerosene, petrol, alcohol or other organic solvents when cleaning the seats. Doing so could damage not only the seat cover, but also the heater element. 15) If water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before attempting to use the heater. 16) Turn the heater off immediately if it appears to be malfunctioning during use. HEAD RESTRAINTS 47) 48) 49) 50) 51) 52) 50 AHA103013 NOTE The head restraint height of the outer seat in the rear seat cannot be adjusted. Front seats Adjust the head restraint height so that the centre of the head restraint is as close as possible to ear level to reduce the chances of injury in the event of collision. Any person too tall for the head restraint to reach their seated ear level, should adjust the restraint as high as possible. To raise the head restraint, move it upward. To lower the restraint, move it downward while pushing the height adjusting knob (A) in the direction of the arrow. After adjustment, push the head restraint downward and make sure that it is locked. The head restraint height of the outer seat in the rear seat cannot be adjusted. To remove Lift the head restraint with the height adjusting knob (A) pushed in. 51 AHA103026 Rear centre seat To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, pull up the head restraint to the locked position. To raise the head restraint, move it upward. To lower the restraint, move it downward while pushing the height adjusting knob (A) in the direction of the arrow. After adjustment, push the head restraint downward and make sure that it is locked. To install Make sure that the head restraint is facing the correct direction, and then insert it into the seatback while pressing the height adjusting knob (A) in the direction indicated by the arrow. The head restraint stalk with the adjustment notches (B) must be installed in the hole with the adjusting knob (A) (except head restraints of the outer seat). 53 52 54 AHA103042 55 AHA103055 AHA103039 AHA103026 37 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 38 WARNING 47) All adjustments must only be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the engine off. Head restraints must be adjusted so that the head, rather than the neck, rests on them. Only in this case can they protect your head correctly. To take best advantage of the protection provided by the head restraint, adjust the seat back so that you are sitting up straight and your head is as close to the head restraint as possible. 48) Driving without the head restraints in place can cause you and your passengers serious injury or death in an accident. To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, always make sure the head restraints are installed and properly positioned when the seat is occupied. 49) Never place a cushion or similar device on the seatback. This can adversely affect head restraint performance by increasing the distance between your head and the restraint. 50) When a person sits in the middle seating position of the rear seat, pull up the head restraint to a height at which it locks in position. Be sure to make this adjustment before starting to drive. Serious injuries could otherwise be suffered in the result of an impact (Double cab). 51) Make sure that the height adjusting knob (A) is correctly adjusted as shown in the illustration, and also lift the head restraints to ensure that they do not come out of the seatback. 52) The shape and size of the head restraint differs according to the seat. Always use the correct head restraint provided for the seat and do not install the head restraint in the wrong direction. STEERING WHEEL STEERING WHEEL HEIGHT AND REACH ADJUSTMENT (Vehicles equipped with the reach adjustment) 1. Release the lever while holding the steering wheel up. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. 3. Securely lock the steering wheel by pulling the lever fully upward. 56 AA0110800 A. Locked B. Release 53) 54) 55) STEERING WHEEL LOCK Except for vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system To lock Remove the key at the “LOCK” position. Turn the steering wheel until it is locked. To unlock Turn the key to the “ACC” position while moving the steering wheel slightly right and left. Open or close the driver’s door. Close all the doors. Open one of the doors when all the doors are closed. Lock all the doors with the keyless entry system or the keyless operation function. The selector lever is the “P” (PARK) position (A/T). NOTE When the door is opened while the steering wheel does not lock, the buzzer sounds to alert the steering wheel is unlocked. To unlock The following methods can be used to unlock the steering wheel. Put the operation mode in ACC. Start the engine. 58 AHZ100903 NOTE If there is a fault in the steering wheel lock, the warning lamp illuminates. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact a Fiat Dealership. 18) 19) 57 AHA103808 For vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system To lock After pressing the engine switch and operation mode in OFF, when driver’s door is opened, the steering wheel is locked. NOTE When the following operation is performed with the operation mode in OFF, the steering wheel is locked. NOTE When the steering wheel does not unlock, the warning lamp will blink and the inner buzzer will sounds and warning lamp illuminates. Press the engine switch again while moving the steering wheel slightly right and left. NOTE When the steering wheel lock is abnormal, the warning lamp illuminates. Put the operation mode in OFF and then press the lock switch of the keyless operation key. And then press the engine switch, If the warning lamp illuminates again, contact a Fiat Dealership. 59 AHA103505 39 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE HORN SWITCH Press the steering wheel on or around the horn mark. Type 1 60 Type 2 61 40 AA0108106 WARNING 53) Any steering wheel position adjustment should only be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the engine turned off. 54) Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheel while you are driving the vehicle. 55) It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any after-market operation involving steering system or steering column modifications (e.g.: installation of anti-theft device). This could badly affect performance and safety, invalidate the warranty and also result in the non-compliance of the vehicle with approval requirements. REAR VIEW MIRRORS INSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR 56) 57) 58) 59) Adjust the rear view mirror only after making any seat adjustments so you have a clear view to the rear of the vehicle. IMPORTANT AHA107590 17) Remove the key when leaving the vehicle. In some countries, it is prohibited to leave the key on the vehicle when parked. 18) If the engine is stopped while driving, do not open a door or press the LOCK switch on the key until the vehicle stops in a safe place. This could cause the steering wheel to lock, making it impossible to operate the vehicle. 19) Carry the key with you when leaving the vehicle. If your vehicle needs to be towed, perform the following operation to unlock the steering wheel: on vehicles with M/T, put the operation mode in ACC or ON, on vehicles with A/T, put the operation mode in ON. 62 AJA107381 Adjust the rear view mirror to maximize the view through the rear window. To adjust the vertical mirror position It is possible to move the mirror up and down to adjust its position. NOTE Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner on the sensor (1), as reduced sensitivity could result. OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRRORS To adjust the mirror position 56) 57) 58) 63 AA0022369 To adjust the mirror position It is possible to move the mirror up/down and left/right to adjust its position. 65 AA0001425 Manual outside rear view mirrors Adjust the mirror surface by hands as indicated by the arrows. 1. Normal 2. Anti-glare Type 2: When the headlamps of the vehicles behind you are very bright, the reflection factor of the rear view mirror is automatically changed to reduce the glare. 67 64 AA0108151 To reduce the glare Type 1: The lever (A) at the bottom of the mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to reduce the glare from the headlamps of vehicles behind you during night driving. 66 AA0094830 AHA105280 Electric remote-controlled outside rear view mirrors (where provided) The electric remote-controlled outside rear view mirrors can be operated when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position or the operation mode is put in ON or ACC. When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, the reflection factor of the mirror is automatically changed. 41 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 68 AH3100434 1. Place the lever (A) to the same side as the mirror whose adjustment is desired. 2. Press the switch (B) to the left, right, up or down to adjust the mirror position. 3. Return the lever (A) back to the middle position. Retracting and extending the outside mirrors The outside mirror can be folded in towards the side window to prevent damage when parking in narrow areas. 20) For vehicles without mirror retractor switch Push the mirror towards the back of the vehicle with your hand to retract it in. When extending the mirror, pull it out towards the front of the vehicle until it clicks to lock in place. 20) 42 69 AHA104935 For vehicles with mirror retractor switch With the ignition switch or the operation mode in ON or ACC, push the mirror retractor switch to retract the mirrors. Push it again to extend the mirrors to their original positions. After turning the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position or putting the operation mode in OFF, it is possible to retract and extend the mirrors using the mirror retractor switch for about 30 seconds. 70 AA0022398 NOTE Be careful not to get your hands trapped while a mirror is moving. NOTE If you move a mirror by hand or it moves after hitting a person or object, you may not be able to return it to its original position using the mirror retractor switch. If this happens, push the mirror retractor switch to place the mirror in its retracted position and then push the switch again to return the mirror to its original position. NOTE When freezing has occurred and mirrors fail to operate as intended, please refrain from repeated pushing of the retractor switch as this action can result in burn-out of the mirror motor circuits. Retracting and extending the mirrors without using the mirror retractor switch (where provided) Except for vehicles equipped with the keyless entry key or the keyless operation key The mirrors automatically extend when the vehicle speed reaches 30 km/h. Vehicles equipped with keyless entry key The mirrors automatically retract or extend when the doors are locked or unlocked using the key switches of the keyless entry system. Refer to “Keyless entry system”. Vehicles equipped with the keyless operation key The mirrors automatically retract or extend when the doors are locked or unlocked using the key switches or the keyless operation function of the keyless operation system. Refer to “Keyless entry system”. Refer to “Keyless operation system: To operate using the keyless operation function”. Functions can be modified as stated below. Please consult a Fiat Dealership: Automatically extend when the driver’s door is closed, and then the following operation is performed. 1 — Except for vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system: turn the ignition switch to the “ON” or “ACC” position. 2 — Vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system: put the operation mode in ON or ACC. Automatically retract when the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” position or the operation mode is put in OFF, and the driver’s door is then opened. Automatically extend when the vehicle speed reaches 30 km/h (for vehicles equipped with the keyless entry key or the keyless operation key). Deactivate the automatic extension function. Type 1 Heated mirror (where provided) To demist or defrost the outside rear view mirrors, press the rear window demister switch. The indicator lamp (A) will illuminate while the demister is on. The heater will be turned off automatically in about 20 minutes depending on the outside temperature. Type 2 71 72 AHA101396 AA0110220 NOTE The heater mirrors can be turned on automatically. For further information, we recommend you to consult a Fiat Dealership. 43 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE EXTERNAL LIGHTS WARNING IMPORTANT 56) As the driver's exterior mirror is curved, it may slightly alter the perception of distance of the reflected image. Further, the reflective surface of the lower part of the exterior mirrors is parabolic to increase the field of view. The reflected image size is thus reduced and gives the impression that the reflected item is further away than it actually is. 57) Do not attempt to adjust the rear view mirrors while driving. This can be dangerous. Always adjust the mirrors before driving. 58) Your vehicle is equipped with convex type mirrors. Remind that objects that you see in the mirror will look smaller and farther away compared to a normal flat mirror. Do not use this mirror to estimate distance of following vehicles when changing lanes. 59) Do not drive the vehicle with the mirror folded in. The lack of rearward visibility normally provided by the mirror could lead to an accident. 20) It is possible to retract and extend the mirrors by hand. After retracting a mirror using the mirror retractor switch, however, you should extend it by using the switch again, not by hand. If you extended the mirror by hand after retracting it using the switch, it would not properly lock in position. As a result, it could move because of the wind or vibration while you are driving, taking away your rearward visibility. COMBINATION HEADLAMPS AND DIPPER SWITCH Headlamps NOTE Do not leave the lamps on for a long time while the engine is stationary (not running). A run-down battery could result. NOTE When it rains, or when the vehicle has been washed, the inside of the lens sometimes becomes foggy, but this does not indicate a functional problem. When the lamp is switched on, the heat will remove the fog. However, if water gathers inside the lamp, we recommend you to have checked. Type 1 Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps. 73 44 AA0061221 OFF— all lamps off — position, tail, licence plate and instrument panel lamps on — headlamps and other lamps go on Type 2 Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps. 74 AA0071497 OFF— all lamps off AUTO— with the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON, headlamps, position, tail, licence plate and instrument panel lamps turn on and off automatically in accordance with outside light level. All lamps turn off automatically when the ignition switch is turned to “OFF” position or the operation mode is put in OFF. — position, tail, licence plate and instrument panel lamps on — headlamps and other lamps go on NOTE The sensitivity of the automatic on/off control can be adjusted. For further information, contact a Fiat Dealership. NOTE If the front fog lamps (if so equipped) turn on when they are supposed to with the switch in the “AUTO” position, the lamps turn off automatically with the ignition switch or operation mode off. NOTE When the headlamps are turned off by the automatic on/off control with the ignition switch in the “ON” position or the operation mode in ON, the front fog lamps (if so equipped) and rear fog lamps (if so equipped) also go off. When the headlamps are subsequently turned back on by the automatic on/off control, the front fog lamps also come on but the rear fog lamp stay off. If you wish to turn the rear fog lamp back on, operate the switch again. NOTE Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automatic on/off control by affixing a sticker or label to the windscreen. 75 NOTE If the lamps do not turn on or off with the switch in the “AUTO” position, manually operate the switch and we recommend you to have your vehicle checked. Lamps (headlamps, fog lamp, etc.) auto-cutout function If the following operation is performed while the lamp switch is in position, the lamps are the automatically turned off when the driver’s door is opened. [Except for vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system] The ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” or “ACC” position, or the key is removed from the ignition switch. [For vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system] The operation mode is put in OFF or ACC. If the following operation is performed while the lamp switch is in position, the lamps are the automatically turned off if the driver’s door then remains closed for approximately three minutes. [Except for vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system] The ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” or “ACC” position, or the key is removed from the ignition switch. [For vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system] The operation mode is put in OFF or ACC. AJZ101023 45 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The lamp auto-cutout function can also be disabled. For further information, we recommend you to consult a Fiat Dealership. HEADLAMP LEVELLING SWITCH (where provided) 62) Lamp monitor buzzer If the following operation is performed, a buzzer will sound to remind the driver to turn off the lamps. [Except for vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system] If the driver’s door is opened when the key is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or removed from the ignition switch while the lamps are on. [For vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system] If the driver’s door is opened when the operation mode is in ACC or OFF while the lamps are on. In both cases, the buzzer will automatically stop if the auto-cutoff function is activated, the lamp switch is turned off, or the door is closed. Daytime running lamp The daytime running lamps comes on when the engine is running and the lamp switch is in the “OFF” or “AUTO” position and the tail lamps are off. 60) 61) Dipper (High/Low beam change) When the lamp switch is in the position, the beam changes from high to low (or low to high) each time the lever is pulled fully (A). While the high beam is on, the high beam 46 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster will also illuminate. 76 AA0061218 Headlamp flasher The high beams flash when the lever is pulled slightly (B), and will go off when it is released. When the high beam is on, the high beam indicator lamp in the instrument cluster will illuminate. The angle of the headlamp beam varies depending upon the load carried by the vehicle. The headlamp levelling switch can be used to adjust the headlamp illumination distance (when the lower beam is illuminated) so that the headlamps’ glare does not distract the drivers of approaching vehicles. Set the switch (referring to the following table) to the appropriate position according to the number of people and the load in the vehicle. NOTE The high beams can also flash when the lamp switch is OFF. NOTE If you turn the lamps off with the headlamps set to high beam, the headlamps are automatically returned to their low-beam setting when the lamp switch is next turned to the position. 77 AHA105525 NOTE When adjusting the beam position, first put the dial in the “0” position (the highest beam position). Vehicle condition — Single Cab Switch position 0 — Driver only. Switch position 2 — Driver and full luggage loading. Vehicle condition — Club Cab and Double Cab Switch position 0 — Driver only. Switch position 3 — Driver and full luggage loading (except for vehicles with high intensity discharge headlamps and 16 inch tyre). Switch position 4 — Driver and full luggage loading (vehicles with high intensity discharge headlamps and 16 inch tyre). TURN SIGNAL LEVER The turn-signal lamps flash when the lever is operated (with the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON). At the same time, the turn-signal indicator flashes. 78 AA0061205 A — Turn-signals: when making a normal turn, use position (A). The lever will return automatically when cornering is completed. B — Lane change signals: when moving the lever to (B) slightly to change a lane, the turn-signal lamps and indicator lamp in the instrument cluster will only flash while the lever is operated. Also, when you move the lever to (B) slightly then release it, the turn-signal lamps and indicator lamp in the instrument cluster will flash three times. NOTE If the lamp flashes unusually quickly, the bulb in a turn-signal lamp may have burned out. We recommend you to have the vehicle inspected. It is possible to activate the following functions: Flashing of the turn-signal lamps when the lever is operated with the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ACC The turn-signal lamps 3-flash function for lane changes can be deactivated. The time required to operate the lever for the 3-flash function can be adjusted. Changing of the tone of a sounding buzzer as the turn-signal lamps flash. For further information, we recommend you to consult a Fiat Dealership. HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH Use the hazard warning flasher switch when the vehicle has to be parked on the road for any emergency. The hazard warning flashers can always be operated, regardless of the ignition switch position or the operation mode. Push the switch to turn on the hazard warning flashers, all turn signal lamps flash continuously. To turn them off, push the switch again. NOTE On vehicles equipped with the emergency brake system, while the hazard warning lamps are blinking due to having manually pushed the switch, the emergency brake system does not operate. Refer to “Emergency brake system”. 79 AHA101383 47 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE FOG LAMP SWITCH (where provided) Front fog lamp switch The front fog lamps can be operated while the headlamps or tail lamps are on. Turn the knob in the “ON” direction to turn on the front fog lamps. An indicator lamp in the instrument cluster will also come on. Turn the knob in the “OFF” direction to turn off the front fog lamps. The knob will automatically return to its original position when you release it. 80 AG0004596 NOTE The front fog lamps are automatically turned off when the headlamps or tail lamps are turned off. To turn the front fog lamps on again, turn the knob in the “ON” direction after turning on the headlamps or tail lamps. 48 NOTE Do not use fog lamps except in conditions of fog, otherwise excessive lamp glare may temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers. Rear fog lamp switch The rear fog lamp can be operated when the headlamps or front fog lamps (if so equipped) turn on. An indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on when the rear fog lamp is turned on. Vehicle without front fog lamps: Turn the knob once in the “ON” direction to turn on the rear fog lamp. To turn the rear fog lamp off, turn the knob once in the “OFF” direction. The knob will automatically return to its original position when you release it. Vehicle with front fog lamps: Turn the knob once in the “ON” direction to turn on the front fog lamps. Turn the knob once more in the “ON” direction to turn on the rear fog lamp. To turn the rear fog lamp off, turn the knob once in the “OFF” direction. Turn the knob once more in the “OFF” direction to turn off the front fog lamps. The knob will automatically return to its original position when you release it. 81 AG0004596 NOTE The rear fog lamp is automatically turned off when the headlamps or front fog lamps (if so equipped) are turned off. NOTE To turn the rear fog lamp on again, turn the knob once in the “ON” direction after turning on the headlamps. (Vehicle without front fog lamps) To turn the rear fog lamp on again, turn the knob twice in the “ON” direction after turning on the headlamps. (Vehicle with front fog lamps) MASKING THE HEADLAMPS When entering a country in which vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the road to the country in which your vehicles is supplied, necessary measures have to be taken to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. High intensity discharge headlamp type Do not need any adjustment. Halogen headlamp type Mask the headlamps according to the next procedure. Turn the headlamp off and wait until the headlamps got cold.According to the illustrations, prepare the sticker (A) to stick the headlamp surface of right and left.Seeing from the headlamp front, position (C) of the sticker and the central mark (B) of the headlamp and stick a sticker along the vertical dotted line. NOTE Use a sticker with a light blocking effect enough. Using of a sticker without a light blocking effect will not acquire a blocking effect. NOTE Align the vertical dotted line with the line of the reflector in the headlamp. 82 AHE100267 83 AHE100270 WARNING 60) The daytime running lights are an alternative to dipped beam headlights for driving during the daytime. They are compliant in countries where is it obligatory to have lights on during the day and permitted in those where it is not obligatory. 49 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61) Daytime running lights cannot replace dipped beam headlights when driving at night or through tunnels. The use of daytime running lights is governed by the highway code of the country in which you are driving. Comply with legal requirements. 62) Always perform adjustments before driving. Do not attempt to adjust while driving, as it could cause an accident. INTERIOR LAMPS 84 86 AHA104818 87 AA0082790 1. Front room & map lamps 2. Rear room lamp If you leave the lamps on without running the engine, you will run down the battery. Before you leave the vehicle, make sure that all the lamps are off. Room lamps Front 85 50 AHA106144 Rear AA0082787 A — ON The lamp illuminates regardless of whether a door is open or closed. B — DOOR (Delayed off function) Vehicles without keyless entry system: the lamp illuminates when a door is opened. It goes off about 7 seconds after all doors are closed. However, the lamp goes off immediately when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position with all doors closed. Vehicles with keyless entry system: the lamp illuminates when a door is opened. It goes off about 15 seconds after the all doors are closed. However, the lamp goes off immediately with all doors closed in the following cases: When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON. When the central door lock function is used to lock the vehicle. When the keyless entry key or the keyless operation key is used to lock the vehicle. If the vehicle is equipped with the keyless operation system, when the keyless operation function is used to lock the vehicle. Auto cut-out function: if the lamp is left switched on with the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or the operation mode is in OFF or ACC, and a door is opened, it goes off automatically after approximately 30 minutes. The lamp will illuminate again after it automatically goes off in the following cases: When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON. When the keyless entry system or the keyless operation system is operated. When all doors are closed. C — OFF The lamp goes off regardless of whether a door is open or closed. Map lamps Push the switch (A) to turn on the lamp. Push it again to turn it off. NOTE When the key was used to start the engine, if the key is removed while the doors are closed, the lamp is illuminated and after a few seconds it goes off. NOTE When the keyless operation function was used to start the engine, if the operation mode is put in OFF while the door are closed, the lamp illuminates and after about 15 seconds it goes off (if so equipped). 88 AHA114736 NOTE The time until the lamp goes off (delayed off) can be adjusted. For details, please consult a Fiat Dealership. NOTE The auto cut-out function cannot be operated when the room lamp switch is in the “ON” position (1). Also, this function can be deactivated. For details, please consult a Fiat Dealership. 51 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH The windscreen wipers and washer can be operated with the ignition switch or the operation mode in ON or ACC. If the blades are frozen to the windscreen, do not operate the wipers until the ice has melted and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged. 91 63) 64) 65) 66) Windscreen wipers (Except for vehicles equipped with rain sensor) AA0069881 A — Fast B — Slow NOTE The speed-sensitive-operation function of the windscreen wipers can be deactivated. For further information, we recommend you to consult a Fiat Dealership. AJA104364 MIST — Misting function. The wipers will operate once OFF — Off INT — Intermittent (Speed sensitive) LO — Slow HI — Fast AG0002332 Vehicles equipped with rain sensor 90 89 52 To adjust intermittent intervals With the lever in the “INT” (speed sensitive intermittent operation) position, the intermittent intervals can be adjusted by turning the knob (1). Misting function Move the lever in the direction of the arrow and release, to operate the wipers once. Use this function when you are driving in mist or drizzle. 92 AA0068204 MIST — Misting function. The wipers will operate once OFF — Off AUTO — Auto-wiper control Rain sensor: the wipers will automatically operate depending on the degree of wetness on the windscreen. LO — Slow HI — Fast Rain sensor Can only be used when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON. If the lever is put in the “AUTO” position, the rain sensor (A) will detect the extent of rain (or snow, other moisture, dust, etc.) and the wipers will operate automatically. Keep the lever in the “OFF” position if the windscreen is dirty and the weather is dry. Wiper operation under these conditions can scratch the windscreen and damage the wipers. 21) 93 AA0117317 NOTE To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this operation of the wipers does not take place even if the lever is put in the “AUTO” position when the vehicle is stationary and the ambient temperature is about 0 °C or lower. NOTE Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker or label to the windscreen. Also, do not put any water-repellent coating on the windscreen. The rain sensor would not be able to detect the extent of rain, and the wipers might stop working normally. In the following cases, the rain sensor may be malfunctioning. For further information, we recommend you to consult a Fiat Dealership: When the wipers operate at a constant interval despite changes in the extent of rain. When the wipers do not operate even though it is raining. NOTE The wipers may automatically operate when things such as insects or foreign objects are affixed to the windscreen on top of the rain sensor or when the windscreen is frozen. Objects affixed to the windscreen will stop the wipers when the wipers cannot remove them. To operate the wipers again, move the lever in the “LO” or “HI” position. Also, the wipers may operate automatically due to strong direct sunlight or electromagnetic wave. To stop the wipers, place the lever in the “OFF” position. NOTE Contact a Fiat Dealership when replacing the windscreen or reinforcing the glass around the sensor. To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor With the lever in the “AUTO” (rain sensor) position, it is possible to adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor by turning the knob (B). 94 AA0068217 + — Higher sensitivity to rain - — Lower sensitivity to rain It is possible to activate the following functions: Automatic operation (rain droplet sensitive) can be changed to intermittent operation (vehicle-speed sensitive). Automatic operation (rain droplet sensitive) can be changed to intermittent operation (except vehicle-speed sensitive). For further information, we recommend you to consult a Fiat Dealership. 53 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Misting function Move the lever in the direction of the arrow and release, to operate the wipers once. Use this function when you are driving in mist or drizzle. The wipers will operate once if the lever is raised to the “MIST” position and released when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC. The wipers will continue to operate while the lever is held in the “MIST” position. 95 AG0002332 Headlamp washer switch The headlamp washer can be operated with the ignition switch or the operation mode in ON or ACC and the lamp switch at the position. Push the button once and the washer fluid will be sprayed on to the headlamps. 96 AA0075958 Windscreen washer The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the windscreen by pulling the lever towards you. The wipers operate automatically several times while the washer fluid is being sprayed. On vehicles equipped with the headlamp washer, while the headlamps are on, the headlamp washer will operate once together with the windscreen washer. The wipers will operate once if the lever is moved to the “AUTO” position and the knob (C) is turned in the “+” direction when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position or the operation mode is in ON. 97 54 AG0009285 98 AHA113797 NOTE If the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC and the headlamps are on, the headlamp washer operates together with the windscreen washer the first time the windscreen washer lever is pulled. Precautions to observe when using wipers and washers If the moving wipers become blocked partway through a sweep by ice or other deposits on the glass, the wipers may temporarily stop operating to prevent the motor from overheating. In this case, park the vehicle in a safe place, turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position or put the operation mode in OFF, and then remove the ice or other deposits. Because the wipers will start operating again after the wiper motor cools down, check that the wipers operate before using them. Do not use the wipers when the glass is dry. They may scratch the glass surface and the blades wear out prematurely. Before using the wipers in cold weather, check that the wiper blades are not frozen onto the glass. The motor may burn out if the wipers are used with the blades frozen onto the glass. Avoid using the washer continuously for more than 20 seconds. Do not operate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty. Otherwise, the motor may burn out. Periodically check the level of washer fluid in the reservoir and refill if required. During cold weather, add a recommended washer solution that will not freeze in the washer reservoir. Failure to do so could result in loss of washer function and frost damage to the system components. WARNING 63) Do not use the screen wiper to remove layers of snow or ice from the windscreen. In such conditions, the windscreen wiper may be subjected to excessive stress and the motor cut-out switch, which prevents operation for a few seconds, may intervene. If operation is not restored, contact a Fiat Dealership. 64) Streaks of water may cause unnecessary blade movements. 65) If the washer is used in cold weather, the washer fluid sprayed against the glass may freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm the glass with the defroster or rear window demister before using the washer. 66) With the ignition switch or the operation mode in ON and the lever in the “AUTO” position, the wipers may automatically operate in the situations described below. If your hands get trapped, you could suffer injuries or the wipers could malfunction. Be sure to turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position or put the operation mode in OFF, or move lever to the “OFF” position to deactivate the rain sensor: when cleaning the outside surface of the windscreen, if you touch or wipe with a cloth on top of the rain sensor; when using an automatic car wash; when a physical shock is applied to the windscreen or to the rain sensor. IMPORTANT 21) Do not activate the rain sensor when washing the car in an automatic car wash. 55 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM NOTE On vehicles with air conditioning, the cool air from the ventilators may appear as a mist. This is due to moist air being suddenly cooled by the air conditioning. This will clear after a few moments. Ventilators NOTE Be careful not to spill beverages, etc., into the ventilators. Doing so might cause the air conditioner not to function normally. 100 A — Close B — Open 99 AHA106492 1 — Centre ventilators 2 — Side ventilators Side ventilators Move the knob (A) to adjust the air flow direction. To close the vent, move the knob (A) to the outside as far as possible NOTE Do not place beverages on top of the instrument panel. If they splash into the air conditioning ventilators, they could damage the system. Air flow and direction adjustments Centre ventilators Move the knob (1) to adjust the air flow direction. To close the vent, move the knob (1) to the inside as far as possible 101 A — Close B — Open 56 AHA101468 AHA101471 Mode selection To change the position and amount of air flowing from the ventilators, turn the mode selection dial (refer to “Mode selection dial”). On vehicles with the automatic climate control air conditioner, press the MODE switch or demister switch (refer to “Mode switch” and “Demister switch”). The next several illustrations show the different quantity of air coming from the ventilators. The mode selection and air flowing from the ventilators Face position Foot/Demister position Foot/Face position Foot position Demister position NOTE For vehicles with the Start&Stop system, the windows may start to fog up while the system is operating. If this occurs, press the demister switch to remove fog from the windows. 57 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 2) 22) Control panel 108 AHA101497 Temperature control dial Turn the temperature control dial clockwise to make the air warmer. Turn it anticlockwise to make the air cooler. 110 AHA104342 24) 107 NOTE With the mode selection dial between the and positions, air flows mainly to the upper part of the passenger compartment. With the mode selection dial between the and positions, air flows mainly to the leg area. AHA106694 1. Mode selection dial 2. Rear window demister switch 3. Blower speed selection dial 4. Air conditioning switch 5. Temperature control dial 6. Air selection lever Blower speed selection dial Select the blower speed by turning the blower speed selection dial clockwise or anticlockwise. The blower speed will gradually increase as the dial is turned to the right. 58 Mode selection dial To change the position of air flowing from the ventilators, turn the mode selection dial (refer to “Mode selection”). Heater/Manual air conditioning The heater/air conditioning can only be used while the engine is running. 109 AHA106708 NOTE While the engine coolant temperature is low, the temperature of the air from the heater will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if you have selected warm air with the lever. NOTE With the mode selection dial between the and positions, air flows mainly to the leg area. With the mode selection dial between the and positions, air flows mainly to the windscreen and door windows. Air selection lever To change the air selection, use the air selection lever. Outside air is introduced into the passenger compartment. Recirculated air is recirculated inside the passenger compartment. Air conditioning switch Push the switch to turn the air conditioning on, indicator lamp (A) will come on. 112 AHA106724 NOTE For maximum heat, set the blower speed at the 3rd position. Cooling (Manual air conditioning) 114 26) Push the switch again to switch it off. 111 AHA106711 25) NOTE Normally, use the (outside) position to keep the windscreen and side windows clear and quickly remove fog or frost from the windscreen. If high cooling performance is desired, or if the outside air is dusty or otherwise contaminated, use the (recirculation) position. Switch to the (outside) position periodically to increase ventilation so that the windows do not become fogged up. Operating the air conditioning system Select dials and levers as shown in the illustration according to your purpose. AH3100522 Combination of unheated air and heated air Heating 115 113 AH3100535 AH3100519 59 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Demisting of the windscreen and door windows 67) For ordinary demisting Introduction of outside air 116 AH3100548 For quick demisting 118 117 60 NOTE To demist effectively, direct the air flow from the side ventilators towards the door windows. Do not set the temperature control dial to the max. cool position. Cool air will blow against the window glasses and prevent demisting. AH3100551 AH3100564 AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL AIR CONDITIONER (where provided) The air conditioner can only be used while the engine is running. 22) Automatic climate control system 119 AH1100300 1. Temperature control switch 2. Air conditioning switch 3. MODE switch 4. Blower speed selection switch 5. Air selection switch 6. Demister switch 7. AUTO switch 8. Rear window demister switch 9. OFF switch 10. Temperature display 11. Air conditioning indicator 12. Mode selection display 13. Blower speed display 61 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Automatic dual-zone climate control system 120 AA1008694 1. Driver’s side temperature control switch (LHD vehicles) — Passenger’s side temperature control switch (RHD vehicles) 2. Air conditioning switch 3. Blower speed selection switch 4. MODE switch 5. Passenger’s side temperature control switch (LHD vehicles) — Driver’s side temperature control switch (RHD vehicles) 6. Air selection switch 7. Demister switch 8. AUTO switch 9. Rear window demister switch 10. OFF switch 11. Driver’s side temperature display (LHD vehicles) — Passenger’s side temperature display (RHD vehicles) 12. DUAL indicator 13. Mode selection display 14. Passenger’s side temperature display (LHD vehicles) — Driver’s side temperature display (RHD vehicles) 15. Air conditioning indicator 16. Blower speed display 62 NOTE There is an interior air temperature sensor (A) in the illustrated position. Never place anything on top of the sensor, since doing so will prevent it from functioning properly. Air conditioning control panel — Standard mode 122 121 AHZ101115 AH3100463M Air conditioning control panel — Dual zone 124 NOTE In extreme cold, the air conditioning control panel screen may operate sluggishly. This does not indicate a problem. It will disappear when the vehicle interior temperature rises to a normal temperature. Blower speed selection switch Press of the blower speed selection switch to increase the blower speed. Press of the blower speed selection switch to decrease the blower speed. The selected blower speed will be shown in the display (A). Temperature control switch Press or of the temperature control switch to the desired temperature. The selected temperature will be shown in the display (A). 123 1 — Increase 2 — Decrease AH3100463B AA0112354 NOTE The temperature value of air conditioner is switched in conjunction with outside temperature display unit of the multi information display. Refer to “Changing the temperature unit”. NOTE While the engine coolant temperature is low, the temperature of the air from the heater will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if you have selected warm air with the switch. To prevent the windscreen and windows from fogging up, the ventilator mode will be changed to “ ” and the blower speed will be reduced while the system is operating in the AUTO mode. 63 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 64 NOTE When the temperature is set to the highest or the lowest, the air selection and the air conditioner will be automatically changed as follows. Also, if the air selection is operated manually after an automatic changeover, manual operation will be selected. Quick Heating (When the temperature is set to the highest setting): outside air will be introduced and the air conditioner will stop. Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set to the lowest setting): inside air will be recirculated and the air conditioner will operate. The settings described above are the factory settings. The air selection and air conditioning switches can be customised (function setting changed), and the automatic switching of outside air and the air conditioner according to operating conditions can be changed as desired. For further information, we recommend you to consult a Fiat Dealership. Refer to “Customising the air conditioning switch” and to “Customising the air selection”. Synchronized mode and dual mode The driver’s side and the passenger’s side temperature can be controlled independently. At this time, the “DUAL” indicator will be shown in the display (A). Recirculated air (Indicator lamp (A) is ON): air is recirculated inside the passenger compartment. 125 AA0112367 Synchronized mode If the driver’s side temperature control switch is pressed, the passenger’s side temperature will also be controlled to the same setting temperature as the driver’s side. Dual mode If the passenger’s side temperature control switch is pressed under synchronized mode, the system will switch to dual mode. In dual mode, the driver’s side and the passenger’s side temperature can be set separately by using each temperature control switch. Press the AUTO switch to return to synchronized mode. Air selection switch To change the air selection, simply press the air selection switch. Outside air (Indicator lamp (A) is OFF): outside air is introduced into the passenger compartment. 126 AHA101543 68) NOTE Normally, use the outside position to keep the windscreen and side windows clear and quickly remove fog or frost from the windscreen. If high cooling performance is desired, or if the outside air is dusty or otherwise contaminated use the recirculation position. Switch to the outside position periodically to increase ventilation so that the windows do not become fogged up. When the engine coolant temperature rises to a certain level, the air selection is automatically switched to the recirculation position and the indicator lamp (A) comes on. At this time, the system will not switch to the outside position even if the air selection switch is pressed. Customising the air selection Functions can be changed as desired, as stated below. Enable automatic air control — When the AUTO switch is pressed, the air selection switch is also controlled automatically. Disable automatic air control — Even when the AUTO switch is pressed, the air selection switch is not controlled automatically. Setting change method — Hold down the air selection switch for approximately 10 seconds or more. 1. When the setting is changed from enable to disable 3 sounds are emitted and the indicator lamp flashes 3 times. 2. When the setting is changed from disable to enable 2 sounds are emitted and the indicator lamp flashes 3 times. NOTE The factory setting is “Enable automatic air control”. When the demister switch is pressed, in order to prevent misting of the windows the ventilator automatically switches to outside air even if “Disable automatic air control” is set. AUTO switch When the AUTO switch is pressed, the indicator lamp (A) comes on and the mode selection, blower speed adjustment, recirculated/outside air selection, temperature adjustment, and air conditioner ON/OFF status are all controlled automatically. 127 AHA101556 Air conditioning switch Press the switch to turn the air conditioner on, the indicator will be shown in the display (A). Customising the air conditioning switch Functions can be changed as desired, as stated below. Enable automatic air conditioning control — When the AUTO switch is pressed, or the temperature control switch is set to the minimum temperature, the air conditioning switch is controlled automatically. Disable automatic air conditioning control — The air conditioning switch is not controlled automatically as long as the air conditioning switch is not operated. Setting change method — Hold down the air conditioning switch for approximately 10 seconds or more. 1. When the setting is changed from enable to disable 3 sounds are emitted and the indicator flashes 3 times. 2. When the setting is changed from disable to enable 2 sounds are emitted and the indicator flashes 3 times. NOTE The factory setting is “Enable automatic air conditioning control”. 128 AHA101569 Press the switch again to switch it off. NOTE When the demister switch is pressed, in order to prevent misting of the windows the air conditioner operates automatically even if “Disable automatic air conditioning control” is set. 65 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE OFF switch Press the switch to turn off the air conditioning system. Operating the system in automatic mode 132 129 AHA101602 AHA101572 MODE switch Each time the MODE switch is pressed, the mode changes to the next one in the following sequence: > > > > . The selected mode is shown in the display (A) (refer to “Mode selection”). 130 66 Demister switch When this switch is pressed, the mode changes to the mode. The indicator lamp (A) will come on. The selected mode is shown in the display (B) (refer to “Mode selection"). AHA101585 131 AHA101598 NOTE When the demister switch is pressed, the air conditioning system automatically operates and outside air (as opposed to recirculated air) is selected. This automatic switching control is carried out to prevent misting of the windows even if “Disable automatic air conditioning control” or “Disable automatic air control” is set (refer to “Customising the air conditioning switch” and “Customising the air selection”). In normal conditions, use the system in the AUTO mode and follow these procedures: 1. Press the AUTO switch. 2. Set the temperature control switch to the desired temperature. The mode selection, blower speed adjustment, recirculated/outside air selection, temperature adjustment, and air conditioner ON/OFF status are all controlled automatically. NOTE If the blower speed selection switch, air conditioning switch, Mode switch, or air selection switch is operated while the system is operating in the AUTO mode, the activated function overrides the corresponding function of automatic control. All other functions remain under automatic control. Using the system in manual mode Blower speed and ventilator mode may be controlled manually by setting the blower speed selection switch and the MODE switch to the desired positions. To return to automatic operation, press the AUTO switch. Demisting of the windscreen and door windows 67) For ordinary demisting 133 1. Set the air selection switch to the outside position. 2. Set the MODE switch to the position. 3. Select your desired blower speed by pressing the blower speed selection switch. 4. Select your desired temperature by pressing the temperature control switch. 5. Press the air conditioning switch. For quick demisting AH3100199 134 AH3100203 1. Press the demister switch to change to the position. 2. Set the blower to the maximum speed. 3. Set the temperature to the highest position. NOTE To demist effectively, direct the air flow from the side ventilators towards the door windows. Do not set the temperature to the max. cool position. Cool air will blow against the window glasses and prevent demisting. For vehicles with the Start&Stop system, if the demister switch is pressed, the Start&Stop system will not operate and the engine will not stop automatically even if the vehicle is stopped. This is to ensure that good visibility is maintained. IMPORTANT OPERATION TIPS FOR THE AIR CONDITIONING Park the vehicle in the shade. Parking in the hot sun will make the vehicle inside extremely hot, and it will require more time to cool the interior. If it is necessary to park in the sun, open the windows for the first few minutes of air conditioning operation to expel the hot air. Close the windows when the air conditioning is in use. The entry of outside air through open windows will reduce the cooling efficiency. 67 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Too much cooling is not good for the health. The inside air temperature should only be 5 to 6 °C below the outside air temperature. When operating the system, make sure the air intake, which is located in front of the windscreen, is free of obstructions such as leaves and snow. Leaves collected in the air-intake plenum may reduce air flow and plug the plenum water drains. Air conditioning system refrigerant recommendations If the air conditioning seems less effective than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant leak. We recommend you to have the system inspected. The air conditioning system in your vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R134a). Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause severe damage which will result in the need to replace your vehicle’s entire air conditioning system. The release of refrigerant into the atmosphere should be prevented. It is recommended that the refrigerant be recovered and recycled for further use. During a long period of disuse The air conditioning should be operated for at least five minutes each week, even in cold weather. This is to prevent 68 poor lubrication of the compressor internal parts and to maintain the air conditioning in the best operating condition. PASSENGER COMPARTMENT AIR CLEANER / POLLEN FILTER An air filter has been incorporated into this air conditioner so that dirt and dust are cleaned from the air. Replace the air filter periodically as its ability to clean the air will be reduced as it collects pollen and dirt. NOTE Operation in certain conditions such as driving on a dusty road and frequent use of the air conditioner can lead to reduction of service life of the filter. When you feel that the airflow is lower than normal or when the windscreen or windows start to fog up easily, replace the air filter. We recommend you to have it checked. Manual type 135 AHA101396 Automatic type REAR WINDOW DEMISTER SWITCH (where provided) The rear window demister switch can be operated when the engine is running. Push the switch to turn on the rear window demister. It will be turned off automatically in about 20 minutes. To turn off the demister within about 20 minutes, push the switch again. The indicator lamp (A) will illuminate while the demister is on. 136 AA0110220 NOTE On vehicles equipped with heated mirrors, when the rear window demister switch is pressed, the outside rear view mirrors are defogged or defrosted. Refer to “Heated mirror”. NOTE The demister switch is not to melt snow but to clear mist. Remove snow before use of the demister switch. NOTE To avoid unnecessary discharge of the battery, do not use the rear window demister during starting of the engine or when the engine is not running. Turn the demister off immediately after the window is clear. NOTE When cleaning the inside of the rear window, use a soft cloth and wipe gently along the heater wires, being careful not to damage the wires. NOTE Do not allow objects to touch the inside of the rear window glass, damaged or broken wires may result. Customizing the automatic rear window demister (for vehicles equipped with the rear window demister switch - Automatic type) Function can be changed as desired, as stated below. Enable automatic rear window demister — If the outside air temperature drops below approx. 3 °C (37 °F), the rear window demister operates once automatically after the engine starts. The heated mirrors will also operate once automatically at the same time. Disable automatic rear window demister — The rear window demister does not operate automatically. The heated mirrors will not operate automatically as well. Setting change method — Hold down the rear window demister switch for about 10 seconds or more. When the setting is changed from enable to disable 3 sounds are emitted and the indicator lamp flashes 3 times. When the setting is changed from disable to enable 2 sounds are emitted and the indicator lamp flashes 3 times. NOTE The factory setting is “Disable automatic rear window demister”. WARNING 67) For safety, make sure you have a clear view through all windows. 68) Use of the recirculation position for an extended time may cause the windows to fog up. IMPORTANT 22) The engine speed may increase when the air conditioning is operating. With an increased engine speed, an A/T vehicle will creep to a greater degree than with a lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping. 23) When using the air conditioning, the idling speed may slightly increase as the air conditioning compressor is switched on/off automatically. While the vehicle with an automatic transmission is stationary, fully depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping. 24) When using the mode selection dial between the and positions, prevent fogging by moving the air selection lever to select outside air (refer to “Air selection lever”). 25) Use of the (recirculation) position for extended time may cause the windows to fog up. 26) If the outside air is dusty or otherwise contaminated, or if high cooling performance is desired, set air selection lever to the (recirculation) position and the temperature control dial all the way to the right. Switch to the (outside) position periodically to increase ventilation so that the windows do not become fogged up. IMPORTANT 2) The system uses a coolant that is compatible with the laws in force in the countries where the vehicle is sold, R134a (indicated on a specific plate in the engine compartment). The use of other coolants affects the efficiency and condition of the system. Also the compressor coolants used must be compatible with the indicated coolant. 69 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WINDOW Type 2 If the switch for the driver’s window is fully pressed down/pulled up, the door window automatically opens/closes completely. If you want to stop the window movement, operate the switch lightly in the reverse direction. MANUAL WINDOW CONTROL 138 137 AHA105495 Left side: A — Open B — Close Right side: A — Close B — Open ELECTRIC WINDOW CONTROL (where provided) 69) 70) 71) 72) 73) The electric windows can only be operated with the ignition switch or the operation mode in ON. Electric window control switch Each door window opens or closes while the corresponding switch is operated. 70 AHA105509 A — LHD vehicles B — RHD vehicles 1. Driver’s door window 2. Front passenger’s door window 3. Rear left door window (Double cab) 4. Rear right door window (Double cab) 5. Lock switch Driver’s switches The driver’s switches can be used to operate all door windows. A window can be opened or closed by operating the corresponding switch. Press the switch down to open the window, and pull up the switch to close it. Type 1 If the switch for the driver’s door window is fully pressed down, the door window automatically opens completely. Passenger’s switches The passenger’s switches can be used to operate the corresponding passenger’s door windows. Press the switch down for opening the window, and pull up the switch for closing. 139 AG0024231 NOTE Repeated operation with the engine stopped will run down the battery. Operate the window switches only while the engine is running. NOTE The rear door windows only open halfway. Lock switch When this switch is operated, the passenger’s switches cannot be used to open or close the door windows and the driver’s switch cannot open or close any door windows other than the driver’s door window. To unlock, press it once again. 140 AHA105512 1. Lock 2. Unlock Timer function The door windows can be opened or closed for 30 seconds after the engine is stopped. However, once the driver’s door or the front passenger’s door is opened, the windows cannot be operated. Safety mechanism (driver’s window only) 74) 75) 76) When the door window is automatically closed by pulling up the switch fully, if a hand or head is trapped in the closing window, it will lower automatically. Nonetheless, make sure that nobody puts their head or hand out of the window when closing the driver’s door window. The lowered window will become operational after a few seconds. NOTE The safety mechanism can be activated if the driving conditions or other circumstances cause the driver’s door window to be subjected to a physical shock similar to that caused by a trapped hand or head. NOTE If the safety mechanism is activated five or more times in a row, the safety mechanism will be cancelled and the door window will not close correctly. In such a case, the following procedure should be implemented to rectify this situation. If the window is open, repeatedly raise the driver’s door window switch until that window has been fully closed. Following this, release the switch, raise the switch once again and hold it in this condition for at least 1 second, then release it. You should now be able to operate in the normal way. NOTE If the battery terminals are disconnected or the fuse for electric window is replaced, the safety mechanism will be cancelled and the door window will not automatically open/close completely. If the window is open, repeatedly raise the driver’s door window switch until the window has been fully closed. Following this, release the switch, raise the switch once again and hold it in this condition for at least 1 second, then release it. You should now be able to operate the driver’s door window in the normal way. WARNING 69) Incorrect use of the electric windows may be dangerous. Before and during operation, always check that nobody is exposed to the risk of being injured either directly by the moving window or through objects getting caught or by being hit. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid the risk of injury to anyone remaining in the car due to accidental operation of the electric windows. 70) Before operating the electric window control, make sure that nothing is capable of being trapped (head, hand, finger, etc.). 71) Never leave the vehicle without removing the key. Never leave a child (or other person who might not be capable of safe operation of the electric window control) in the vehicle alone. 71 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 72) A child may tamper with the switch at the risk of its hands or head being trapped in the window. 73) When driving with a child in the vehicle, please press the window lock switch to disable the passenger’s switches. 74) If the battery terminals are disconnected or the fuse for electric window is replaced, the safety mechanism will be cancelled. If a hand or head got trapped, a serious injury could result. 75) The safety mechanism is cancelled just before the window is fully closed. This allows the window to close completely. Therefore be especially careful that no fingers are trapped in the window. 76) The safety mechanism is deactivated while the switch is pulled up. Therefore be especially careful that fingers are not trapped in the door window opening. CATALYTIC CONVERTER The exhaust gas scavenging devices used with catalytic converter are extremely efficient for the reduction of noxious gases. The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust system. It is important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage. 77) NOTE Use fuel of the type recommended in “Fuel selection”. DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF) (where provided) The diesel particulate filter (DPF) is a device that captures most of the particulate matter (PM) in the exhaust emissions of the diesel engine. The DPF automatically burns away trapped PM during vehicle operation. Under certain driving conditions, however, the DPF is not able to burn away all of the trapped PM and, as a result, an excessive amount of PM accumulates inside it. 78) 27) WARNING 77) As with any vehicle, do not park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as dry grass or leaves can come in contact with a hot exhaust since a fire could occur. NOTE To minimize the likelihood of excessive accumulation of PM, try to avoid driving for long periods at low speeds and repeatedly driving short distances and try to keep high engine speed driving as much as possible. NOTE The engine sounds slightly different from usual while the DPF automatically burns away trapped PM. The change in the engine sound does not indicate a fault. DPF warning lamp The DPF warning lamp comes on in the event of an abnormality in the DPF system. 72 If the DPF warning lamp flashes during vehicle operation Flashing of the DPF warning lamp indicates an abnormality in the DPF system. Have the system inspected by a Fiat Dealership. 29) Continuing to drive with the DPF warning lamp flashing could result in engine trouble and DPF damage. WARNING 141 AHA104948 If the DPF warning lamp comes on during vehicle operation Steady illumination of the DPF warning lamp shows that the DPF has not been able to burn away all of the trapped PM and that, as a result, an excessive amount of PM has accumulated inside it. To enable the DPF to burn away the PM, try to drive the vehicle as follows: With the bar graph of engine coolant temperature display stabilized in roughly the middle of the scale, drive for approximately 20 minutes at a speed of at least 40 km/h. 28) 29) IMPORTANT You do not have to continuously drive exactly as indicated above. Always strive to drive safely in accordance with road conditions. 78) The diesel particulate filter (DPF) reaches high temperatures during normal operation. Do not park the vehicle on flammable material (grass, dry leaves, pine needles etc.): fire hazard. IMPORTANT 27) Do not use any type of fuel or engine oil that is not specified for your vehicle. Also, do not use any moisture-removing agent or other fuel additive. Such substances could have a detrimental effect on the DPF. Refer to “Fuel selection” and “Engine oil”. 28) Vehicle travel speed should always be adapted to the traffic and weather conditions, and must always comply with traffic regulations. The engine can be stopped even if the DPF symbol is on: however, repeated interruptions of the regeneration process could cause premature deterioration of the engine oil. For this reason it is always advisable to wait for the symbol to go off before turning off the engine, following the instructions above. Do not complete the DPF regeneration process when the vehicle is stopped. 73 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT To open 1. Pull the release lever towards you to unlock the bonnet. 145 AHA102478 79) 80) 81) 82) NOTE If this does not close the bonnet, release it from a slightly higher position. 142 AHA102609 2. Raise the bonnet while pressing the safety lock. 144 AHA102465 AHA102452 NOTE Do not press down firmly on the bonnet as doing so could damage it. 30) 31) To close 1. Unlatch the support bar and clip it in its holder. 2. Slowly lower the bonnet to a position about 20 cm above the closed position, then let it drop. 3. Make sure the bonnet is securely locked by softly lifting the centre of the bonnet. 143 74 NOTE Only open the bonnet when the wipers are in the parked position. Failure to do so may cause damage to the bonnet, wiper arms or front windscreen. 3. Support the bonnet by inserting the support bar in its slot. WARNING 79) Be careful that hands or fingers are not trapped when closing the bonnet. 80) Perform these operations only when the car is stationary. 81) Use both hands to lift the bonnet. Before lifting, check that the windscreen wiper arms are not raised from the windscreen, that the vehicle is stationary and that the parking brake is engaged. 82) For safety reasons, the bonnet must always be properly closed while the car is travelling. Therefore, make sure that the bonnet is properly closed and that the lock is engaged. If you discover that the bonnet is not perfectly closed during travel, stop immediately and close the bonnet in the correct manner. IMPORTANT 30) Note that the support bar may disengage the bonnet if the open bonnet is lifted by a strong wind. 31) After inserting the support bar into the slot, make sure the bar supports the bonnet securely from falling down on to your head or body. CARGO AREA CARGO LOADS 83) 84) Cargo loads precautions When loading luggage, be careful to the following. Stow cargo and luggage in the cargo area whenever possible. Distribute cargo or luggage evenly not to be unbalanced in weight of a load. Do not place cargo or luggage on the instrument panel. Also, do not stack up cargo or luggage on the front passenger’s seat or the rear seat. Having the driver’s vision blocked, and your cargo being thrown inside the cabin if you suddenly have to brake can cause a serious accident or injury. HIGH-LOAD SYSTEM, PROTRUDING LOADS Check that the load is distributed evenly on the flatbed and that the rear side panel is correctly closed, so that the load, or part of it, cannot fall onto the road surface. Some simple suggestions can improve driving safety, comfort and vehicle duration: distribute the load evenly over the platform: if it must be concentrated it in a single area, choose an area mid-way between both axles; remember that the dynamic behaviour of the vehicle is affected by the transported weight: in particular, the stopping distances are longer, especially at high speed. Bumpy roads and heavy braking may cause unexpected load shifting with consequently hazardous situations: before setting off, secure the load tightly using the partition and appropriate hooks, steel cables, ropes or chains strong enough to hold the items to be secured. 83) 84) 85) 86) 87) 88) WARNING 83) If the vehicle is parked on a very steep slope or side gradient, opening the rear flap of the flatbed or a side door may cause any objects or luggage which is not fixed to spill out. 84) If you wish to carry a reserve of petrol in a can, observe the legal restrictions and only use a can that is type-approved and properly secured to the load anchorage eyebolts. Anyway, by doing so, you increase the risk of fire in the event of an accident with your vehicle. 85) Respect the maximum permitted vehicle loads also shown on the registration certificate. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted loads. 75 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 86) Do not carry unnecessary objects on the flatbed. Particularly if the vehicle is driven in cities, where frequent stopping and starting is necessary, supplementary loads on the vehicle may have major repercussions on fuel consumption. Furthermore, do not travel with unnecessary luggage, loads etc. on the roof: the increased air resistance will increase fuel consumption. 87) Using a lower gear when travelling with heavy loads will improve vehicle performance and extend the life of the gearbox, limiting gear shifts and overheating. This action ensures better exhaust braking. 88) All precautions must be adopted to prevent danger to other road users if the load protrudes beyond the contour of the vehicle. The rear and side protrusion must be indicated according to the laws in force in the country. The load must not compromise stability of the vehicle or cover lights, visual indicators or identifying plates. Poles, bars and similar loads which are difficult to see arranged horizontally must not protrude beyond the contour of the vehicle. TRAILER TOWING In order to tow a trailer with your vehicle, when having a trailer towing device mounted that meets all relevant regulations in your area, consult a Fiat Dealership. Check that your towbar coupling ball does not obscure your vehicle’s licence plate when the trailer or caravan is disconnected. If it obscures the licence plate, please remove the towbar coupling ball. And if the towbar coupling ball is lockable by using a key or any kind of tools, please remove the coupling ball and use a towbar coupling ball which can be removed or repositioned without the use of a key or any kind of tools instead. The regulations concerning the towing of a trailer may differ from country to country. You are advised to obey the regulations in each area. NOTE If you are going to tow a trailer, pay careful attention to the following points. 89) 76 Maximum towable weight with brake and maximum trailernose weight Never exceed the maximum towable weight with brake and the maximum trailer-nose weight as listed in the specifications. (Refer to “Vehicle weight”. If you tow a trailer at an altitude of more than 1,000 m above sea-level, reduce your weight by 10 % of the gross combination weight for every increase of 1,000 m above sea-level, as the engine output is lowered owing to decrease in atmospheric pressure. Towing bar mounting specifications See the following table for fixing points (A) for the towing bar. 146 Single Cab Club Cab 1 30 mm 30 mm 30 mm 2 55 mm 55 mm 55 mm 3 60 mm 60 mm 60 mm 4 810 mm 925 mm 925 mm 5 19.5 mm 19.5 mm 19.5 mm 6 47,5 mm 47,5 mm 47,5 mm 7 88 mm 88 mm 88 mm 148 mm 148 mm 8 184 mm (1) (1) 184 mm 184 mm (2) (2) 494 — 544 mm 546 mm 494 — 534 mm 505 — 536 mm AHA114459 9 494 mm (3) 147 AHA114462 Double Cab (4) 10 895 mm 1,010 mm 1,010 mm 11 1,367 mm 1,482 mm 1,482 mm 12 502,5 mm 502,5 mm 502,5 mm 13 541 mm 541 mm 541 mm (1) Vehicles without heavy duty suspension (2) Vehicles with heavy duty suspension (3) Vehicles equipped with 17 inch tyres (4) 2WD vehicles equipped with 245/70R16 tyres, 4WD vehicles equipped with 17 inch tyres Item 9: at kerb weight. NOTE The values under item 9 are applicable to unladen vehicles. The value can also be varied depending on the tyre size, optional equipment and suspension conditions. Operating hints Have your vehicle serviced prior to towing a heavy trailer, taking particular care of the state of engine tune, the condition of brakes, steering and tyres. Adjust tyre pressures to those specifications at trailer towing (refer to “tyre inflation pressure”). Check the tyres, wiring and brakes (if fitted) on the trailer. Leave plenty of room between the front of your vehicle and the preceding vehicle. If the trailer begins to sway or becomes difficult to handle, gently slow down or apply the independent trailer brakes (if fitted) NOT the vehicle brakes. Stop the vehicle and trailer in a safe location. One cause of swaying is poor trailer balance and until this has been overcome the swaying will recur. Relocated the load in your trailer and re-assess the problem. Be sure that the driving speed does not exceed 100 km/h for trailer operation. 77 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE It is also recommended that you obey the local regulations in case driving speed with a trailer is limited to less than 100 km/h. To prevent the clutch from slipping (vehicle with a M/T only), do not rev the engine more than is required when starting off. To prevent shocks from the overrun brake, depress the brake pedal lightly at first and then more strongly. To make full use of engine braking, change to a lower gear before descending a slope. The body, brakes, clutch, and chassis will be under additional strain when towing a trailer. The heavier weight and higher rolling and air resistance will increase fuel consumption. Additional precautions for vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission It is recommended a lower gear in sports mode on slopes or at low speed, taking care to keep the engine speed below the red zone. INTERIOR FEATURES SUN VISORS 150 VANITY MIRROR 148 AHA105958 78 (where provided) A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun visor on the passenger side. A — To eliminate front glare B — To eliminate side glare Card holder Cards can be slipped into the holder (A) on the back of the sun visor. 151 WARNING 89) Danger of Accident! A towing bar should be fitted according to Fiat Dealership guidelines. AHA106551 149 AHA106548 AHA106564 ASHTRAY (where provided) 90) 32) 33) 34) 35) To use the movable ashtray, open the lid. 154 152 AHA104805 A — Push all the way in. The cigarette lighter will automatically return to its original position with a “click” when ready. Pull it out for use. After use, insert the cigarette lighter to its original position in the socket. AA0021001 Mounting position for movable ashtray The movable ashtray can be fitted at the indicated positions. 153 AH3100258 NOTE Do not leave the cigarette lighter removed from its socket, because the socket might become clogged by foreign material and be short-circuited. 91) CIGARETTE LIGHTER (where provided) The cigarette lighter can be used while the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC. Do not allow children to operate or play with the cigarette lighter as burns may occur. Do not use any electric appliance that is not approved by FCA. Doing so could damage the socket. If you used the cigarette lighter after damaging the socket, the cigarette lighter might pop out or fail to come out after being pushed in. 79 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Something is wrong with the cigarette lighter if it does not pop back out within approximately 30 seconds of being pushed in. Pull it out and have the problem corrected at Fiat Dealership. When the cigarette lighter socket is used as a power source for an electric appliance, be sure that the electric appliance operates at 12 V and has an electric capacity of 120 W or less. In addition, long use of the electric appliance without running the engine may run down the battery. DIGITAL CLOCK STORAGE SPACES 92) To set the time Set the time by pressing the various buttons as described below. 157 ACCESSORY SOCKET (where provided) The accessory socket can be used while the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC. To use a plug-in type accessory, open the lid, and insert the plug in the accessory socket. 33) (where provided) The digital clock indicates the time with the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON or ACC. AHA105974 1. Glove box 2. Sunglasses holder 3. Floor console box 4. Centre console under tray 156 AHA105961 Glove box The glove box can be locked and unlocked using the key. 1. To adjust the hour 2. To adjust the minutes 3. To reset the minutes to zero If the battery cables are disconnected during repairs or for any other reason, reset the clock to the correct time after they are reconnected. 158 155 AHA101644 36) 37) 80 A — To lock B — To unlock C — To open, push the button AHA106160 NOTE When the lamps are illuminated with the lamp switch in the , , or “AUTO” position (vehicles with automatic lamp control), the glove box lamp illuminates, refer to “Combination headlamps and dipper switch”. Type 2 Centre console under tray The centre console under tray is on the floor console part. Type 1 160 AHA101686 NOTE The centre console under tray is removable, so it is also possible to use as storage space. 159 NOTE When using a commercially available USB connector cable connected to the USB input terminal or commercially available HDMI connector cable connected to the HDMI input terminal, if you hold up extra length of the cable in the storage space and install the tray, you can use only the necessary length cable pulled out from the storage space. Do not use the centre console under tray as an ashtray. This could cause a fire or the tray will be damaged Floor console box Upper and lower boxes are located inside the floor console box. The floor console box can also be used as an armrest. AHA105365 161 AHZ100567 162 AHA101699 A — Upper box B — Lower box 81 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Upper box To open the upper box, raise the lid. Sunglasses holder (where provided) To open, push the lid. 166 163 AHA101703 Lower box To open the lower box, raise the upper box. 165 AHA114749 AHA101729 For the rear seat In order to use the cup holder, allow the armrest to drop down. 93) NOTE The holder may not be able to accommodate every possible size and shape of sunglasses; it is advisable to check compatibility before use. CUP HOLDER (where provided) 94) 95) 96) For the front seat The cup holder is located between the front seats. 164 AHA106098 BOTTLE HOLDER AHA101716 NOTE When opening or closing the lid, be careful not to trap hands. The upper box can be removed and use as a box. 82 167 (where provided) 94) 95) 96) The bottle holders are provided at both sides of front and rear doors. NOTE Do not hang heavy luggage (more than about 4 kg) on the hook. Doing so could cause damage to the hook. ASSIST GRIP (where provided) These grips are to support the body by hand while seated in the vehicle. 168 171 AHA101745 NOTE Do not store cup or drink can in the bottle holder. Tightly close the cap on drink bottles before storing them. Some bottles may be too big or the wrong shape to fit in the holder. CONVENIENT HOOK (where provided) Light items of luggage can be hung from the hook. 97) WARNING 170 AHA106102 Do not use the assist grips when getting into or out of the vehicle. The assist grips could detach causing you to fall. COAT HOOK (where provided) There is a coat hook on the rear seat assist grip. 169 AHA101758 AHA106115 90) Don’t put papers and other things that burn into your ashtrays. If you do, cigarettes or other smoking materials could set them on fire, causing damage. 91) Do not touch the heating element or the cigarette lighter housing, hold the knob only to prevent burns. 92) Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a storage space could otherwise cause injuries. 93) The holder should not be used to store anything heavier than sunglasses. These objects could drop out. 94) Do not drink beverages while driving. This is distracting and could cause an accident. 95) Drinks could be spilled by the vibration and jolts while driving. If the spilt drink is very hot, you could be burnt. 83 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 84 96) Do not spray water or spill beverages inside the vehicle. If the switches, wires, or electrical components become wet, they could malfunction or cause a vehicle fire. If you accidentally spill a beverage, wipe up as much liquid as possible and immediately consult a Fiat Dealership. 97) Do not put a hanger or any heavy or pointed object on the coat hook. If the curtain airbag was activated, any such item could be propelled away with great force and could prevent the curtain airbag from inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly on the coat hook (without using a hanger). Make sure there are no heavy or sharp objects in the pockets of clothes that you hang on the coat hook. IMPORTANT 32) When the accessory socket is not in use, be sure to close the lid, because the socket might become clogged by foreign material and be short-circuited. 33) Never leave lighters, canned carbonated beverage, and spectacles in the cabin when parking the vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin will become extremely hot, so lighters and other flammable items may catch fire and unopened drink cans may rupture. Also, spectacles with plastic lenses or materials could deform or crack. 34) Put out matches and cigarettes before they are placed in the ashtray. 35) Always close the ashtray. If left open, other cigarette butts in the ashtray may be rekindled. 36) Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory operating at 12 V and at 120 W or less. When using more than one socket at the same time, make sure that the electrical accessories are 12 V accessories and that the total power consumption does not exceed 120 W. 37) Long use of the electric appliance without running the engine may run down the battery. FUEL SELECTION Recommended fuel: Cetane number (EN590) 51 or higher 38) 39) 40) 41) NOTE For diesel fuel, due to the separation of paraffin, the fluidity decreases considerably as the temperature falls. Because of this fact there are two kinds of fuel: “summer” and “winter”. This must be considered in winter use. Select either of the two kinds of fuel in accordance with ambient temperature. Above -5 °C: “Summer” diesel Below -5 °C: “Winter” diesel When travelling abroad, find out in advance about the fuels served in local service stations. Poor-quality diesel fuel can cause deposits to form in the injector, resulting in black smoke and rough idling. If these problems occur, you are advised to add a cleaning additive to the diesel fuel when you refuel the vehicle. The additive will break up and remove the deposits, thereby returning the engine to a normal condition. Be sure to use a FCA GENUINE DIESEL FUEL SYSTEM CLEANER. Using an unsuitable additive could make the engine malfunction. For details, please contact your Fiat Dealsership. Graphical expression for consumer information Identifier for diesel-type fuels The symbol shown below helps you to recognise the correct type of fuel to use in your vehicle. Before proceeding with refuelling, check the symbols inside the fuel filler flap (where provided) and compare them with the symbols shown on the fuel pump (where provided). 172 B7 B7: Diesel fuel containing up to 7% (V/V) Fatty Acid Methyl Esters – Eg. EN 590 compliant diesel. The diesel engine are compatible with B7 type diesel (containing 7% fatty acid methyl esters) conforming to European standards EN590. IMPORTANT 38) Diesel-powered vehicles to comply with the Euro 4 and Euro 5 regulation are designed to use only diesel fuel that meets the EN 590 standard. Use of any other type of diesel fuel would adversely affect the engine’s performance and durability. 39) Your vehicle is designed to use only diesel fuel that meets the EN 590 standard. Use of any other type of diesel fuel (bio diesel, methylester, etc.) would adversely affect the engine’s performance and durability. 40) For diesel engines, only use diesel fuel for motor vehicles in accordance with EN 590 European specifications. The use of other products or mixtures may damage the engine beyond repair and consequently invalidate the warranty, due to the damage caused. If you accidentally introduce other types of fuel into the tank, do not start the engine. Empty the tank. If the engine has been run for even an extremely limited amount of time, you must not only drain the fuel tank, but the rest of the supply circuit as well. 41) If proper “winter” fuel is not used in winter, the diesel preheat indicator lamp may blink and the engine speed may not rise above the idling speed because of fuel freezing. In this case, keep the engine idling for approximately 10 minutes, then turn off the ignition switch or put the operation mode in OFF and immediately turn it on or put in ON again to confirm that the diesel preheat indicator lamp is off. Refer to “Diesel preheat indicator lamp”. 42) Do not use more than 7% concentration of fatty acid methyl esters (bio diesel) by volume. Use of more than 7% concentration would adversely affect the engine’s performance and durability. 42) 85 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE FILLING THE FUEL TANK 98) 99) 100) 101) 102) 103) 104) 105) 106) 107) 108) Fuel tank capacity: 75 litres. 1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine. 2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear left side of your vehicle. Type 1,2 1. Open the fuel tank filler door with the release lever located below the instrument panel. 173 174 AHA105815 2. Open the fuel tank filler tube by slowly turning the cap anticlockwise. 176 A — Remove B — Close While filling with fuel, hang the fuel cap on the hook (A) located on the inside of the fuel tank filler door. AHA105802 175 AHA105189 177 86 AHA102032 AHZ101069 5. To close, turn the fuel cap slowly clockwise until you hear clicking sounds, then gently push the fuel tank filler door closed. WARNING 178 AHZ100990 Type 3 1. Open the cover (1). Insert the key in the cap (2) and unlock it. 2. Turn the cap and remove it. 109) 179 AHA106203 3. Insert the gun in the tank port as far as it goes. 4. When the gun stops automatically, do not fill with fuel any more. 98) When handling fuel, comply with the safety regulations displayed by garages and filling stations. 99) Fuel is highly flammable and explosive. You could be burned or seriously injured when handling it. When refueling your vehicle, always turn the engine off and keep away from flames, sparks and smoking materials. Always handle fuel in well ventilated outdoor areas. 100) Before removing the fuel cap, be sure to get rid of your body’s static electricity by touching a metal part of the vehicle or fuel pump. Any static electricity on your body could create a spark that ignites fuel vapor. 101) Perform the whole refueling process (opening the fuel tank filler door, removing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself. Do not let any other person come near the fuel tank filler. If you allowed a person to help you and that person was carrying static electricity, fuel vapor could be ignited. 102) Do not move away from the fuel tank filler until refueling is finished. If you moved away and did something else (for example, sitting on a seat) part-way through the refueling process, you could pick up a fresh charge of static electricity. 103) Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel contains toxic substances. 104) Keep the doors and windows closed while refueling the vehicle. If they were open, fuel vapor could get into the cabin. 105) If the fuel cap must be replaced, use only a Fiat genuine part. 106) Since the fuel system may be under pressure, remove the fuel cap slowly. This relieves any pressure or vacuum that might have built up in the fuel tank. If you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before removing the cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, injuring you or others. 107) Do not apply any object/plug to the end of the filler which is not provided for the car. The use of non-compliant objects/plugs could cause a pressure increase inside the tank, resulting in dangerous situations. 108) Do not use a mobile phone near the refuelling pump: risk of fire. 109) Do not tilt the gun. 87 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ENTERING OR LEAVING THE VEHICLE 180 AHA113612 110) WARNING 110) To avoid slipping and damaging the painted surface, do not step on the cover of side step (A). 88 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL This section of the booklet gives you all the information you need to understand, interpret and use the instrument panel correctly. INSTRUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 MULTI INFORMATION DISPLAY . . . .90 INDICATOR AND WARNING LAMPS.98 89 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENTS IMPORTANT 43) When driving, watch the tachometer to make sure that the engine speed indication does not rise into the red zone (excessive engine r/min). 181 183 AHA106463 1. Engine coolant temperature display 2. Selector lever position display* 3. Speed limiter display* 4. Gearshift indicator* 5. Fuel remaining display 6. Frozen road warning 7. Information display 8. Service reminder* — if so equipped 43) 90 Always stop the vehicle in a safe place before operating. The following information is included on the multi information display: odometer, tripmeter, average fuel consumption etc. AHA103361 1. Tachometer — The tachometer indicates the engine speed (r/min). The tachometer can help you obtain more economical driving and also warns you of excessive engine speed (Red zone). 2. Multi information display 3. Speedometer (km/h or mph + km/h) 4. Multi information display switch 182 MULTI INFORMATION DISPLAY AA0110510 NOTE When the ignition switch or the operation mode is OFF, the speed limiter, gearshift indicator, selector lever position display, fuel remaining display, engine coolant temperature display and frozen road warning are not displayed. INFORMATION DISPLAY Each time you lightly press the multi information display switch (A), the display switches in the following order. 184 AH1100371 1. Odometer 2. Tripmeter A 3. Tripmeter B 4. Meter illumination control 5. Driving range display 6. Average fuel consumption display 7. Start&Stop monitor* 8. Outside temperature display* 9. Service reminder (distance) 10. Service reminder (month) * — if so equipped NOTE When the ignition switch or the operation mode is OFF, the driving range display, average fuel consumption display and outside temperature display are not displayed. NOTE While driving, the service reminder is not displayed even if you operate the multi information display switch. 91 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL Tripmeter The tripmeter indicates the distance travelled between two points. Example usage of tripmeter A and tripmeter B. It is possible to measure two currently travelled distances, from home using tripmeter A and from a particular point on the way using tripmeter B. To reset tripmeter To return the display to 0, hold down the multi information display switch for about 2 seconds or more. Only the currently displayed value will be reset. Example If tripmeter A is displayed, only tripmeter A will be reset. NOTE When disconnecting the battery terminal, the memory of tripmeter A and B are cleared, and the display returns to “0”. Meter illumination control Each time you press and hold the multi information display switch (2) for about 2 seconds or more, there is a sound and the brightness of the instruments changes. 92 range falls below approximately 50 km (30 miles), “---” is displayed. Odometer The odometer indicates the distance travelled NOTE The driving range is determined based on the fuel consumption data. This may vary depending on the driving conditions and habits. Treat the distance displayed as just a rough guideline. 185 AHA101282 NOTE You can adjust to 8 different levels respectively for when the position lamps are illuminated and when they are not. Each time you reduce two brightness levels, the segment display of the brightness level decreases one by one. NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with the automatic lamp control, when the lamp switch is in a position other than the “OFF” position, the meter illumination switches automatically to the adjusted brightness, depending on the brightness outside the vehicle. NOTE The brightness level of the instruments is stored when the ignition switch is turned off or the operation mode is put in OFF. Driving range display This displays the approximate driving range (how many more kilometres or miles you can drive). When the driving NOTE When you refuel, the driving range display is updated. However, if you only add a small amount of fuel, the correct value will not be displayed. Fill with a full tank whenever possible. NOTE On rare occasions, the value displayed for the driving range may change if you are parked on an extremely steep incline. This is due to the movement of fuel in the tank and does not indicate any malfunction. NOTE The display setting can be changed to the preferred units (km or miles). Refer to “Changing the function settings”. Average fuel consumption display This displays the average fuel consumption from the last reset to the present time. The reset mode conditions for the average fuel consumption display can be switched between “Auto reset” and “Manual reset”. For information on how to change the average fuel consumption display setting, refer to “Changing the function settings”. NOTE The average fuel consumption display can be reset separately for the auto reset mode and for the manual reset mode. NOTE “---” is displayed when the average fuel consumption cannot be measured. NOTE The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset mode”. NOTE The average fuel consumption will depend on the driving conditions (road conditions, how you drive, etc.). The displayed fuel consumption may vary from the actual fuel consumption. Treat the fuel consumption displayed as just a rough guideline. NOTE The memory of the manual reset mode or auto reset mode for the average fuel consumption display is erased if the battery is disconnected. NOTE When the ignition switch or the operation mode is ON again, the accumulated time will be reset. Outside temperature display (if so equipped) This displays the temperature outside the vehicle. NOTE The display setting can be changed to the preferred units (°C or °F). Refer to “Changing the function settings”. NOTE Depending on factors such as the driving conditions, the displayed temperature may vary from the actual outside temperature. Engine coolant temperature display This indicates the engine coolant temperature. If the coolant becomes hot, will blink. Pay careful attention to the engine coolant temperature display while you are driving. 112) Fuel remaining display The fuel remaining display indicates the fuel level in the fuel tank when the ignition switch or the operation mode is ON. Frozen road warning If the outside air temperature drops below approx. 3°C (37 °F), the alarm sounds and the outside air temperature warning symbol (A) flashes for about 10 seconds. NOTE The display setting can be changed to the preferred units {km/L, L/100 km, mpg}. Refer to “Changing the function settings”. Start&Stop monitor The accumulated time the engine has been stopped by Start&Stop system is displayed. Refer to Start&Stop system. 111) 187 AHA101309 1 — Full 0 — Empty 186 AHA101295 NOTE It may take several seconds to stabilise the display after refilling the tank. 93 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE The fuel lid mark (A) indicates that the fuel tank filler door is located on the left side of the vehicle. Service reminder Displays the approximate time until the next periodic inspection that Fiat recommends.“---” is displayed when the inspection time has arrived. The spanner mark indicates the periodic inspection. Fuel remaining warning display If the remaining fuel level is approximately 10 litres or less (one segment displayed) when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is changed to ON, the last segment of the fuel gauge flashes. If the remaining fuel level is reduced further, the last segment of the fuel gauge goes out and flash. NOTE Depending on the vehicle specifications, the displayed time until the next periodic inspection may differ from that of FCA Italy SpA recommends. In addition, the display settings for the next periodic inspection time can be modified. To modify the display settings, have it adjusted at a Fiat Dealership. For more details, contact a Fiat Dealership. NOTE If fuel is added with the ignition switch or the operation mode is ON, the fuel gauge may incorrectly indicate the fuel level. 2. This informs you that a periodic inspection is due. Please consult a Fiat Dealership. 3. After your vehicle is inspected at a Fiat Dealership, it displays the time until the next periodic inspection. To reset The “---” display can be reset while the ignition switch or the operation mode is in OFF. 1. When you lightly press the multi information display switch a few times, the information display switches to the service reminder display. 190 188 AHA101312 44) NOTE On inclines or curves, the display may be incorrect due to the movement of fuel in the tank. 94 189 AHA101325 1. Displays the time until the next periodic inspection. NOTE The distance is shown in units of 100 km (100 miles). The time is shown in units of months. AHA101338 2. Press and hold the multi information display switch for about 2 seconds or more to make the spanner mark start flashing. (If there is no operation for about 10 seconds with flashing, the display will revert to its original indication.) 3. Lightly press the multi information display switch while the icon is flashing to change the display from “---” to “cLEAr”. After this, the time until the next periodic inspection will be displayed. 191 AHA101341 Changing the reset mode for average fuel consumption The mode conditions for the average fuel consumption display can be switched between “Auto reset” and “Manual reset”. 1. When you lightly press the multi information display switch a few times, the information display switches to the driving range display. Refer to “Information display”. 2. Each time you press the multi information display switch for 2 seconds or more on driving range display, you can switch reset mode for average fuel consumption (A: Auto reset mode, B: Manual reset mode). 45) “---” display cannot be reset when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON. When “---” is displayed, after a certain distance and a certain period of time, the display is reset and the time until the next periodic inspection is displayed. If you accidentally reset the display, consult a Fiat Dealership. Changing the function settings The “Average fuel consumption reset mode”, “Fuel consumption unit” and “Temperature unit” setting can be modified as desired, when the ignition switch or the operation mode is ON. 192 AHA101354 113) 114) Manual reset mode When the average fuel consumption is being displayed, if you hold down the multi information display switch, the average fuel consumption displayed at that time is reset. When the following operation is performed, the mode setting is automatically switched from manual to auto. Except for vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system: turn the ignition switch from the “ACC” or “LOCK” position to the “ON” position. For vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system: change the operation mode from ACC or OFF to ON. Switching to auto occurs automatically. If switching to manual mode is done, however, the data from the last reset is displayed. Auto reset mode When the average fuel consumption is being displayed, if you hold down the multi information display switch, the average fuel consumption displayed at that time are reset. When the engine switch or the operation mode is in the following conditions, the average fuel consumption display is automatically reset. Except for vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system: the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position for about 4 hours or 95 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL 96 longer. For vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system: the operation mode is in ACC or OFF for about 4 hours or longer. IMPORTANT The average fuel consumption display can be reset separately for the auto reset mode and for the manual reset mode. IMPORTANT The memory of the manual reset mode or auto reset mode for the average fuel consumption display is erased if the battery is disconnected. The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset mode”. Changing the fuel consumption display unit The display unit for fuel consumption can be switched. The distance and amount units are also switched to match the selected fuel consumption unit. When you lightly press the multi information display switch a few times, the information display switches to the average fuel consumption display. Refer to “Information display”. Press and hold the multi information display switch for about 5 seconds or more until buzzer sound is heard twice. Press and hold the multi information display switch to switch in sequence from “km/L” > “L/100 km” > “mpg” > “km/L”. 193 AHA101367 The display units for the driving range, the average fuel consumption are switched, but the units for the indicating needle (speedometer), the odometer, the tripmeter and the service reminder will remain unchanged. The memory of the unit setting is erased if the battery is disconnected, and it returns automatically to factory setting. The distance units is also switched in the following combinations to match the selected fuel consumption unit. Fuel consumption Distance (driving range) km/L km L/100 km km mpg mile (s) Changing the temperature unit The display unit for outside temperature can be switched. 1. When you lightly press the multi information display switch a few times, the information display switches to the outside temperature display. Refer to “Information display”. 2. Each time you press the multi information display switch for 2 seconds or more on outside temperature display, you can switch from °C to °F or from °F to °C unit of outside temperature display. The temperature value on air conditioner panel is switched in conjunction with outside temperature display unit of the multi information display. However, “°C” or “°F” are not shown to temperature display of an air conditioner. WARNING 111) There is a danger the road might be icy, even when this symbol is not flashing, so please take care when driving. 112) If the engine is overheating, “ ” will blink. In this case, the bar graph is on the red zone. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place and take the required measures. Refer to “Engine overheating”. 113) The driver should not operate the display while the vehicle is in motion. 114) When operating the system, stop the vehicle in a safe area. IMPORTANT 44) Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level, running out of fuel could cause damage to the fuel system. 45) The customer is responsible for making sure that periodic inspection and maintenance are performed. Inspections and maintenance must be performed to prevent accidents and malfunctions. 97 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATOR AND WARNING LAMPS 194 AH1100948 1. Front fog lamp indicator lamp* 2. Turn-signal indicator lamps/Hazard warning indicator lamps 3. High-beam indicator lamp 4. Start&Stop indicator lamp* 5. Lane departure warning (LDW) standby indicator lamp (green)* — Lane departure warning (LDW) lamp (amber)* 6. Position lamp indicator lamp* 7. Lane departure warning (LDW) system ON indicator lamp* 8. Rear fog lamp indicator lamp 9. Cruise control indicator lamp* 10. Diesel particulate filter (DPF) warning lamp* 11. Diesel preheat indicator lamp 12. Charge warning lamp 13. Check engine warning lamp 14. Fuel filter indicator lamp 15. A/T (automatic transmission) fluid temperature warning lamp (vehicles with A/T) 16. Oil pressure warning lamp 17. Start&Stop OFF indicator lamp* 18. Washer fluid level warning lamp* 19. Multi information display 20. For details, refer to “Warning activation” (if so equipped) 21. For details, refer to “Warning activation” (if so equipped) 22. Door-ajar warning lamp 23. Seat belt reminder/warning lamp 24. Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning lamp 25. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) indicator lamp 26. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF indicator lamp 27. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) warning lamp 28. Brake warning lamp 29. Rear Differential Lock indicator lamp* 30. 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp* 31. Low-range indicator lamp* 32. 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp* 33. Low-range indicator lamp* * — if so equipped 98 Indicator lamps Indicator lamps What it means Turn-signal indicator lamps/Hazard warning indicator lamps These indicator lamps blink in the following situations. When the turn-signal lever is moved to activate a turn-signal lamp. Refer to “Turn-signal lever”. When the hazard warning flasher switch is pressed to activate the hazard warning lamps. Refer to “Hazard warning flasher switch”. When the hazard warning lamps automatically activate due to sudden braking while driving. Refer to “Emergency brakel system”. Position lamp indicator lamp* This indicator lamp illuminates while the position lamps are on. High-beam indicator lamp This indicator lamp illuminates when the high beam is used. Front fog lamp indicator lamp* This lamp illuminates while the front fog lamps are on. Rear fog lamp indicator lamp This lamp illuminates while the rear fog lamp is on. 99 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL 100 Indicator lamps What it means Position lamp indicator lamp* This indicator lamp illuminates while the position lamps are on. Diesel preheat indicator lamp This indicator lamp shows the glow plug preheat condition. Except for vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system: When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the lamp illuminates. As the glow plug becomes hot, the lamp goes out and the engine can be started. For vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system: When the operation mode is put in ON, the lamp illuminates and preheating of the glow plug starts automatically. As the glow plug becomes hot, the lamp goes out and the engine starts. If the engine is cold, the diesel preheat indicator lamp is on for a longer time. Except for vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system: when the engine has not been started within approximately 5 seconds after the diesel preheat indicator lamp went out, return the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position. Then, turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position to preheat the engine again. When the engine is warm, the diesel preheat indicator lamp does not come on even if the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position or the operation mode is in ON. 46) 47) Fuel filter indicator lamp This indicator lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes off after the engine has started. If it lights up while the engine is running, it indicates that water has accumulated inside the fuel filter; if this happens, take action as follows. Remove the water from the fuel filter. Refer to “Removal of water from the fuel filter”. When the lamp goes out, you can resume driving. If it either does not go out or comes on from time to time, we recommend you to have the vehicle inspected. Indicator lamps What it means ESC indicator lamp ESC OFF indicator lamp The indicator lamps should illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, and should go off after a few seconds. If the indicator lamps stay on or do not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, we recommend you to have your vehicle inspected as soon as possible. blinks when the electronic stability control function or active traction control function is operating. illuminates when the electronic stability control function is deactivated by either of the following operations: The ESC OFF switch is pressed to deactivated the system. The drive mode-selector is placed in the “4L” position (Easy select 4WD) or “4LLc” position (Super select 4WD II). 48) 49) 101 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL Warning lamps Warning lamps What it means Brake warning lamp This lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes off after a few seconds. Always make sure that the lamp goes off before driving. With the ignition switch or the operation mode in ON, the brake warning lamp illuminates under the following conditions: When the parking brake has been applied. When the brake fluid level in the reservoir falls to a low level. When the brake force distribution function is not operating correctly. With the ignition switch or the operation mode in ON, a buzzer sounds if the vehicle speed exceeds 8 km/h with the parking brake applied. 115) 116) Check engine warning lamp This lamp is a part of an onboard diagnostic system which monitors the emissions, engine control system or A/T control system. If a problem is detected in one of these systems, this lamp illuminates or flashes. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, we recommend you to have the system checked as soon as possible. This lamp will also illuminate when the ignition switch is turned “ON” or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes off after the engine has started. If it does not go off after the engine has started, we recommend you to have the vehicle checked. The engine electronic control module accommodating the onboard diagnostic system has various fault data (especially about the exhaust emission) stored. This data will be erased if a battery cable is disconnected which will make a rapid diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect a battery cable when the check engine warning lamp is ON. 50) 51) 52) 102 Warning lamps What it means Charge warning lamp This lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes off after the engine has started. 53) Oil pressure warning lamp This lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, and the lamp goes off after the engine has started. If it illuminates while the engine is running, the oil pressure is too low. If the warning lamp illuminates while the engine is running, turn the engine off and have it inspected. The oil pressure warning lamp should not be treated as an indication of the engine’s oil level. The oil level must be checked using the dipstick. 54) 55) 56) Door-ajar warning lamp This lamp illuminates when a door is either open or not completely closed. If the vehicle speed reaches approximately 8 km/h with a door open or incompletely closed, a buzzer sounds 4 times as a warning. 57) Washer fluid level warning lamp This lamp comes on when the washer fluid is running low. If the lamp comes on, replenish the container with washer fluid. Refer to “Washer fluid” and to “Refill capacities”. 103 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL Warning lamps What it means SRS warning lamp There is a supplemental restraint system (“SRS”) warning lamp on the instrument panel. The system checks itself every time the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON. The SRS warning lamp will come on for several seconds and then go out. This is normal and means the system is working properly. If there is a problem involving one or more of the SRS components, the warning lamp will come on and stay on. The SRS warning lamp is shared by the SRS airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner system. On vehicles equipped with the ERA-GLONASS, if the ERA-GLONASS system operates, the SRS warning lamp illuminates. 58) 59) ABS warning lamp (where provided) If there is a malfunction in the system, the ABS warning lamp will come on. Under normal conditions, the ABS warning lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON and goes off a few seconds later. NOTE: On vehicles with the rear differential lock and the Electronic Stability Control (ESC), the ESC and ABS functions are suspended while the rear differential lock is activated. ESC indicator lamp, ESC OFF indicator lamp and ABS warning lamp are illuminated while these functions are suspended. It does not indicate a problem. When the rear differential lock is disengaged, these lamps go out and function again. Refer to “ESC indicator lamp, ESC OFF indicator lamp”. If only the ABS warning lamp illuminates: Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Restart the engine and check to see whether the lamp goes out after a few minutes driving; if it then remains off during driving, there is no problem. However, if the warning lamp do not disappear, or if they come on again when the vehicle is driven, we recommend you to have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. If the ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp illuminate at the same time: The ABS and brake force distribution function may not work, so hard braking could make the vehicle unstable. Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and we recommend you to have the vehicle checked. 60) 61) 104 WARNING IMPORTANT 115) In the following situations, brake performance may be compromised or the vehicle may become unstable if brakes are applied suddenly; consequently, avoid driving at high speeds or applying the brakes suddenly. Furthermore, immediately the vehicle should be brought to a stop in a safe location and we recommend you to have it checked. 1 – The brake warning lamp does not illuminate when the parking brake is applied or does not turn off when the parking brake is released. 2 – The brake warning lamp and the ABS warning lamp illuminate at the same time. For details, refer to “ABS warning lamp”. 3 – The brake warning lamp remains illuminated while driving. 116) The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the following manner when brake performance has deteriorated. 1 – Depress the brake pedal harder than usual. Even if the brake pedal moves down to the very end of its possible stroke, keep it pressed down hard. 2 – Should the brakes fail, use engine braking to reduce your speed and carefully pull the parking brake lever. Depress the brake pedal to operate the stop lamp to alert the vehicles behind you. 46) This warning light will flash after starting or during prolonged cranking to indicate a fault with the glow plug heating system. If the engine starts, the vehicle can be used as normal, but a Fiat Dealership must be contacted as soon as possible. 47) If the diesel preheat indicator lamp comes on after the engine is started, the engine speed may not rise above the idling speed because of fuel freezing. In this case, keep the engine idling for about 10 minutes, then turn off the ignition switch or put in OFF the operation mode, and immediately turn it on or put in ON again to confirm that the diesel preheat indicator lamp is off. 48) When this indicator lamp blinks, electronic stability control function or active traction control function is operating, which means that the road is slippery or that your vehicle’s wheels are beginning to slip. If this happens, drive slower with less accelerator input. 49) If an abnormal condition occurs in the system while driving, the indicator lamp will illuminate. In these cases, follow these procedures: 1 – If the temperature in the braking system continues to increase due to continuous brake control on a slippery road surface, the indicator lamp will blink, and operation of the active traction control function will be suspended to protect the brake system (the engine control of the traction control function and normal brake operation will not be affected.) Park your vehicle in a safe place. When the temperature in the braking system has come down, the indicator lamp will go off and the electronic stability control function and active traction control function will start operating again. 2 – If the indicator lamp does not go out even through the above procedure is followed, there could be a problem in the system. Stop the engine and start the engine again and check whether the indicator lamp goes out. If the indicator lamp goes out, there is no abnormal condition. 3 – If the indicator lamp illuminates even after your vehicle is driven a short distance after re-starting the engine, we recommend you to have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. 50) Prolonged driving with this lamp on may cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and drivability. 51) If the lamp does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, we recommend you to have the system checked. 105 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL 106 52) If the lamp illuminates while the engine is running, avoid driving at high speeds and have the system inspected by a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. Accelerator pedal and brake pedal response may be negatively influenced under these conditions. 53) If it illuminates while the engine is running, there is a problem in the charging system. Immediately park your vehicle in a safe place and we recommend you to have it checked. 54) If this lamp illuminates when the engine oil level is not low, have it inspected. 55) This warning lamp does not indicate the amount of oil in the crankcase. This must be determined by checking the oil level on the dipstick, while the engine is switched off. 56) If you continue driving with low engine oil level or with this warning lamp illuminated, engine seizure may occur. 57) Before moving your vehicle, check that the warning lamp is OFF. 58) If any of the following conditions occur, there may be a problem with the SRS airbags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and they may not function properly in a collision or may suddenly activate without a collision: 1 – Even when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON, the SRS warning lamp does not come on or it remains on. 2 – The SRS warning lamp comes on while driving. 59) The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-tensioners are designed to help reduce the risk of serious injury or death in certain collisions. If either of the above conditions occurs, immediately have your vehicle checked by a Fiat Dealership. 60) Any of the following indicates that the ABS is not functioning and only the standard brake system is working. (The standard brake system is functioning normally.) If this happens, take your vehicle to a Fiat Dealership. 61) When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, the warning lamp does not come on or it remains on and does not go off . The warning lamp comes on while driving. SAFETY The chapter that you are about to read is very important: it describes the safety systems with which the car is equipped and provides instructions on how to use them correctly. SEAT BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 SBR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 PRETENSIONERS AND FORCE LIMITER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . .112 CHILD RESTRAINT . . . . . . . . . . .113 SUITABILITY FOR ISOFIX AND OTHER SEATING POSITIONS . . . . . . . . .116 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS . . . . .137 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . . .141 107 SAFETY SEAT BELTS To protect you and your passengers in the event of an accident, it is the most important that the seat belts be worn correctly while driving. The front seat belts each have a pre-tensioner system (Single cab and Club cab). The front seat belts and the rear outer seat belts each have a pre-tensioner system (Double cab). These belts are used the same way as a conventional seat belt. Refer to “Seat belt pre-tensioner system and force limiter system”. To fasten 1. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding the latch plate. NOTE When the seat belts cannot be pulled out in a locked condition, pull the belts once forcefully and then return them. After that, pull the belts out slowly once again. 2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle until a “click” is heard. 196 117) 118) 119) 120) 121) 122) 123) 124) 125) 126) 3-point type seat belt (with emergency locking mechanism) This type of belt requires no length adjustment. Once worn, the belt adjusts itself to the movement of wearer, but in the event of a sudden or strong shock, the belt automatically locks to hold the wearer’s body. For some markets (for example Sweden) /where provided, vehicles are equipped with roller seat belts with double locking functions in the front seat as well as the rear seat. You are not allowed to tamper with the seat belts or their mounting in any way. If problems occur, we recommend you to have the seat belts inspected by a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. NOTE You can check if the belt locks by pulling it forward quickly. 108 195 AA0008466 AA0008293 NOTE As the belt retracts automatically, keep the latch plate held while retracting so that the belt stows slowly. Failure to do this could damage the vehicle. NOTE If the seat belt (A) or ring (B) becomes dirty, the belt may not retract smoothly. If the seat belt and ring are dirty, clean them with a mild soap or detergent solution. 3. Pull the belt slightly to adjust slackness as desired. 127) 62) 63) To unfasten Hold the latch plate and push the button on the buckle. 197 AHZ101489 SEAT BELT INSPECTION Check the belts for cuts, worn or frayed webbing and for cracked or deformed metallic parts. Replace the belt assembly if defective. 198 AFZ101656 128) 129) 130) 64) 65) 66) WARNING 117) Seat belts should always be worn by every adult who drives or rides in this vehicle, and by all children who are large enough to wear seat belts properly. Other children should always use proper child restraint systems. 118) Always place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never put it behind you or under your arm. 119) One seat belt should be used by only one person. Doing otherwise can be dangerous. 120) The seat belt will provide maximum protection if the recliner seatback is placed in fully upright position. When the seatback is reclined, there is greater risk that the passenger will slide under the belt, especially in a forward impact accident, and may be injured by the belt or by striking the instrument panel or seatbacks. 121) Remove any twists when using the belt. 122) Never hold a child in your arms or on your lap when riding in this vehicle, even if you are wearing your seat belt. To do so risks severe or fatal injury to your child in a collision or sudden stop. 123) Always adjust the seat belt to a snug fit. 124) Always wear the lap portion of the belt over your hips. 125) Never push the button on the buckle when travelling. 126) Seat belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Pregnant women should use the available seat belts. This will reduce the likelihood of injury to both the woman and the unborn child. The lap belt should be worn across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible, but not across the waist. Consult your doctor if you have any additional questions or concerns. 127) Never wear the lap portion of the belt across your abdomen. During accidents it can press sharply against abdomen and increase the risk of injury. 128) Do not attempt to repair or replace any part of the seat belt assemblies; we recommend you to have this work done by a Fiat Dealership. Incorrect repair or replacement could reduce the effectiveness of the belts and could result in serious injury in the event of a collision. 129) Remember that, in the event of an accident, the rear seat passengers not wearing seat belts are exposed to a very serious risk and also represent a serious danger for the front seat occupants. 130) Make height adjustment of the seat belts when the car is stationary. IMPORTANT 62) No modifications or additions should be made which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack. 63) The seat belts must not be twisted when worn. 64) We recommend you to have all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware inspected after any collision. We recommend that seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. 65) Once the pre-tensioner has activated, it cannot be re-used. It must be replaced together with the retractor. 109 SAFETY 66) Do not insert any foreign objects (pieces of plastic, paper clips, buttons, etc.) in the buckle or retractor mechanism fig. 198. In addition, do not modify, remove, or install the seat belt. Otherwise, the seat belt may not be able to provide adequate protection in a collision or other situation. 67) A dirty belt should be cleaned with neutral detergent in warm water. After rinsing in water, let it dry in the shade. Do not attempt to bleach or re-dye the belts because this affects their characteristics. SBR SYSTEM 68) Seat belt reminder For the driver and the front passenger’s seat (where provided) 199 AHA106665 * — This warning lamp shows the case of the left-hand drive vehicles. 1. LHD vehicles 2. RHD vehicles If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON while the driver's and / or the front passenger's (if so equipped) seat belt is not fastened, the warning lamp comes on and the tone sounds for approximately 6 seconds to remind the driver and / or the front passenger (so equipped) to fasten the seat belt. If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still unfastened, the warning lamp will blink and the tone will sound intermittently until the seat belt is fastened. 110 NOTE If the seat belt subsequently remains unfastened, the warning lamp and the tone will issue further warnings each time the vehicle starts moving from a stop. NOTE For the front passenger seat, the warning function works only while a person is sitting on the seat (Club cab and Double cab). NOTE When luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, a sensor in the seat cushion may, depending on the weight and position of the luggage, cause the warning tone to sound and the warning lamp to come on (Club cab and Double cab). For the rear passenger’s seats (where provided) 200 AHA109187 * — This warning lamp shows the case of the 5-passenger vehicles. If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON while a seat belt is not fastened, the warning lamp comes on for approximately 30 seconds to remind the rear passenger to fasten the seat belt. If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still unfastened, the warning lamps come on for approximately another 30 seconds. (This illumination happens only the first time the vehicle starts moving with the seat belt still unfastened.) The warning lamps go off when the seat belt is fastened. NOTE The warning lamp comes on even if no one is sitting on the rear seats. NOTE If a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is being driven, the tone sounds for approximately 1 second and the warning lamp comes on for approximately 30 seconds. At the same time, the warning lamp for the seat where the seat belt is not fastened comes on. NOTE If the seat belts are initially fastened but a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is stationary and the vehicle is then driven with the seat belt still unfastened, the warning lamp comes on again for approximately 30 seconds. Adjustable seat belt anchor (front seats of Club cab and Double cab) The seat belt anchor height can be adjusted. To move the anchor, pull the lock knob (1) and slide the anchor to the desired position. Release the lock knob to lock the anchor into position. 202 AA0005595 A — Tighten B — Loosen While holding the latch plate, insert the latch plate into the buckle until a “click” is heard. 201 AA0105192 IMPORTANT 131) Lap belts The lap belts should be adjusted by holding the belt and latch plate at right angles to each other, and then pulling the belt as shown in the illustration to a snug fit around the occupant. 68) Do not install any accessory or sticker that makes the lamp difficult to see. WARNING 131) When adjusting the seat belt anchor, set it at a position that is sufficiently high so that the belt will make full contact with your shoulder but will not touch your neck. 111 SAFETY PRETENSIONERS AND FORCE LIMITER SYSTEM (where provided) 132) 133) 134) 135) 136) 69) 70) 71) 72) The front seat belts each have a pre-tensioner system and force limiter system (Single cab and Club cab). The front seat belts and the rear outer seat belts each have a pre-tensioner system and force limiter system (Double cab). Pretensioner system When the ignition switch or the operation mode is under the following conditions, if there is a frontal impact or a side impact (vehicles equipped with SRS side airbags and SRS curtain airbags) severe enough to injure the driver and/or front passenger, or when a rollover or overturning of the vehicle is detected (if so equipped), the pretensioner system will retract their respective seat belts instantaneously, thus maximizing the seat belt’s effectiveness. Except for vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system: the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “START” position. Vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system: the operation mode is in ON. 112 NOTE The pretensioner seat belts will be activated if the vehicle suffers a severe impact, even if the seat belts are not worn. NOTE The pretensioner seat belts are designed to work only once. After the pretensioner seat belts have been activated, we recommend you to have them replaced by a Fiat Dealership. SRS warning lamp (where provided) This warning lamp is shared by the SRS airbags and the pre-tensioner seat belts. Refer to “SRS warning lamp”. Force limiter system In the event of a collision, each force limiter system will effectively absorb the load applied to the seat belt so as to minimize the impact to the passenger. WARNING 132) Each seat belt must be used by only one person. Never travel with a child sitting on the passenger's lap and a single belt to protect them both fig. 158. In general, do not place any objects between the person and the belt. 133) The pretensioner may be used only once. After it is triggered, have it replaced at a Fiat Dealership. 134) Removing or otherwise tampering with pretensioner and seat belt components is strictly prohibited. Any intervention on these components must be performed by qualified and authorised technicians. Always go to a Fiat Dealership. 135) For maximum safety, keep the backrest upright, lean back into it and make sure the seat belt fits closely across your chest and pelvis. Always fasten the seat belts for both the front and rear seats! Travelling without wearing seat belts will increase the risk of serious injury and even death in the event of an accident. 136) If the belt has been subjected to high levels of stress, for example after an accident, it should be changed completely together with the attachments, attachment fixing screws and the pretensioner. In fact, even if the belt has no visible defects, it may have lost its resilience. IMPORTANT 69) To obtain the best results from your pretensioner seat belt, make sure you have adjusted your seat correctly and wear your seat belt properly. 70) Installation of audio equipment or repairs in the vicinity of the pretensioner seat belts or floor console must be performed in line with FCA Italy S.p.A. guidelines. It is important to do so because the work could affect the pretensioner systems. 71) If you need to scrap the vehicle, please consult a Fiat Dealership. It is important to do so because unexpected activation of the pretensioner seat belts could cause injuries. 72) Operations which lead to impacts, vibrations or localised heating (over 100°C for a maximum of six hours) in the area around the pretensioners may damage or accidentally deploy them. Contact a Fiat Dealership should intervention be necessary on these components. CHILD RESTRAINT When transporting children in your vehicle, some type of child restraint system should always be used according to the size of the child. This is required by law in most countries. The regulations concerning driving with children in the front seat may differ from country to country. You are advised to comply with the relevant regulations. Use rearward facing child restraints in the rear seat or turn off the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch (Club cab and Double cab, refer to “To turn an airbag off”). 137) 138) 139) 140) 141) 142) 143) 144) Caution for installing the child restraint on vehicle with front passenger airbag The label shown here is attached on vehicles with front passenger airbag. 204 AHA100588 203 205 AHA100591 AHA105668 145) 146) 147) 148) 149) 150) 151) 152) 153) 154) NOTE The labels may be in different positions depending on the vehicle model. Infants and small children When transporting infants and small children in your vehicle, follow the instruction given below. 113 SAFETY pulled forward or to either side easily on the seat cushion after the seat belt has been tightened, choose another manufacturer’s child restraint system. 155) 156) 157) 206 AA0059891 Instructions: For small infants, an infant carrier should be used. For small children whose height when seated allows the shoulder belt to lie in contact with the face or the throat, a child seat should be used. The child restraint system should be appropriate for your child’s weight and height and properly fit the vehicle. For a higher degree of safety THE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN THE REAR SEAT (Double cab and Club cab). Before purchasing a child restraint system, try installing it in the seat to make sure there is a good fit. Because of the location of the seat belt buckles and the shape of the seat cushion, it may be difficult to securely install some manufacturer’s child restraint systems. If the child restraint system can be 114 Older children Children who have outgrown the child restraint system should be seated in the rear seat and wear combination lap shoulder belt. The lap portion of the belt should be snug and positioned low on the abdomen so that it is below the top of the hip-bone. Otherwise, the belt could intrude into the child’s abdomen during an accident and cause injury. WARNING 137) Follow the instructions for positioning, fitting and removing which the manufacturer must supply together with the child restraint system. 138) Fiat recommends fitting the child restraint system according to the instructions, which must be included. 139) Do not place a rearward facing cradle seat on the front seat if the passenger side airbag is enabled. Deployment of the airbag in an accident could cause fatal injuries to the child regardless of the severity of the impact. It is advisable to always carry children in a child restraint system on the rear seat, which is the most protected position in the event of a collision. If you need to carry a child on the front passenger seat in a rearward facing cradle seat, the passenger side airbags (front and side bags for chest/ pelvis protection, for versions/markets, where provided) must be deactivated using the setup menu. It is important to check the dedicated LED on button on the instrument panel to make sure that they are actually deactivated. The passenger seat must also be positioned back as far as possible in order to avoid the child restraint system from coming into contact with the dashboard. 140) Fit the child restraint system only when the vehicle is stationary. 141) When possible, put children in the rear seat. Accident statistics indicate that children of all sizes and ages are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat rather than in the front seat (Club cab and Double cab). 142) Holding a child in your arms is no substitute for a restraint system. Failure to use a proper restraint system can result in severe or fatal injury to your child. 143) Each child restraint device or fixing is to be used only by one child. 144) Incorrect fitting of the child restraint system may result in an inefficient protection system. In the event of an accident the child restraint system may become loose and the child may be injured, even fatally. When fitting a restraint system for newborns or children, strictly comply with the instructions provided by the Manufacturer. 145) On the sun visor there is a label with suitable symbols reminding the user that it is compulsory to deactivate the airbag if a rearward facing child restraint system is fitted. Always comply with the instructions on the passenger side sun visor (see the "Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) Airbag" paragraph). 146) Extreme Hazard! NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. 147) When attaching a child restraint system to the rear seat, prevent the front seat from touching the child restraint system. Otherwise, the child could be seriously injured in the event of hard braking or a collision (Club cab and Double cab). 148) On vehicles with an airbag for the front passenger, a REARWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT must NOT be used in the front passenger seat as it places an infant too close to the passenger airbag. The force of an inflating airbag could kill or cause serious injuries to the child. A rearward facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat. (Club cab and Double cab). 149) Do not move the front or rear seat if a child is seated on it or on the dedicated child restraint system. 150) A FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT should be used in the rear seat whenever possible; if it must be used in the front passenger seat, adjust the seat to the most rearward position. Failure to do so could kill or cause serious injuries to the child. 151) Always make sure that the diagonal section of the seat belt does not pass under the arms or behind the back of the child. In the event of an accident the seat belt will not be able to secure the child, with the risk of injury, including fatal injury. Therefore the child must always wear the seat belt correctly. 152) Do not use the same lower anchorage to install more than one child restraint system. 153) If a Universal ISOFIX child seat system is not fixed to all three anchorages, it will not be able to protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be seriously or fatally injured. 86) 154) Fit the child restraint system when the car is stationary. The child restraint system is correctly fixed to the brackets when you hear the click. Follow the instructions for assembly, disassembly and positioning that the Manufacturer must supply with the child restraint system. 155) After installation, push and pull the child restraint system back and forth, and side to side, to see that it is positively secured. If the child restraint system is not installed securely, it may cause injury to the child or other occupants in the case of accident or sudden stops. 156) When the child restraint system is not in use, keep your child restraint system secured with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle in order to prevent it from being thrown around inside the vehicle during an accident. 157) After installing a child restraint system, do not move the seat: always remove the child restraint system before making any adjustment. 115 SAFETY SUITABILITY FOR ISOFIX AND OTHER SEATING POSITIONS Suitability for ISOFIX positions Double cab Mass Group Size class and Fixture ISOFIX positions Rear Outboard Recommended Child Restraint Systems UN-R44 Approval Number F ISO/L1 X — — G ISO/L2 X — — E ISO/R1 X — — E ISO/R1 IL BABY-SAFE plus: MZ314393 BABYSAFE ISOFIX BASE: MZ314394 E1-04301146 D ISO/R2 IL G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for East area) : MZ314390E G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for Central- South area) : MZ314390CS G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for North area) : MZ314390N RWF ISOFIX platform (Rearward facing ISOFIX base for ALL area): MZ314840 (Type D) E4-04443718 Carrycoat 0 — Up to 10 kg 0+ — Up to 13 kg C ISO/R3 116 IL Mass Group Size class and Fixture ISOFIX positions Rear Outboard D ISO/R2 IL Recommended Child Restraint Systems UN-R44 Approval Number G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for East area) : MZ314390E G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for Central- South area) : MZ314390CS G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for North area) : MZ314390N RWF ISOFIX platform (Rearward facing ISOFIX base for ALL area): MZ314840 (Type D) E4-04443718 C ISO/R3 IL B ISO/F2 IUF — — B1 ISO/F2X IUF, IL DUO plus: MZ313045 E1-04301133 IUF, IL G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for East area) : MZ314390E G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for Central- South area) : MZ314390CS G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for North area) : MZ314390N FWF ISOFIX platform (Frontward facing ISOFIX base for ALL area): MZ314841 (Type A) E4-04443718 IL KIDFIX: MZ314804 E1-04301198 1 — 9 to 18 kg A ISO/F3 II & III — 15 to 36 kg 158) 73) Definition of characters to be inserted in the table above: IUF — Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group. IL — Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. See the above table of “Recommended Child Restraint Systems”. X — ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group. 117 SAFETY Important note: Front passenger seat is NOT suitable for rearward facing child restraint system when the passenger airbag is active. It is suitable for universal child restraint system when the airbag has been disabled (refer to “Supplemental restraint system — Airbag”). i-Size child restraint system Seating Position: Second Outboard i-Size child restraint system i-U Definition of characters to be inserted in the table above: i-U — Suitable for i-Size “universal” child restraint system forward and rearward facing. Important note: Front passenger seat is NOT suitable for rearward facing child restraint system when the passenger airbag is active. It is suitable for universal child restraint system when the airbag has been disabled (refer to “Supplemental restraint system — Airbag”). 118 Suitability for various seating positions SINGLE CAB Mass Group Seating Position Front Passenger Recommended Child Restraint Systems UN-R44 Approval No. 0 — Up to 10 kg X — — 0+ — Up to 13 kg X — E1-04301146 1 — 9 to 18 kg UF, L G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for East area): MZ314390E G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for Central-South area): MZ314390CS G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for North area): MZ314390N DUO plus: MZ313045 E4-03443416 E1-04301133 II & III —15 to 36 kg UF, L KID plus: MZ314250 KIDFIX: MZ314804 E1-04301169 E1-04301198 158) 74) Definition of characters to be inserted in the table above: U — Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group. UF — Suitable for front-facing “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group. X — Seat position not suitable for child restraint systems in this mass group. Important note: Front passenger seat is NOT suitable for rearward facing child restraint system when the passenger airbag is active. It is suitable for universal child restraint system when the airbag has been disabled (refer to “Supplemental restraint system — Airbag”). 119 SAFETY 120 Suitability for various seating positions CLUB CAB Seating Position Front Passenger Mass Group Recommended Child Restraint Systems UN-R44 Approval No. Activated Airbag Deactivated Airbag 0 — Up to 10 kg X U — — 0+ — Up to 13 kg X U, L BABY-SAFE plus: MZ314393 E1-04301146 E4-03443416 E1-04301133 E1-04301169 E1-04301198 1 — 9 to 18 kg X U, L G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for East area): MZ314390E G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for Central- South area): MZ314390CS G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for North area): MZ314390N DUO plus: MZ313045 II & III —15 to 36 kg X U, L KID plus: MZ314250 KIDFIX: MZ314804 Mass Group Seating Position Rear Outboard Recommended Child Restraint Systems UN-R44 Approval No. 0 — Up to 10 kg X — — 0+ — Up to 13 kg X BABY-SAFE plus: MZ314393 E1-04301146 1 — 9 to 18 kg X G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for East area): MZ314390E G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for Central- South area): MZ314390CS G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for North area): MZ314390N DUO plus: MZ313045 E4-03443416 E1-04301133 II & III —15 to 36 kg X KID plus: MZ314250 KIDFIX: MZ314804 E1-04301169 E1-04301198 158) 74) Definition of characters to be inserted in the table above: U — Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group. UF — Suitable for front-facing “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group. X — Seat position not suitable for child restraint systems in this mass group. Important note: Front passenger seat is NOT suitable for rearward facing child restraint system when the passenger airbag is active. It is suitable for universal child restraint system when the airbag has been disabled (refer to “Supplemental restraint system — Airbag”). 121 SAFETY 122 Suitability for various seating positions DOUBLE CAB Seating Position Front Passenger Mass Group Recommended Child Restraint Systems UN-R44 Approval No. Activated Airbag Deactivated Airbag 0 — Up to 10 kg X U — — 0+ — Up to 13 kg X U, L BABY-SAFE plus: MZ314393 E1-04301146 E4-03443416 E1-04301133 E1-04301169 E1-04301198 1 — 9 to 18 kg X U, L G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for East area): MZ314390E G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for Central- South area): MZ314390CS G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for North area): MZ314390N DUO plus: MZ313045 II & III —15 to 36 kg X U, L KID plus: MZ314250 KIDFIX: MZ314804 Seating Position Mass Group Rear Outboard Rear Centre Recommended Child Restraint Systems UN-R44 Approval No. 0 — Up to 10 kg U U — — 0+ — Up to 13 kg U, L U, L BABY-SAFE plus: MZ314393 E1-04301146 E4-03443416 E1-04301133 E1-04301169 E1-04301198 1 — 9 to 18 kg U, L U, L G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for East area): MZ314390E G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for Central- South area): MZ314390CS G 0/1 S ISOFIX (Child restraint system for North area): MZ314390N DUO plus: MZ313045 II & III —15 to 36 kg U, L X KID plus: MZ314250 KIDFIX: MZ314804 158) 73) 74) 75) 76) Definition of characters to be inserted in the table above: U — Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group. UF — Suitable for front-facing “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group. X — Seat position not suitable for child restraint systems in this mass group. Important note: Front passenger seat is NOT suitable for rearward facing child restraint system when the passenger airbag is active. It is suitable for universal child restraint system when the airbag has been disabled (refer to “Supplemental restraint system — Airbag”). 123 SAFETY Installing a child restraint system to the lower anchorage (ISOFIX child restraint mountings) and tether anchorage (Double cab) Lower anchorage location Your vehicle’s rear seat is fitted with lower anchorages for attaching a child restraint system with ISOFIX mountings. Tether anchorage location There are 2 child restraint anchorage points on the vertical panel, located behind the rear seat. These are for securing a child seat tether strap to each of the 2 rear seating positions in your vehicle. 210 AA0014302 A. Child restraint system connectors 209 AHA104759 159) 207 AHA106607 Child restraint systems with ISOFIX mountings (Double cab) The child restraint system is designed only for seats that incorporate lower anchorages. Retain the child restraint system using the lower anchorages. It is not necessary to retain the child restraint system using the vehicle’s seat belts. 208 124 AHA106229 To install 1. Remove any foreign material in or around the connectors and ensure the vehicle seat belt is in its normal storage position. 2. Remove the head restraint from the location in which you wish to install a child restraint. Refer to “Head restraints”. 3. Push the child restraint system’s connectors (A) into the lower anchorages (B) in accordance with the instructions provided by the child restraint system’s manufacturer. 211 AHA106434 A. Connector B. Lower anchorage If your child restraint system has a support leg, make sure that there is a support leg at the stable position on the floor. If your child restraint system with a tether strap, perform the step 4 through 8. If your child restraint system without a tether strap, perform the step 8. 4. Drop the child restraint’s tether strap (C) down from the clearance between the rear seatback and back panel trim. 212 AHA106610 5. Tip the armrest forward. Open the two fasteners (D) that’s located in the space where the armrest are stowed. 213 6. Open the inner cover. 214 AHA106636 7. Put your hand in the opening of the two fasteners, attach the tether strap hook (E) to the tether anchorage (F), and securely tighten the tether strap. AHA106623 215 AHA106649 If it is difficult to latch the tether strap hook, turn the hook sideways. 8. Push and pull the child restraint system in all directions to be sure it is firmly secured. 125 SAFETY To remove Remove the child restraint system in accordance with the instructions provided by the child restraint system’s manufacturer. Installing a child restraint system to a 3-point type seat belt (with emergency locking mechanism) Installation 1. Put a child restraint system on the seat in which you wish to install it and remove the head restraint from the seat. Refer to “Head restraints”. 2. When installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, adjust seat slide to its most rearward position. 3. Route the belt through the child restraint according to the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions, then insert the latch plate into the buckle. 4. Remove all slack by using the locking clip (A). 5. If your child restraint system has a support leg, make sure that there is a support leg at the stable position on the floor. 6. Before putting the child in the restraint, push and pull the child restraint in all directions to be sure it is secure. Do this before each use. 126 IMPORTANT 216 AA0008772 160) WARNING 158) When installing a child restraint system, remove the head restraint from the seat. 159) Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. 160) For some type of child restraint, the locking clip (A) should be used to help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden manoeuvre. It must be fitted and used in accordance with the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. The locking clip must be removed when the child restraint is removed. 73) When attaching a child restraint system to the rear seat, adjust the front seat to prevent the front seatbacks from touching the child's feet and child restraint system. 74) When installing a child restraint system (Mass group II & III) on the front passenger seat, please move the seatbacks position to 2 steps rearward from upright position. 75) Child restraint system with support leg can not be suitable on the rear centre seat. 76) Pull down the head restraint of the child restraint after the child gets down from the child restraint when you use the “KID-FIX” or “KID PLUS” in the rear seat to prevent the head restraint of the child restraint from touching the rear glass. And make sure the head restraint is adjusted and properly positioned when the child sits in the child restraint system. SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG The information for SRS airbags includes important information concerning the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags, the driver’s knee airbag, the side airbags and the curtain airbags. The SRS driver’s and front passenger’s airbags are designed to supplement the primary protection of the driver and front passenger side seat belt systems by providing those occupants with protection against head and chest injuries in certain moderate-to-severe frontal collisions. The SRS driver airbag employ a dual stage airbag system (if so equipped). The SRS driver and front passenger airbag is controlled by the impact sensors (at the front of the vehicle) and the control unit (near the centre of the vehicle at floor level). The SRS driver’s knee airbag (if so equipped) is designed to supplement the primary protection of the driver’s seat belt system. It can reduce the forward movement of the driver’s lower legs and provide increased overall body protection in certain moderate-tosevere frontal collisions. The SRS side airbags (if so equipped) are designed to supplement properly worn seat belts and provide the driver and front passenger with protection against chest injuries in certain moderate-to-severe side impact collisions. The SRS curtain airbags (if so equipped) are designed to supplement properly worn seat belts and provide the driver and passenger on the front seat and rear outboard seat with protection against head injuries by deploying the curtain airbag on the side impacted in certain moderate-to-severe side impact collisions. The SRS is NOT a substitute for the seat belts. To ensure the maximum protection during all types of collisions and accidents, all occupants, including the passengers as well as the driver, must wear their seat belts. NOTE The ERA-GLONASS (if so equipped) is designed to operate when any of airbags deploy. Refer to “ERA-GLONASS”. How the supplemental restraint system works The SRS includes the following components: 217 AHA106232 218 AHA104876 1. Airbag module (Driver) 2. Front passenger’s airbag indicator (Club Cab and Double Cab) 3. Airbag module (Passenger) 4. Driver’s knee airbag module* 5. Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch (Club cab and Double cab) 6. Side airbag modules* 7. Curtain airbag modules* * — if so equipped 127 SAFETY Only when the ignition switch or the operation mode is under the following conditions, the airbags will operate. Except for vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system: the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “START” position. Vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system: the operation mode is in ON. When the airbag control unit detects rollover of the vehicle, curtain airbags will be deployed (if so equipped). The airbags deployment produces a sudden, loud noise, and releases some smoke and powder, but these conditions are not injurious, and do not indicate a fire in the vehicle. People with respiratory problems may feel some temporary irritation from chemicals used to produce the deployment; open the windows after airbag deployment, if safe to do so. The airbags deflate very rapidly after deployment, so there is little danger of obscured vision. 161) 162) 163) 164) 165) 166) 167) 168) 169) 170) 171) 172) 173) 128 219 AF0009484 221 AHA105668 174) NOTE The labels may be in different positions depending on the vehicle model. 220 AHA100605 Caution for installing the child restraint on vehicle with front passenger’s airbag The label shown here is attached on vehicles with front passenger’s airbag. Front passenger’s airbag ON OFF switch (Club cab and Double cab) The front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch can be used to disable the front passenger’s airbag. If you have a child restraint system that cannot be fitted to any seat other than the front passenger seat, be sure to turn OFF the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch before using it. Refer to “To turn an airbag off”. Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is located as shown in the illustration. indicator will stay on to show that the front passenger’s airbag is not operational. When the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is turned ON, the OFF indicator goes off, and the ON indicator comes on for approximately 1 minute to show that the front passenger’s airbag is operational. 175) 222 AHA106245 To turn an airbag off (Club cab and Double cab) 176) Front passenger’s airbag indicator (Club cab and Double cab) The front passenger’s airbag indicator is located in the instrument panel. 223 To turn an airbag off, follow these steps: 1. Insert the key into the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch, and turn it to the “OFF” position. 2. Remove the key from the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position or put the operation mode in ON. The front passenger’s airbag OFF indicator lamp will stay on. The front passenger’s airbag is now deactivated and will not deploy until switched on again. Driver’s and front passenger’s airbag system The driver’s airbag is located under the padded cover in the middle of the steering wheel. The front passenger’s airbag is contained in the instrument panel above the glove box. The driver’s airbag inflates at two different rates according to the severity of the impact (if so equipped). The driver’s airbag and the front passenger’s airbag are designed to inflate at the same time even if the passenger seat is not occupied. AHA106258 This indicator normally comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes off a few seconds later. When the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is turned OFF, the OFF 225 224 AA0001988 AHA109190 129 SAFETY Driver’s knee airbag system (where provided) The driver’s knee airbag is located under the steering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is designed to deploy at the same time as the driver’s front airbag. 227 226 AHA105697 Deployment of front airbags and driver’s knee airbag (where provided) The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when… The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe frontal impact. The typical condition is shown in the illustration. 130 AHA103130 1. Head-on collision with a solid wall at speed of approximately 25 km/h or higher 2. Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded area between the arrows The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag will deploy if the severity of impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an approximately 25 km/h collision when impacting straight into a solid wall that does not move or deform. If the severity of the impact is below the above threshold level, the front airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy. However, this threshold speed will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object that absorbs the impact by either deforming or moving (for example, another stationary vehicle, pole or a guard rail). Because frontal collisions can easily move you out of position, it is important to always properly wear your seat belts. Your seat belts will help keep you a safe distance from the steering wheel and instrument panel during the initial stages of airbag deployment. The initial stage of airbag inflation is the most forceful, and can possibly cause serious or fatal injuries. Moreover, the seat belts in your vehicle are your primary means of protection in a collision. The SRS airbags are designed to provide additional protection. Therefore, for your safety and the safety of all occupants, be sure to always properly wear your seat belts. The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY when… With certain types of frontal collisions, the vehicle’s body structure is designed to absorb the shock to help protect the occupants from harm. (The vehicle body’s front area may deform significantly as it absorbs the impact.) Under such circumstances, the front airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy irrespective of the deformation and damage to the vehicle body. Examples of some typical conditions are shown in the illustration. 228 AHA103143 1. When colliding with a utility pole, tree or other narrow object. 2. Vehicle slides under the rear body of a truck 3. Oblique frontal impacts Because the front airbags and driver’s knee airbag do not protect the occupant in all types of frontal collisions, be sure to always properly wear your seat belts. The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when… The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are not designed to deploy in conditions where they cannot typically provide protection to the occupant. Such conditions are shown in the illustration. 229 AHA103156 1. Rear end collisions 2. Side collisions 3. Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof Because the front airbags and driver’s knee airbag do not protect the occupant in all types of collisions, be sure to always properly wear your seat belts. The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag MAY DEPLOY when… The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag may deploy if the bottom of the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe impact (undercarriage damage). Examples of some typical conditions are shown in the illustration. 230 AHA103169 1. Collision with an elevated median/island or kerb 2. Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole 3. Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the ground Because the front airbags and driver’s knee airbag may deploy in certain types of unexpected impacts as shown in the illustration that can easily move you out of position, it is important to always properly wear your seat belts. Your seat belts will help keep you a safe distance from the steering wheel and instrument panel during the initial stages of airbag deployment. The initial stage of airbag inflation is the most forceful and can possibly cause serious or fatal injuries if you contact it at this stage. 175) 176) 177) 178) 179) 180) 181) 182) 183) 184) 131 SAFETY Curtain airbag system (where provided) 185) 186) 231 AHA105701 233 AHA103198 The label shown here is attached to the seatbacks with a side airbag. 232 AHA105714 Side airbag system (where provided) The side airbags (A) are contained in the driver and front passenger seatbacks. The side airbag is designed to inflate only on the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no passenger in the front seat. 132 The curtain airbags are contained in the front pillars and roof side rail. The curtain airbag is designed to inflate only on the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no passenger in the front seat or rear seat. Also, when the airbag control unit detects rollover of the vehicle, the curtain airbags will deploy (if so equipped). 235 234 AHA103202 AJA102937 Deployment of side airbags and curtain airbags* The side airbags and curtain airbags ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when... The side airbags and curtain airbags are designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe side impact to the middle of the passenger compartment. The typical condition is shown in the illustration. 236 Therefore, for your safety and the safety of all occupants, be sure to always properly wear your seat belts. The side airbags and curtain airbags MAY NOT DEPLOY when... With certain types of side collisions, the vehicle’s body structure is designed to absorb the shock to help protect the occupants from harm. (The vehicle body’s side area may deform significantly as it absorbs the impact.) Under such circumstances, the side airbags and curtain airbags may not deploy irrespective of the deformation and damage to the vehicle body. Examples of some typical conditions are shown in the illustration. AH3101226 1 — Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the vehicle body’s side structure. 2 — When the vehicle detects rollover of the vehicle (Curtain airbag only, where provided). The seat belts in your vehicle are your primary means of protection in a collision. The SRS side airbags and curtain airbags are designed to provide additional protection. 237 AHA103231 238 AHA103244 1. Side impacts in an area away from the passenger compartment. 2. Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle collides with the side of vehicle. 3. Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow object. 4. Oblique side impacts. 5. Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof. Because the side airbags and curtain airbags do not protect the occupant in all types of side collisions, be sure to always properly wear your seat belts. The side airbags and curtain airbags ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when... The side airbags and curtain airbags are not designed to deploy in conditions where they cannot usually provide protection to the occupant. Typical conditions are shown in the illustration. 133 SAFETY WARNING 239 AA0082019 241 AHA105727 AHE100469 1. Head-on collisions 2. Rear end collisions 3. Pitch end over end * * — where provided Because the side airbags and curtain airbags do not protect the occupant in all types of collisions, be sure to always properly wear your seat belts. 187) 188) 189) 190) 191) 192) 193) 194) 195) 134 240 SRS Servicing 196) 197) 198) 199) 200) NOTE If your vehicle has to be scrapped, do this in line with local legislation and contact a Fiat Dealership to safely dismantle the airbag system. 161) Do not cover the backrest of the front or rear seats with covers which are not suitable for use with side bags. 162) Do not travel carrying objects in your lap, in front of your chest or between your lips (pipe, pencils, etc.). They could cause severe injury if the airbag is deployed. 163) If the vehicle has been subject to theft, attempted theft, vandalism, or flooding, have the airbag system inspected at a Fiat Dealership. 164) Do not wash the seats with water or pressurised steam (by hand or at automatic car seat washing stations). 165) The front airbag deploys in the event of more severe collisions than those required for deploying the pretensioners. For impacts whose intensity falls between the two levels, normally, only the pretensioners will be activated. 166) Airbags inflate at an extremely rapid speed. In certain situations, contact with inflating airbags can result in abrasions, bruises, light cuts, and the like. 167) IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROPERLY SEATED. A driver or front passenger too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment can be killed or seriously injured. Airbags inflate very fast, and with great force. If the driver and front passenger are not properly seated and restrained, the airbags may not protect you properly, and could cause serious or fatal injuries when they inflate. 168) Do not sit on the edge of the seat, or sit with your lower legs too close to the instrument panel, or lean head or chest close to the steering wheel or instrument panel. Do not put feet or legs on or against the instrument panel. 169) Always drive with your hands on the rim of the steering wheel so that the airbag can inflate freely if required. Do not drive with your body bent forward. Keep your back straight against the backrest. 170) Place all infants and small children in the rear seat and properly restrained using an appropriate child restraint system. The rear seat is the safest for infants and children. 171) Infants and small children should never be unrestrained, stand up against the instrument panel or held in your arms or on your lap. They could be seriously injured or killed in a collision, including when the airbag inflates. They should be properly seated in an appropriate child restraint system. See the “Child restraint” section of this owner’s manual. 172) When there is an active passenger airbag, DO NOT install rearward facing child restraint systems on the front seat. Deployment of the airbag in an accident could cause fatal injuries to the child regardless of the severity of the impact. Therefore, always deactivate the passenger side airbag when a rearward facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat. The front passenger seat must also be positioned back as far as possible in order to prevent the child restraint system from coming into contact with the dashboard. Immediately reactivate the passenger airbag as soon as the child restraint system has been removed. 173) Older children should be seated, properly wearing the seat belt, with an appropriate booster seat if needed. 174) Extreme Hazard! NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. 175) Do not fit any accessory that makes the indicator impossible to see, and do not cover the indicator with a sticker. You would not be able to verify the status of the passenger airbag system. 176) To reduce risk of serious or fatal injury: always turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position or put the operation mode in OFF, before operating the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch. Failure to do so could adversely affect the airbag performance; Wait at least 60 seconds to operate the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch after turning the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position or putting the operation mode in OFF. The SRS airbag system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the airbag; Always remove the key from the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch after operating that switch. Failure to do so could lead to improper position of the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch; Do not turn OFF the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch except when a child restraint system is fitted to the front passenger seat; If the OFF indicator does not come on when the front passenger’s airbag ONOFF switch is turned OFF, do not fit a child restraint system to the front passenger seat. We recommend you to have the system inspected by a Fiat Dealership; if the OFF indicator remains on when the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is turned ON, do not allow anyone to sit on the front passenger seat. We recommend you to have the system inspected by a Fiat Dealership. 177) Do not apply stickers or other objects to the steering wheel, the dashboard in the passenger side airbag area and the seats. Never put objects (e.g. mobile phones) on the passenger side of the dashboard since they could interfere with correct inflation of the passenger airbag and also cause serious injury to the passengers. 135 SAFETY 136 178) Do not set anything on, or attach anything to, the instrument panel above the glove box. It might strike and injure an occupant if the airbag inflates. 179) Do not attach accessories to, or put them in front of, the windscreen. These objects could restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and injure an occupant if the airbags inflate. 180) Do not attach additional keys or accessories (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to the ignition key. Such objects could prevent the driver’s knee airbag from inflating normally or could be propelled to cause serious injury if the airbag inflates. 181) Do not attach accessories to the lower portion of the driver’s side instrument panel. Such objects could prevent the driver’s knee airbag from inflating normally or could be propelled to cause serious injury if the airbag inflates. 182) Do not put packages, pets or other objects between the airbags and the driver or front passenger. It could affect airbag performance, or could cause injury when the airbag inflates. 183) Right after the airbag inflation, several airbag system components will be hot. Do not touch these components. There is a danger of being burnt. 184) The airbag system is designed to work only once. Once the airbags have deployed, they will not work again. They must promptly be replaced and we recommend you to have the entire airbag system inspected by a Fiat Dealership. 185) Do not affix rigid objects to the garment hooks or support handles. 186) Do not rest your head, arms or elbows on the door, windows or the area in which the Window bag is located to avoid possible injury during airbag inflation. 187) The airbag does not replace seat belts but increases their efficiency. Furthermore, since front airbags are not deployed in low-speed frontal impacts, side impacts, rear shunts or roll-overs, the passengers are protected only by the seat belts which must therefore be fastened at all times. 188) The side airbags and curtain airbags are designed to supplement the driver and passenger seat belts in certain side impacts. Seat belts should always be worn properly, and the driver and passenger should sit well back and upright without leaning against the window or door. 189) The side airbag and curtain airbag inflate with great force. The driver and passenger should not put their arms out the window, and should not lean against the door, in order to reduce risk of serious or possible fatal injury from the deploying side airbag and curtain airbag. 190) Do not allow any rear seat occupant to hold onto the seatback of either front seat, in order to reduce risk of injury from the deploying side airbag. Special care should be taken with children. 191) Do not place any objects near or in front of the seatback of either front seat. They could interfere with proper side airbag inflation, and also could cause injury if thrown free by side airbag deployment. 192) Do not install seat covers on seats with side airbags. Do not re-cover seats that have side airbags. This could interfere with proper side airbag inflation. 193) Do not attach a microphone (A) or any other device or object around the part where the curtain airbags (B) activate such as on the windscreen, side door glass, front and rear pillars and roof side or assist grips. When the curtain airbags inflate, the microphone or other device or object will be hurled with great force or the curtain airbags may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury. 194) Do not allow the child to lean against or close to the front door even if the child is seated in a child restraint system. The child’s head should also not be leaned against or be close to the area where the side airbag and curtain airbag are located. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain airbag inflate. Failure to follow all of these instructions could lead to serious or fatal injury to the child. 195) We recommend work around and on the side airbags and curtain airbags system to be done by a Fiat Dealership. 196) We recommend any maintenance performed on or near the components of the SRS to be performed by a Fiat Dealership. Improper work on the SRS components or wiring could result in inadvertent deployment of the airbags, or could render the SRS inoperative; either situation could result in serious injury. 197) Do not modify your steering wheel, seat belt retractor or any other SRS components. For example, replacement of the steering wheel, or modifications to the front bumper or body structure can adversely affect SRS performance and lead to possible injury. 198) If your vehicle has received any damage, we recommend you to have the SRS inspected to ensure it is in proper working order. 199) On vehicles with the side airbag, do not modify your front seats, centre pillar and centre console. It can adversely affect SRS performance and lead to possible injury. 200) If you found any tear, scratch, crack or damage to the portion where the airbag is stored, you should have the SRS inspected by a Fiat Dealership. ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS Brake assist system (where provided) The brake assist system is a device assisting drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal firmly such as in emergency stop situations and provides greater braking force. If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the brakes will be applied with more force than usual. 201) NOTE Once the brake assist system is operational, it maintains great braking force even if the brake pedal is lightly released. To stop its operation, completely remove your foot from the brake pedal. NOTE When the brake assist system is in use while driving, you may feel the brake pedal attempt to resist, the pedal moves in small motions in conjunction with the operation noise, or the vehicle body and the steering wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake assist system is operating normally and does not indicate faulty operation. Continue to depress the brake pedal. NOTE When the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) indicator lamp is illuminated, the brake assist system may not function. Emergency stop signal system (where provided) This is a device that reduces the possibility of rear end collisions by the rapid and automatic blinking of the hazard warning lamps to alert vehicles approaching from behind during sudden braking. When the emergency brake system operates, the hazard warning indicator lamp in the instrument cluster blinks rapidly at the same time. NOTE Activating condition for the emergency brake system > It activates when all of the following conditions are met. The vehicle speed is approximately 55 km/h or higher. The brake pedal has been depressed, and the system judges that it was sudden braking from the vehicle deceleration and the operating condition of the anti-lock brake system (ABS). Deactivating condition for the emergency brake system > It deactivates when one of the following conditions is met. The brake pedal is released. The hazard warning flasher switch is pressed. The system judges that it was not sudden braking from the vehicle deceleration and the operating condition of the anti-lock brake system (ABS). 137 SAFETY 138 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) (where provided) The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps prevent the wheels from locking up when braking. This helps maintain vehicle drivability and steering wheel handling. Driving hints Always keep a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the ABS, leave a greater braking distance when: Driving on gravel or snow-covered roads. Driving with tyre chains installed. Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or has other differences in surface height. Driving on uneven road surfaces. Operation of ABS is not restricted situations where brakes are applied suddenly. This system may also prevent the wheels from locking when you drive over manholes, steel roadwork plates, road markings, or any uneven road surface. When the ABS is in use, you may feel the brake pedal pulsation and the vibrations of the vehicle body and steering wheel. It may also feel as if the pedal resists being pressed. In this situation, simply hold the brake pedal down firmly. Do not pump the brake, which will result in reduced braking performance. An operation noise is emitted from the engine compartment or feel a shock from the brake pedal when start driving immediately after starting the engine. These are normal sound or operation that the ABS makes when performing a self-check. It does not indicate a malfunction. The ABS can be used after the vehicle has reached a speed over approximately 10 km/h. It stops working when the vehicle slows below 7 km/h. 202) 203) 204) 205) 206) 207) 208) 209) 210) After driving on icy roads After driving on snow or icy roads, remove any snow and ice which may have be left around the wheels. On vehicles that have an ABS, be careful not to damage the wheel speed sensors (A) or the cables located at each wheel. 242 AHA103693 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (where provided) The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) takes overall control of the anti-lock brake system, traction control function and active stability control function to help maintain the vehicle’s control and traction. Please read this section in conjunction with the page on the anti-lock brake system, traction control function and electronic stability control function. 211) 212) 213) 214) NOTE An operation noise may be emitted from the engine compartment in the following situations. The sound is associated with checking the operations of the ESC. At this time, you may feel a shock from the brake pedal if you depress it. These do not indicate a malfunction: When the ignition switch is set to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON. When the vehicle is driven for a while after the engine is turned on. NOTE When the ESC is activated, you may feel a vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whining sound from the engine compartment. This indicates that the system is operating normally. It does not indicate a malfunction. NOTE When the anti-lock brake system warning lamp is illuminated, the ESC is not active. NOTE On vehicles with the rear differential lock, the ESC and ABS functions are suspended while the rear differential lock is activated. ESC indicator lamp, ESC OFF indicator lamp and ABS warning lamp are illuminated while these functions are suspended. It does not indicate a problem. When the rear differential lock is disengaged, these lamps go out and function again. Refer to “ABS warning lamp” and “ESC indicator lamp, ESC OFF indicator lamp”. Electronic Stability Control function The electronic stability control function is designed to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle on slippery roads or during rapid steering maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine output and the brake on each wheel. NOTE The electronic stability control function does not operate when the drive mode-selector is in the “4L” position (Easy select 4WD), “4LLc” position (Super select 4WD II). When the electronic stability control function is operating with the drive mode-selector in the “2H” or “4H” position (Easy select 4WD), “2H”, “4H” or “4HLc” position (Super select 4WD II), setting the drive mode-selector to the “4L” (Easy select 4WD), “4LLc” position (Super select 4WD II) position makes the electronic stability control function deactivate automatically. NOTE The electronic stability control function operates at speeds of about 15 km/h or higher. NOTE On vehicles with the rear differential lock, the electronic stability control function does not operate when the rear differential lock is activated. “ESC OFF” switch The electronic stability control function is automatically activated when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON. You can deactivate the system by pressing down the “ESC OFF” switch for 3 seconds or longer. When the electronic stability control function is deactivated, the indicator will turn on. To reactivate the ESC, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” switch; the indicator is turned off. 243 AHA106085 215) 216) Driving hints When extricating the vehicle from mud, sand or fresh snow with the drive mode-selector in the “2H”or “4H”position (Easy select 4WD) or “2H”, “4H” or “4HLc” position (Super select 4WD II), you may find that operation of the ESC prevents the engine speed from increasing in response to depression of the accelerator pedal. If this happens and the vehicle remains stuck as a result, place the drive mode-selector in the “4L” position (Easy select 4WD), “4LLc” position (Super select 4WD II), or turn the electronic stability control switch OFF. The vehicle will then be easier to extricate. (Brake control of the active traction control function is still working to prevent wheel spins when the ESC OFF switch is “OFF”, “4L” position (Easy select 4WD) or “4LLc” position (Super select 4WD II) selected.) 139 SAFETY NOTE If you continue to press the “ESC OFF” switch after the electronic stability control function is turned off, the “mistaken operation protection function” will activate and the electronic stability control function will turn back on. NOTE Even if the electronic stability control function is turned off, it may activate depending on the vehicle’s movement. Active Traction Control function On slippery surfaces, the active traction control function prevents the drive wheels from spinning excessive, thus helping the vehicle to start moving from a stopped condition. It also provides sufficient driving force and steering performance as the vehicle turns while pressing the acceleration pedal. 217) WARNING 201) The brake assist system is not a device designed to exercise braking force greater than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a sufficient distance between vehicles in front of you without relying too much on the brake assist system. 202) The ABS cannot prevent accidents. It is your responsibility to take safety precautions and to drive carefully. 140 203) To prevent failure of the ABS, be sure all 4 wheels and tyres are the same size and the same type. 204) Do not install any aftermarket limited slip differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ABS may stop functioning properly. 205) The ABS exploits the grip available to the full, but it cannot improve it. Therefore, you should take great care when driving on slippery surfaces, without taking unnecessary risks. 206) When the ABS intervenes and you notice the brake pedal pulsating, keep the pedal pushed down and don’t be alarmed. This will help you to stop in the shortest distance possible, depending on the road conditions. 207) If the ABS intervenes, it means you have almost reached the grip limit between the tyres and the road surface: slow down to make sure that you drive in accordance with the available grip. 208) The ABS cannot overrule the natural laws of physics, and can’t increase the grip available according to the condition of the road. 209) The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those due to excessive speed on corners, driving on low-grip surfaces or aquaplaning. 210) The capability of the ABS must never be tested irresponsibly and dangerously, in such a way as to compromise personal safety and the safety of others. 211) Do not over-rely on the ESC. Even the ESC cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle. This system, like any other system, has limits and cannot help you to maintain traction and control of the vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driving can lead to accidents. It is the driver’s responsibility to drive carefully. This means into account the traffic, road and environmental conditions. 212) The ESC system cannot prevent accidents, including those due to excessive speed on corners, driving on low-grip surfaces or aquaplaning. 213) Be sure to use the same specified type and size of tyre on all 4 wheels. Otherwise, the ESC may not work correctly. 214) Do not install any aftermarket limited slip differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The electronic stability control function may stop functioning properly. 215) For safety reasons, the “ESC OFF” switch should only be operated when the vehicle is stopped. 216) Be sure to keep the electronic stability control function on while driving in normal circumstances. 217) When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy road, be sure to install snow tyres and drive the vehicle at moderate speeds. AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS Hill Start Assist (where provided) The hill start assist makes it easy to start off on a steep uphill slope by preventing the vehicle from moving backwards. It keeps the braking force for approximately seconds when you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. 77) 78) 218) 219) To operate 1. Stop the vehicle completely using the brake pedal. 2. On vehicles equipped with M/T, place the gearshift lever into the 1st position. On vehicles equipped with A/T, place the selector lever into the “D” position. NOTE When reversing on an uphill slope, place the selector lever or gearshift lever into the “R” position. 3. Release the brake pedal and the hill start assist will maintain the braking force applied while stopping for approximately 2 seconds. 4. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hill start assist gradually will decrease the braking force as the vehicle starts moving. NOTE The hill start assist is activated when all of the following conditions are met. The engine is running (the hill start assist will not be activated while the engine is starting or immediately after the engine is started). On vehicles equipped with M/T, the gearshift lever is in the following position: When starting an uphill slope forwards > The gearshift lever is in any position other than “R” (the hill start assist will operate, even if the gearshift lever is in the “N” position). When starting an uphill slope backwards > The gearshift lever is in the “R” position (the hill start assist will not operate when the gearshift lever is in the “N” position). On vehicles equipped with A/T, the selector lever is in any position other than “P” or “N”. The vehicle is completely stationary, with the brake pedal depressed. The parking brake is released. NOTE The hill start assist will not operate if the accelerator pedal is depressed before the brake pedal is released. NOTE The hill start assist also operates when reversing on an uphill slope. NOTE When the hill start assist is activated, you may feel the operating sound. This is a normal result of the hill start assist operation, and does not indicate a problem. Warning indicator If an abnormal condition occurs in the system, the indicator lamp will turn on. 79) 80) Power Steering System The power steering system operates while the engine is running. It helps reduce the effort needed to turn the steering wheel. The power steering system has mechanical steering capability in case the power assist is lost. If the power assist is lost for some reason, you will still be able to steer your vehicle, but you will notice it takes much more effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehicle inspected at a Fiat Dealership. 81) 82) Trailer Stability Assist — TSA (where provided) The trailer stability assist system helps safely running while towing a trailer by controlling the braking force of each wheel and engine power in order to stabilize the motion when detecting the continuous sway of the vehicle caused by a trailer. 141 SAFETY When the trailer stability assist system operates the brakes, the brake lamp turns on. About the towing of the trailer, refer to “Trailer towing”. 83) 84) NOTE When TSA system operates, the vehicle body may vibrate and the operating sounds from the engine compartment may be heard. These motions indicate normal operation of the system, not abnormal operation. NOTE TSA system operates when the vehicle speed is about 55 km/h or higher. NOTE When TSA system operates, the ESC operation indicator lamp blinks on and off. NOTE When ESC does not work, TSA system does not operate. WARNING 218) When facing uphill, do not rely on using the hill start assist to maintain a stopped position as an alternative to depressing the brake pedal. Doing so could cause an accident. 219) Do not turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or the operation mode in ACC or OFF while the hill start assist is operating. The hill start assist could stop operating, which could result in an accident. 142 IMPORTANT 77) Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to prevent backwards movement of the vehicle. Under certain circumstances, even when hill start assist is activated, the vehicle may move backwards if the brake pedal is not sufficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heavily loaded, if the road is very steep or slippery or if the vehicle tows a trailer, etc. 78) The hill start assist is not designed to keep the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes for more than 2 seconds. 79) If the warning is turn on, the hill start assist will not operate. Start off carefully. 80) Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine. Restart the engine and check whether the warning indicator went out, in which case the hill start assist is again working normally. If they warning remains displayed or reappear frequently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle immediately, but the vehicle should be inspected by a Fiat Dealership. 81) Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is moving. Stopping the engine would make the steering wheel extremely hard to turn, possibly resulting in an accident. 82) Do not leave the steering wheel turned all the way in one direction. This can cause damage to the power steering system. 83) Do not over-rely on TSA system. Due to the slippery road surface, heavy side wind, inappropriate weight and positioning of luggage, and/or driving at high speed, TSA system may fail to secure the stability. Always drive appropriately in accordance with the condition of traffic, road surface condition, weather, and the weight and positioning of luggage. 84) The trailer stability assist system does not operate in case as follows: 1 – When sudden braking and braking while driving downhill cause an abrupt motion of the vehicle which makes the vehicle and the trailer form a dogleg shape. 2 – When a sideslip occurs by sudden steering. STARTING AND DRIVING Let’s get to the "heart" of the vehicle: seeing how you can exploit all of its potential to the full. We’ll look at how to drive it safely in any situation, so that it can be a welcome companion, with our comfort and our wallets in mind. ECONOMICAL DRIVING. . . . . . . .144 DRIVING, ALCOHOL AND DRUGS .145 SAFE DRIVING TECHNIQUES . . . .145 RUNNING-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . .146 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . .148 PARKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 STARTING AND STOPPING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 TURBOCHARGER OPERATION . . .153 START&STOP SYSTEM . . . . . . . .154 MANUAL TRANSMISSION . . . . . .157 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SPORTS MODE 5A/T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 EASY SELECT 4WD . . . . . . . . . .164 SUPER SELECT 4WD II . . . . . . . .169 REAR DIFFERENTIAL LOCK . . . . .174 4 WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . .178 CAUTIONS ON HANDLING OF 4 WHEEL DRIVE VEHICLES . . . . .181 BRAKING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . .182 CRUISE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . .183 SPEED LIMITER . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING . . .195 REAR VIEW CAMERA . . . . . . . . .199 143 STARTING AND DRIVING ECONOMICAL DRIVING For economical driving, there are some technical requirements that have to be met. The prerequisite for low fuel consumption is a properly adjusted engine. In order to achieve longer life of the vehicle and the most economical operation, we recommend you to have the vehicle checked at regular intervals in accordance with the service standards. Fuel economy and generation of exhaust gas and noise are highly influenced by personal driving habits as well as the particular operating conditions. The following points should be observed in order to minimize wear of brakes, tyres and engine as well as to reduce environmental pollution. Starting the engine Avoid sudden acceleration and sudden starts, as they will increase fuel consumption. Shifting Shift only at an appropriate speed and engine speed. Always use the highest shift position possible. The transfer shift lever or the drive modeselector should be set to “2H” when driving 4WD vehicles on normal roads and express ways to obtain best possible fuel economy. 144 City traffic Frequent starting and stopping increases the average fuel consumption. Use roads with smooth traffic flow whenever possible. When driving on congested roads, avoid use of a low shift position at high engine speeds. Cold engine starting Starting of a cold engine consumes more fuel. Unnecessary fuel consumption is also caused by keeping a hot engine running. After the engine is started, commence driving as soon as possible. Idling The vehicle consumes fuel even during idling. Avoid extended idling whenever possible. Cooler or air conditioning The use of the air conditioner will increase the fuel consumption. Speed At higher the vehicle speed, more fuel is consumed. Avoid driving at full speed. Even a slight release of the accelerator pedal will save a significant amount of fuel. Tyre inflation pressure Check the tyre inflation pressures at regular intervals. Low tyre inflation pressure increases road resistance and fuel consumption. In addition, low tyre pressures adversely affect tyre wear and driving stability. Cargo loads Do not drive with unnecessary articles in the luggage compartment. Especially during city driving where frequent starting and stopping is necessary, the increased weight of the vehicle will greatly affect fuel consumption. Also avoid driving with unnecessary luggage or carriers, etc., on the roof; the increased air resistance will increase fuel consumption. DRIVING, ALCOHOL AND DRUGS SAFE DRIVING TECHNIQUES Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired even with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you have been drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use public transportation. Drinking coffee or taking a cold shower will not make you sober. Similarly, prescription and non-prescription drugs affect your alertness, perception and reaction time. Consult with your doctor or pharmacist before driving while under the influence of any of these medications. Driving safety and protection against injury cannot be fully ensured. However, we recommend that you pay extra attention to the following: Seat belts Before starting the vehicle, make sure that you and your passengers have fastened your seat belts. Floor mats 221) Make sure that infants and small children are properly restrained in accordance with the laws and regulations, and for maximum protection in case of an accident. Prevent children from playing in the luggage compartment. It is quite dangerous to allow them to play there while the vehicle is moving. Loading luggage When loading luggage, be careful not to load above the height of seats. This is dangerous not only because rearward vision will be obstructed, but also the luggage may be projected into the passenger compartment under hard braking. 220) WARNING WARNING 220) NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE. Your perceptions are less accurate, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired. 244 AA0064482 Carrying children in the vehicle Never leave your vehicle unattended with the key and children inside the vehicle. Children may play with the driving controls and this could lead to an accident. 221) Keep floor mats clear of the pedals by correctly laying floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle. To prevent the floor mats from slipping out of position, securely retain them using the hook etc. Note that laying a floor mat over a pedal or laying one floor mat on top of another can obstruct pedal operation and lead to a serious accident. 145 STARTING AND DRIVING RUNNING-IN RECOMMENDATIONS During the running-in period for the first 1,000 km, it is advisable to drive your new vehicle using the following precautions as a guideline to aid long life as well as future economy and performance. Do not race the engine at high speeds. Avoid rapid starting, accelerating, braking and prolonged high-speed running. Keep to the running-in speed limit shown below. Please note that the legal speed limits displayed must be adhered to. Do not exceed loading limits. Refrain from towing a trailer. Vehicles with M/T Shift point Vehicles with 2WD 1st gear 146 Speed limit 20 km/h Vehicles with Easy select 4WD Vehicles with Super select 4WD II 2H, 4H 4L 2H, 4H, 4HLc 4LLc 20 km/h 5 km/h 20 km/h 5 km/h 2nd gear 40 km/h 40 km/h 15 km/h 40 km/h 15 km/h 3rd gear 65 km/h 65 km/h 25 km/h 65 km/h 25 km/h 4th gear 95 km/h 95 km/h 35 km/h 95 km/h 35 km/h 5th gear 110 km/h 110 km/h 45 km/h 115 km/h 45 km/h 6th gear 110 km/h 110 km/h 55 km/h 115 km/h 55 km/h Vehicles with A/T Shift point Speed limit Vehicles with 2WD Vehicles with Easy select 4WD Vehicles with Super select 4WD II 2H, 4H 4L 2H, 4H, 4HLc 4LLc 1st gear 15 km/h 15 km/h 5 km/h 20 km/h 5 km/h 2nd gear 35 km/h 35 km/h 15 km/h 40 km/h 15 km/h 3rd gear 55 km/h 55 km/h 20 km/h 60 km/h 20 km/h 4th gear 85 km/h 85 km/h 30 km/h 85 km/h 30 km/h 5th gear 110 km/h 110 km/h 45 km/h 115 km/h 45 km/h 85) IMPORTANT 85) On 4WD vehicles, the “4L” (Easy select 4WD), “4LLc” (Super select 4WD II) range gives maximum torque for low-speed driving on steep slopes, as well as sandy, muddy, and other difficult surfaces. On vehicles with A/T, do not exceed speeds of approximately 70 km/h in “4L” (Easy select 4WD), “4LLc” (Super select 4WD II) range. 147 STARTING AND DRIVING PARKING BRAKE To release To apply 246 245 AA0001018 Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal, then pull the lever up (A) without pushing the button at the end of hand grip. 86) NOTE Apply sufficient force to the parking brake lever to hold the vehicle stationary after the foot brake is released. NOTE If the parking brake does not hold the vehicle stationary after the foot brake is released, have your vehicle checked immediately. 148 IMPORTANT To park, fully apply the parking brake sufficiently to hold the vehicle. AA0001021 Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal, then pull the lever up slightly (A). Push the button at the end of hand grip (B). Lower the lever fully (C). 87) 88) NOTE To prevent the parking brake from being released unintentionally, the lever must be pulled up slightly before it can be pushed down. Simply pressing the button does not enable the lever to be pushed down. 86) When you intend to apply the parking brake, firmly press the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a complete stop before pulling the parking brake lever. Pulling the parking brake lever with the vehicle moving could make the rear wheels lock up, thereby making the vehicle unstable. It could also make the parking brake malfunction. 87) Before driving, be sure that the parking brake is fully released and brake warning lamp is off. If a vehicle is driven without releasing the parking brake, the brake will be overheated, resulting in ineffective braking and possible brake failure. 88) If the brake warning lamp does not extinguish when the parking brake is fully released, the brake system may be an abnormal. Have your vehicle checked immediately. For details, refer to “Brake warning lamp”. PARKING To park the vehicle, stop the engine, fully engage the parking brake and then move the gearshift lever to 1st or “R” (Reverse) position for vehicles equipped with M/T, or set the selector lever to “P” (PARK) position for vehicles equipped with A/T. Parking on a hill To prevent the vehicle from rolling, follow these procedures: Parking on a downhill slope Turn the front wheels towards the kerb and move the vehicle forward until the kerb side wheel gently touches the kerb. On vehicles equipped with M/T, apply the parking brake and place the gearshift lever into the “R” (Reverse) position. On vehicles equipped with A/T, apply the parking brake and place the selector lever into the “P” (PARK) position. If necessary, apply chocks to wheels. Parking on a uphill slope Turn the front wheels away from the kerb and move the vehicle back until the kerb side wheel gently touches the kerb. On vehicles equipped with M/T, apply the parking brake and place the gearshift lever into the 1st position. On vehicles equipped with A/T, apply the parking brake and place the selector lever into the “P” (PARK) position. If necessary, apply chocks to wheels. NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with A/T, be sure to apply the parking brake before moving selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position. If you move selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position before applying the parking brake, it may be difficult to disengage selector lever from the “P” (PARK) position when next you drive the vehicle, requiring application of a strong force the selector lever to move from the “P” (PARK) position. NOTE IMPORTANT: NEVER leave the car with the gearbox in neutral or, on versions equipped with A/T, before placing the gear lever in the “P” (PARK) position. WARNING 222) Leaving the engine running risks injury or death from accidentally moving the gearshift lever (with M/T) or the selector lever (with A/T) or the accumulation of toxic exhaust fumes on the passenger compartment. 223) Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always remove the ignition key when leaving the vehicle and take it out with you. 224) Do not park your vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as dry grass or leaves can come in contact with a hot exhaust, since a fire could occur. Parking with the engine running Never leave the engine running while you take a short sleep/rest. Also, never leave the engine running in a closed or poorly ventilated place. When leaving the vehicle Always carry the key and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit area. 222) 223) 224) 149 STARTING AND DRIVING 150 STARTING AND STOPPING THE ENGINE 225) 89) 90) 91) 92) 93) 94) 95) 96) 97) 98) 99) Tips for starting Except for vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system Do not operate the starter motor continuously longer than 10 seconds; doing so could run down the battery. If the engine does not start, turn the ignition switch back to “LOCK”, wait a few seconds, and then try again. Trying repeatedly with the starter motor still turning will damage the starter mechanism. For vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system The operation mode can be in any mode to start the engine. The starter motor will be turning for up to approximately 15 seconds if the engine switch is released at once. Pressing the engine switch again while the starter motor is still turning will stop the starter motor. The starter motor will be turning for up to approximately 30 seconds while the engine switch is pressed. If the engine does not start, wait for a while and then attempt to start the engine again. Trying repeatedly with the starter motor still turning will damage the starter mechanism. Starting the engine Except for vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system 1. Insert the ignition key and fasten the seat belt. 2. Make sure the parking brake is applied. 3. Press and hold the brake pedal down firmly with your right foot. 4. On vehicles equipped with M/T, depress the clutch pedal all the way and place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position. On vehicles equipped with A/T, make sure the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position. 247 AHA106593 5. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” position. The diesel preheat indicator lamp will first illuminate, and then after a short time go out, indicating that preheating is completed. NOTE If the engine is cold, the diesel preheat indicator lamp is on for a longer time. NOTE When the engine has not been started within approximately 5 seconds after the diesel preheat indicator lamp went out, return the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position. Then, turn the switch to the “ON” position to preheat the engine again. NOTE When the engine is warm, the diesel preheat indicator lamp does not come on even if the ignition key is placed in the “ON” position. Start the engine by turning the ignition key right to the “START” position. 6. Turn the ignition key to the “START” position without depressing the accelerator pedal, and release it when the engine starts. NOTE Minor noises may be heard on engine startup. These will disappear as the engine warms up. NOTE Vehicles for specific Countries, when ambient temperature is low even after the engine has been warmed up, and when the gearshift lever is put in the “N” (Neutral) position (M/T) or the selector lever is put in the “P” (PARK) position or “N” (NEUTRAL) position (A/T), the idling speed may increase. It does not indicate a malfunction. For vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system 1. Fasten the seat belt. 2. Make sure the parking brake is applied. 3. Press and hold the brake pedal down firmly with your right foot. NOTE When the engine is not started, it may become hard to depress the brake pedal and the vehicle may not be able to detect the pedal operation. Therefore the engine may not be started. In such a case, depress the brake pedal more firmly than usual. 4. On vehicles equipped with M/T, depress the clutch pedal all the way and place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position. On vehicles equipped with A/T, make sure the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position. 248 AHA106593 5. Press the engine switch. The diesel preheat indicator lamp will first illuminate, and then after a short time go out, indicating that preheating is completed. The engine will start. NOTE If the engine is cold, the diesel preheat indicator lamp is on for a longer time. NOTE Putting the operation mode in ON will also start preheating the engine. When the engine has not been started within approximately 5 seconds after the diesel preheat indicator lamp went out, put the operation mode in OFF. Then, attempt the engine start procedure to preheat the engine again. NOTE Minor noises may be heard on engine startup. These will disappear as the engine warms up. NOTE Vehicles for specific Countries, when ambient temperature is low even after the engine has been warmed up, and when the gearshift lever is put in the “N” (Neutral) position (M/T) or the selector lever is put in the “P” (PARK) position or “N” (NEUTRAL) position (A/T), the idling speed may increase. It does not indicate a malfunction. Stopping the engine Except for vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 2. Fully engage the parking brake while depressing the brake pedal. 3. For vehicles equipped with M/T, turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the engine, and then move the gearshift lever to the 1st (on a uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) position. For vehicles equipped with A/T, place the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position, and stop the engine. For vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system 226) NOTE If you have to bring the engine to an emergency stop while driving, press and hold the engine switch for 3 seconds or more, or press it quickly 3 times or more. The engine will stop and the operation mode will go to ACC. NOTE Do not stop the engine with the selector lever in any position other than the “P” (PARK) position (A/T). If the engine is stopped with the selector lever in any position other than the “P” (PARK) position, the operation mode will go to ACC rather than OFF. Put the operation mode in OFF after placing the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position. 1. Stop the vehicle 2. Fully engage the parking brake while depressing the brake pedal. 3. On vehicles with M/T, press the engine switch to stop the engine, move the gearshift lever to the 1st (on a uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) position. On vehicles with A/T, move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position, press the engine switch to stop the engine. 151 STARTING AND DRIVING Fuel injection amount learning process To keep exhaust emissions and engine noise low, the engine very occasionally performs a learning process for the fuel injection amount. The engine sounds slightly different from usual while the learning process is taking place. The change in the engine sound does not indicate a fault. If the keyless operation key is not operating properly Insert the keyless operation key into the key slot. Starting the engine and changing the operation mode should be now possible. Remove the keyless operation key from the key slot after starting the engine or changing the operation mode. NOTE Remove the object or additional key from the keyless operation key before inserting the key into the key slot. The vehicle may not be able to receive the registered ID code from the registered key. Therefore, the engine may not start and the operation mode may not change. NOTE The keyless operation key is fixed, if the key is inserted in the key slot as illustrated. When pulling out the key, pull out in the state. Keyless operation key reminder* (Where provided) 250 249 AHA103547 NOTE Do not insert into the key slot anything other than the keyless operation key. This could cause damage or a malfunction. 152 AHA103505 If the operation mode is in OFF and the driver’s door is opened with the keyless operation key in the key slot, the warning lamp will blink and the outer buzzer sounds for approximately 3 seconds and the inner buzzer sounds for approximately 1 minute to remind you to remove the key. IMPORTANT 89) In some cases, when the engine switches off, the fan could activate for max. 120 seconds. 90) A quick burst on the accelerator before turning off the engine serves absolutely no practical purpose; it wastes fuel and is especially damaging to turbocharged engines. 91) Never start the engine by pushing, towing or driving downhill. This could cause fuel to flow into the catalytic converter and damage it beyond repair. 92) Remember that the brake servo and power steering are not operational until the engine has been started, so you need to apply much more force than usual to the brake pedal and steering wheel. 93) It is advisable not to demand maximum performance from your vehicle (e.g. excessive acceleration, long distances at high speeds, excessively intense braking, etc.) during the initial period of use. 94) Release the ignition key as soon as the engine starts to avoid damaging the starter motor. 95) Never attempt to start the engine by pushing or pulling the vehicle. 96) Do not run the engine at high speeds or drive the vehicle at high speeds until the engine has had a chance to warm up. 97) If your vehicle is equipped with a turbocharger, do not stop the engine immediately after high-speed or uphill driving. First allow the engine to idle to give the turbocharger a chance to cool down. 98) It is advisable not to demand maximum performance from your vehicle (e.g. excessive acceleration, long distances at high speeds, excessively intense braking, etc.) during the initial period of use. 99) A quick burst on the accelerator before turning off the engine serves absolutely no practical purpose; it wastes fuel and is especially damaging to turbocharged engines. WARNING 225) Never run the engine in a closed or poorly ventilated area any longer than is needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. Carbon monoxide gases are odourless and can be fatal. 226) Do not operate the engine switch while driving except in an emergency. If the engine is stopped while driving, the brake servomechanism will cease to function and braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also, the power steering system will not function and it will require greater manual effort to operate the steering. This could result in a serious accident. TURBOCHARGER OPERATION IMPORTANT (where provided) Turbocharger 100) 101) The turbocharger increases engine power by pushing large amounts of air into the engine’s cylinders. The finned parts inside the turbocharger turn at extremely high speeds and are subjected to extremely high temperatures. They are lubricated and cooled by engine oil. If the engine oil is not replaced at the specified intervals, the bearings may seize or emit abnormal noise. 251 100) Do not run the engine at high speeds (for example, by revving it or by accelerating rapidly) immediately after starting it. 101) Do not stop the engine immediately after high-speed or uphill driving. First allow the engine to idle to give the turbocharger a chance to cool down. AA0020860 1. Air compressor 2. Compressed air 3. Cylinder 4. Turbo fin 5. Turbine 6. Exhaust gas 153 STARTING AND DRIVING START&STOP SYSTEM The Start&Stop system automatically stops and restarts the engine without operating the ignition switch or engine switch when the vehicle is stopped, such as at a traffic light or in a traffic jam, to reduce exhaust gases, increase fuel efficiency. NOTE The accumulated time the engine has been stopped by Start&Stop system is displayed in the multi information display. Refer to “Start&Stop monitor”. 102) Automatically stopping the engine The Start&Stop system is automatically activated when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON. You can deactivate the system by pressing the “Start&Stop OFF” switch. Refer to “To deactivate”. When the Start&Stop system will operate, the indicator lamp will turn on to inform the driver. 252 AHA106317 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. While depressing the brake pedal, fully depress the clutch pedal and place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position. AA0112064 NOTE When the engine is automatically stopped, changes will occur in the driving operations. Pay careful attention to the following. The brake booster becomes inoperative and the pedal effort will increase. If the vehicle is moving, press down the brake pedal harder than usual. 103) 253 AHA106320 3. Release the clutch pedal. The engine will stop automatically. 154 254 NOTE In the following cases, the “Start&Stop” indicator lamp will blink to inform the driver and the engine will not stop automatically. Driver’s seat belt is not fastened Driver’s door is open Bonnet is open NOTE In the following cases, the “Start&Stop” indicator lamp will turn off and the engine will not stop automatically. After the engine restarts automatically, the vehicle speed has not exceeded approximately 5 km/h. After the engine start, approximately 30 seconds or more have not elapsed. After the engine restarts automatically, the vehicle stops again within 10 seconds. Engine coolant temperature is low. Ambient temperature is low. When the heater is operated, vehicle indicator temperature is not still hot enough. Air conditioner is operating and passenger compartment has not sufficiently cooled. Demister switch is pressed. Refer to “Demisting of the windscreen and door windows: for quick demisting”. When the air conditioner is operated in AUTO mode where the temperature control is set to the max. hot or the max. cool (for vehicles with automatic climate air conditioning). When the diesel particulate filter (DPF) automatically burns away trapped particulate matter (PM). Electric power consumption is high, such as when the rear window demister or other electrical components are operating or the blower speed is set to a high setting. Battery voltage or battery performance is low. Check engine warning lamp is illuminated or the indicator lamp is blinking. On 4WD vehicles, the drive mode-selector in “4H” or “4L” (Easy select 4WD), “4HLc” or “4LLc” (Super select 4WD II). NOTE In the following cases, the engine will not stop automatically even if “Start&Stop” indicator lamp turn on. Push the accelerator pedal Brake booster vacuum pressure is low Operate the steering wheel Parking on steep hill NOTE Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving because this will cause detection of clutch pedal switch malfunction and blinking of the Start&Stop OFF indicator, and the Start&Stop system will not operate. NOTE If the Start&Stop system operates while the air conditioner is operating, both the engine and the air conditioning compressor will stop. Therefore, only the blower will operate, the windows may start to fog up. If this occurs, press the demister switch to restart the engine. Refer to “Demister switch”. NOTE If the windows become fogged up each time the engine is stopped, we recommend you to deactivate the Start&Stop system by pressing the “Start&Stop OFF” switch. Refer to “To deactivate”. NOTE If the air conditioner is operating, set the temperature control higher to lengthen the time that the engine is stopped automatically. Automatically restarting the engine Depress the clutch pedal while the gearshift lever is in the “N” (Neutral) position. The indicator lamp turns off and the engine restarts automatically. NOTE Do not move the gearshift lever to a position other than the “N” (Neutral) position or do not release the clutch pedal while the engine is restarting automatically. The starter motor will stop and the engine will not restart automatically. NOTE If the engine does not restart automatically or if the engine stalls, the charge warning lamp and check engine warning lamp will illuminate. If this occurs, the engine will not restart even if the clutch pedal is depressed again. While depressing the brake pedal, fully depress the clutch pedal and turn the ignition switch to the “START” position or press the engine switch to start the engine. For details, refer to “Starting and stopping the engine”. 104) 155 STARTING AND DRIVING NOTE In the following cases, the engine will not restart automatically. While the engine is stopped automatically, “Start&Stop OFF” switch is pressed to deactivate the “Start&Stop ” system. Bonnet is open. NOTE When the engine restarts automatically, decrease in audio volume may temporarily be experienced. This does not indicate a malfunction. NOTE While the engine is stopped automatically, the air volume change of the air conditioner may temporarily be experienced. This does not indicate a malfunction. To deactivate The Start&Stop system is automatically activated when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode put in ON. You can deactivate the system by pressing the “Start&Stop OFF” switch. When the Start&Stop system is deactivated, the indicator will be turned on. To reactivate the Start&Stop system, press the “Start&Stop OFF” switch; the indicator will turn off. 156 IMPORTANT 255 AHA106333 256 AHA106346 NOTE This indicator will also turn on for a few seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode put in ON. If the indicator lamp blinks while driving If the indicator lamp blinks, the Start&Stop system is malfunctioning and will not operate. We recommend you to consult a Fiat Dealership. 102) If the vehicle will be stopped for a long time or if you will leave the vehicle unattended, stop the engine. 103) Observe the following precautions when the engine is stopped automatically. Otherwise, an unexpected accident might occur when the engine restarts automatically: do not depress the accelerator pedal to race the engine while the vehicle is stopped (regardless of whether the engine is running or stopped). Otherwise, an unexpected accident might occur when the engine restarts automatically; when the engine is automatically stopped, do not attempt to exit the vehicle. Because the engine restarts automatically when the driver’s seat belt is unfastened or the driver’s door is opened, an unexpected accident might occur when the vehicle starts moving; do not move the gearshift lever to a position other than the “N” (Neutral) position. If the gearshift lever is moved to a position other than the “N” (Neutral) position, the indicator lamp/indicator display blinks and the buzzer sounds. If the gearshift lever is returned to the “N” (Neutral) position, the indicator lamp stops blinking and the buzzer stops sounding. The engine will not restart if the gearshift lever is in a position other than the “N” (Neutral) position. 104) In the following cases, the engine will restart automatically even if the engine was stopped by the Start&Stop system. Pay careful attention, otherwise an unexpected accident might occur when the engine restarts: vehicle speed is 3 km/h or higher when coasting down a slope; brake booster vacuum pressure is low because the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly or depressed harder than usual; engine coolant temperature is low; when the air conditioner is operated by pressing the air conditioning switch; when the preset temperature of the air conditioner is changed significantly; when the air conditioner is operated in AUTO mode where the temperature control is set to the max. hot or the max. cool (for vehicles with automatic climate air conditioning); when the air conditioner is ON, the passenger compartment temperature rises and the air conditioning compressor operates to lower the temperature; demister switch is pressed. Refer to “For quick demisting”; electric power consumption is high, such as when the rear window demister or other electrical components are operating or the blower speed is set to a high setting; battery voltage or battery performance is low; operate the steering wheel; driver’s seat belt is unfastened; driver’s door is opened. MANUAL TRANSMISSION The shift pattern is shown on the gearshift lever knob. To start off, depress the clutch pedal all the way down and shift into 1st or “R” (Reverse) position. Then gradually release the clutch pedal while depressing the accelerator pedal. 227) 105) 106) 107) 108) 109) During cold weather, shifting may be difficult until the transmission lubricant has warmed up. This is normal and not harmful to the transmission. 257 AHZ101144 Moving the gearshift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position Depress and hold the gearshift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position. If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the clutch pedal again; the shift will then be easier to make. In case of hot weather condition or long time cruising with high speed, a speed limitation function may work to restrict the oil temperature rising of the manual transmission. After the oil temperature drops to the appropriate level, the speed limitation function is cancelled. The gearshift indicator shows recommended gearshift points for fuel-efficient driving. It shows a when an upshift is recommended. 258 AHA104339 110) Possible driving speed Avoid shifting down at high speed, as this may cause excessive engine speed (the tachometer needle into the red zone) and damage the engine. 157 STARTING AND DRIVING 2WD models Vehicles with Super select 4WD II Shift point Speed limit Speed limit 1st gear 30 km/h Shift point 2H, 4H 4L 30 km/h 10 km/h 2nd gear 60 km/h 1st gear 3rd gear 100 km/h 2nd gear 60 km/h 25 km/h 4th gear 140 km/h 3rd gear 100 km/h 40 km/h 5th gear 185 km/h 4th gear 145 km/h 55 km/h 6th gear 220 km/h 5th gear 190 km/h 70 km/h Vehicles with 6 M/T, use 6th gear whenever vehicle speed allows, for maximum fuel economy. 6th gear 225 km/h 85 km/h 4WD models Vehicles with Easy select 4WD Use 6th gear whenever vehicle speed allows, for maximum fuel economy. WARNING Speed limit Shift point 158 2H, 4H 4L 1st gear 30 km/h 10 km/h 2nd gear 60 km/h 20 km/h 3rd gear 100 km/h 35 km/h 4th gear 140 km/h 55 km/h 5th gear 185 km/h 70 km/h 6th gear 220 km/h 85 km/h 227) Depress the clutch pedal fully to change gear correctly. It is therefore essential that there is nothing under the pedals: make sure the mats are lying flat and do not get in the way of the pedals. IMPORTANT 105) Do not put the gearshift lever into the reverse position while the vehicle is moving forward. Doing so could damage the transmission. 106) Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving as this will cause premature clutch wear or damage. 107) Do not coast in the “N” (Neutral) position. 108) Do not use the gearshift lever as a hand rest, because this can result in premature wear of the transmission shift forks. 109) Quick or slight clutch engagement made while the engine is running at high speed will cause damage to the clutch and transmission because the tractive force is very great. 110) Do not depress the gearshift lever when moving it to any position other than the “R” (Reverse) position. If you always depress the gearshift lever when moving it, you could unintentionally move the gearshift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position and cause an accident and/or a transmission fault. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SPORTS MODE 5A/T LHD: Left Hand Drive NOTE To avoid erroneous operation, move the selector lever firmly into each position and briefly hold it there. Always check the position shown by the selector lever position display after moving the selector lever. (where provided) During running-in period or immediately after reconnection of the battery cable, there may be a case where gear shifts are not made smoothly. This does not indicate a faulty transmission. Gear shifts will become smooth after the transmission has been shifted several times by the electronic control system. Selector lever operation The transmission has 5 forward gears and 1 reverse gear. The individual gears are selected automatically, depending on the speed of the vehicle and the position of the accelerator pedal. The selector lever (A) has 2 gates; the main gate (B) and the manual gate (C). NOTE If the brake pedal is not depressed and held, the shift-lock device activates to prevent the selector lever from being moved from the “P” (PARK) position. 260 AHA103550 RHD: Right Hand Drive 261 AH3100450 When the selector lever cannot be shifted from the “P” (PARK) position When the selector lever cannot be shifted from the “P” (PARK) position to another position while the brake pedal is pressed and held down with the ignition switch at the “ON” position or the operation mode in ON, the battery may be flat or the shift-lock mechanism may be malfunctioning. Immediately have your vehicle checked by a Fiat Dealership. If you need to move the vehicle, shift the selector lever as follows. 111) While depressing the brake pedal, move the selector lever through the gate. 259 Move the selector lever through the gate. AHA106030 159 STARTING AND DRIVING For LHD vehicles 1. Make sure the parking brake is fully applied. 2. Stop the engine if it is running. 3. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver with a cloth over its tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Pry gently as shown to remove the cover. 263 262 AHA106304 4. Depress the brake pedal. 5. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver in the shift-lock release hole (B). Shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while pressing the straight blade (or minus) screwdriver down. AHA106043 For RHD vehicles 1. Make sure the parking brake is fully applied. 2. Stop the engine if it is running. 3. Depress the brake pedal with the right foot 4. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver in the shift-lock release hole (A). Shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while pressing the straight blade (or minus) screwdriver down. 264 Selector lever position display When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, the position of the selector lever is indicated in the multi information display. 265 160 AHA103589 AHA103592 Selector lever positions “P” PARK This position locks the transmission to prevent the vehicle from moving. The engine can be started in this position. “R” REVERSE This position is to back up. 112) “N” NEUTRAL At this position the transmission is disengaged. It is the same as the neutral position on a manual transmission, and should only be used when the vehicle is stationary for an extended length of time during driving, such as in a traffic jam. 113) 114) 115) “D” DRIVE This position is used for most city and highway driving. The transmission will automatically change its gear depending on road and driving conditions. 116) Sport mode Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, sports mode is selected by gently pushing the selector lever from the “D” (DRIVE) position into the manual gate (A). To return to “D” range operation, gently push the selector lever back into the main gate (B). In sports mode, gear shifts can be made rapidly simply by moving the selector lever backward and forward. For vehicles equipped with the shift paddles, shift paddles at the steering wheel can also be used to perform gearshift. In contrast to a manual transmission, the sports mode allows gear shifts with the accelerator pedal depressed. NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with the shift paddles, you can shift into sports mode with shift paddles when the selector lever is in the main gate as well. Also, you can return to the “D” range operation in any of following ways. When returning to “D” range operation, the selector lever position display will change to “D” (DRIVE) position. Pull the + (SHIFT UP) side shift paddle forward (toward the driver) for over 2 seconds. Stop the vehicle. Push the selector lever from the “D” (DRIVE) position into the manual gate (A) and push the selector lever back into the main gate (B). 266 AHA106056 + Shift up The transmission shifts up by one gear with each operation. — Shift down The transmission shifts down by one gear with each operation. 117) 118) 119) NOTE Only the 5 forward gears can be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the selector lever to the “R” (REVERSE) or “P” (PARK) position as required. NOTE To maintain good running performance, the transmission may refuse to perform an upshift when the selector lever or the shift paddles is moved to the “+ (SHIFT UP)” position at certain vehicle speeds. Also, to prevent over-revving of the engine, the transmission may refuse to perform a downshift when the selector lever or the shift paddles is moved to the “— (SHIFT DOWN)” position at certain 161 STARTING AND DRIVING vehicle speeds. When this happens, a buzzer sounds to indicate that a downshift is not going to take place. NOTE Downward shifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected. NOTE When driving away on a slippery road, push the selector lever forward into the “+ (SHIFT UP)” position. This cause the transmission to shift into the 2nd gear which is better for smooth driving away on a slippery road. Push the selector lever to the “— (SHIFT DOWN)” side to shift back to the 1st gear. NOTE If the A/T fluid temperature is high, the protection function operates. In this case, the transmission may refuse to perform an upshift when the selector lever or the shift paddles are operated to the “+ (SHIFT UP)” position in sports mode, or it may automatically downshift. Sports mode indicator In sports mode, the currently selected position is indicated by the indicator (A) shown on the instrument panel. NOTE “A” indicator does blink only the condition that the A/T positional switch is broken. It does not indicate in normal driving condition. 120) 267 AHA103619 When a malfunction occurs in the automatic transmission When the selector lever position display blinks When the selector lever position display blinks while you are driving, there could be a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. When the A/T (automatic transmission) fluid temperature warning lamp comes on The automatic transmission fluid temperature warning lamp comes on and a buzzer may sound, when the automatic transmission fluid temperature becomes abnormally high. Normally the warning lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, or the operation mode is put in ON and then will go off after a few seconds. 269 268 162 AH3100245 AHA103622 121) Operation of the A/T 122) 123) 124) 125) 126) 127) Passing acceleration To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) position, push the accelerator to the floor. The A/T will automatically downshift. In sports mode, downshifts do not take place when the accelerator is depressed all the way to the floor. Waiting For short waiting periods, such as at traffic signals the vehicle can be left in gear and held stationary with the service brake. For longer waiting periods with the engine running, place the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking brake, while holding the vehicle stationary with the service brake. 128) Parking To park the vehicle, first bring it to a complete stop, fully engage the parking brake, and then move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position. If you are going to leave the vehicle unattended, always switch off the engine and carry the key. On a slope, be sure to apply the parking brake before moving the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position. If you move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position before applying the parking brake, it may be difficult to disengage the selector lever from the “P” (PARK) position when next you drive the vehicle, requiring application of a strong force to the selector lever to move from the “P” (PARK) position. When the A/T makes no speed change If the transmission does not change speeds while driving, or your vehicle does not pick up enough speed when starting on an uphill slope, it may be that there is something unusual happening in the transmission, causing a safety device to activate. Immediately have your vehicle checked by a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. 1. If your vehicle has difficulty moving uphill, shift the selector lever into 2nd gear of the sports mode. This method might not work depending on the transmission malfunction. 2. Once the vehicle is moving on a level road, move the selector lever back to “D” (DRIVE). When the selector lever position display in the instrument panel blinks, it means that there is an abnormal condition in the transmission. Refer to “When the selector lever position display blinks”. IMPORTANT 111) Always depress the brake pedal when shifting the selector lever into a gear from the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position. Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while shifting the selector lever from the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position. 112) Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in motion to avoid a transmission damage. 113) Never move the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while driving. A serious accident could occur since you could accidentally move the lever into the “P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position or you will lose engine braking. 114) On a gradient, the engine should be started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position. 115) To prevent rolling, always keep your foot on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in “N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shifting into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) position. 116) To prevent transmission damage, never shift into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R” (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in motion. 117) In sports mode, the driver must execute upward shifts in accordance with prevailing road conditions, taking care to keep the engine speed below the red zone. 118) Repeated continuous operation of the selector lever or the shift paddles will continuously switch shift position. 163 STARTING AND DRIVING 164 119) For vehicles equipped with the shift paddles, do not use the left- and right-hand shift paddles at the same time. Doing so could cause a shift of gear ratio that you do not expect. 120) If the selector lever position display blinks while you are driving, it is likely that a safety device is operating because of a malfunction in the automatic transmission. Have the vehicle inspected by a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. 121) If the lamp comes on, reduce the engine speed and stop the vehicle in a safe area. Then set the selector lever to “P” (PARK) position and idle the engine until the warning lamp goes off. When the warning lamp goes off, resume normal driving. If the warning lamp does not go off, we recommend you to have your vehicle inspected by a Fiat Dealership. 122) Before selecting a gear with the engine running and the vehicle stationary, fully depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping. The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the gear is engaged, especially when the engine speed is high, at fast idle or with the air conditioner operating, the brakes should only be released when you are ready to drive away. 123) Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at all times. Using the left foot could cause driver movement delay in case of an emergency. 124) To prevent sudden acceleration, never race the engine when shifting from the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position. 125) Operating the accelerator pedal while the other foot is resting on the brake pedal will affect braking efficiency and may cause premature wear of brake pads. 126) Use the selector lever in the correct shift position in accordance with driving conditions. Never coast downhill backward with the selector lever in the {“D” (DRIVE) or sports mode} or coast forward with the selector lever in the “R” (REVERSE) position. The engine may stop and the unexpected increase in brake pedal effort and steering wheel weight could lead to an accident. 127) Do not race the engine with brake pedal pressed when the vehicle is stationary. This can damage the A/T. Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal while holding down the brake pedal with the selector lever in the “P” (PARK), “N” (NEUTRAL) or “D” (DRIVE) position, the engine revolutions may not rise as high as when performing the same operation with the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position. 128) Never hold the vehicle stationary on a hill using the accelerator pedal (without using the brake pedal). Always apply the parking brake and/or service brakes. EASY SELECT 4WD (where provided) Shifting to rear-wheel drive or 4-wheel drive can be made by operating the drive mode selector (A). Set the drive mode-selector to an appropriate position according to the road surface conditions. In addition, the 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp and the low-range indicator lamp indicates the drive mode-selector setting state. Refer to “2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp and low-range indicator lamp”. 270 AHA103635 Drive mode-selector position and 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp Drive mode selector position 2H 4H 4L Indicator lamp Driving conditions Rearwheel drive When driving on dry paved road. 4-wheel drive When driving on rough, sand or snow covered roads. Low range 4wheel drive When driving up or down steep hills, on rough or muddy roads (especially when increased torque is required). and Drive mode-selector operation The drive mode is shown on the drive mode selector. 271 AHA106131 Turn the drive mode-selector. Turn the drive mode-selector while holding it down. The drive mode-selector should be positioned in accordance with the following operating conditions: Illuminate Remain off 129) 130) 165 STARTING AND DRIVING Procedure To shift from To 2H 4H 4H 2H 4H 4L 4L 4H Vehicles with manual transmission Vehicles with automatic transmission The drive mode-selector can be operated while the vehicle is either moving or stationary. When the vehicle is not in motion, shift the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position before operating the drive mode-selector. When the vehicle is moving, and only while it can be steered straight ahead, release the accelerator pedal before operating the drive mode-selector. The drive mode-selector can be operated while the vehicle is either moving or stationary. When the vehicle is not in motion, shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position before operating the drive mode-selector. When the vehicle is moving, and only while it can be steered straight ahead, shift the selector lever to the “D” (DRIVE) position, and release the accelerator pedal before operating the drive mode-selector. Stop the vehicle, depress the clutch pedal to the floor and operate the drive mode-selector. Keep depressing the clutch pedal while 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp continues to blink. Stop the vehicle, shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, and operate the drive mode-selector. If operation is made with the selector lever placed in any other position than “N” (NEUTRAL) position, a gear noise may be generated, with a possible failure to shift into a proper gear. Shifting of setting of the drive mode-selector between “2H” and “4H” should only be done at speeds below 100 km/h. During driving, never attempt to shift from “4H” to “4L”. When shifting from “2H” to “4H” in cold weather while the vehicle is in motion, the transfer gear may make some noise. In cold weather, try to shift the gear while the vehicle is stopped. When shifting between “4H” and “4L”, the transfer gear may make some noise. When the drive mode-selector is set between “2H” and “4H” while the vehicle is stopped, the 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp blinks while the selection is in process. Drive slowly and normally after confirming that the lamp is illuminated. Refer to “2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp and low-range indicator lamp”. When the drive mode-selector is set between “2H” and “4H” while the cruise control is activated, the transfer gear may make some noise. When the drive mode-selector is set between“4H” and “4L” in cold weather, its selection may not complete. Return the drive mode-selector to its previous position. After the engine is warmed up, make the range selection again. 131) 166 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp and low-range indicator lamp “2H” <-> “4H” Selector position Indicator lamp Keep the steering wheel in the straight ahead position while making range selections. If you attempt to drive forward with the steering wheel turned, gear rattling or shock may occur and the desired range may not actually be selected. 2H 272 AHA103651 When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, the 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp (A) and the low-range indicator lamp (B) shows the shifting condition. The 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp comes on at each drive mode selector position as follows: When the drive mode selector is set between 2H <–> 4H, the 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp blinks while the selection is in process. Take the following precautions when the indicator lamp is blinking. Drive mode switching in progress When the drive mode-selector is set between “2H” <–> “4H” while the vehicle is stopped, the 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp blinks while the selection is in process. Drive slowly and normally after confirming that the lamp is switched. 4H — Blink — Illuminate — Remain off If the 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp continues blinking after a “2H” <–> “4H” selection has been made with the vehicle moving, hold the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and slowly depress the accelerator pedal several times. 167 STARTING AND DRIVING “4H” <-> “4L” Selector position Indicator lamp 4H Drive mode switching in progress and and and 4L — Blink — Illuminate — Remain off The 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp will blink during shifting process from “4H” to “4L” or vice versa, as the transfer passes through the neutral position. Be sure to operate the drive mode-selector until the 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp illuminates again. When parking, apply the parking brake before stopping the engine and make sure that the 2WD/4WD operation indicator and the low range lamp are not blinking during shifting process between “4H” <–> “4L”. Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpectedly move even if the automatic transmission is in the “P” (PARK) position. If, after a “4H” <–> “4L” selection has been made, the 2WD/4WD operation indicator continues blinking and the desired range is not actually selected, return the drive mode selector to its previous position. Place the steering wheel in the straight ahead position, drive the vehicle forward, and release the accelerator pedal. Next, hold down the clutch pedal (with manual transmission) or place the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position (with automatic transmission) and make the range selection again. If the low range lamp blinks when you attempt to make a “4H” <–> “4L” selection, a “4H” <–> “4L” selection cannot be made. Stop the vehicle and 168 release the accelerator pedal. Next, hold down the clutch pedal (with manual transmission) or place the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position (with automatic transmission) and make the range selection again. The ESC function is suspended while “4L” is selected indicator lamp is illuminated while these functions are suspended. It does not indicate a problem. When “2H” or “4H” is selected, this lamp goes out and function again. Refer to “ESC indicator lamp, ESC OFF indicator lamp”. 132) IMPORTANT 129) The “4L” range gives maximum torque for low-speed driving on steep slopes, as well as sandy, muddy, and other difficult surfaces. On vehicles with automatic transmission, do not exceed speeds of approximately 70 km/h in “4L” range. 130) Do not drive your vehicle in the “4H” or “4L” on dry paved roads and highways. Doing so may result in excessive tyre wear, increased fuel consumption, and possible noise generation. It may also increase the differential oil temperature, which may damage the drive system. Further, the drive train will be subjected to excessive loading, resulting in oil leakage, component seizure, or other serious problems. On dry paved roads and highways, drive the vehicle in “2H” only. 131) Do not operate the drive mode-selector while the rear wheels of the vehicle are slipping on snow or ice. 132) If a problem is detected in the transfer system, a safety device will activate. The 2WD/4WD operation indicator blinks (twice per second), and transfer shifting will become impossible. Park your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine for a few moments. Restart the engine. The lamp should resume normal operation. If the lamp continue to blink, have the vehicle checked by a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. SUPER SELECT 4WD II (where provided) Shifting to rear-wheel drive or 4-wheel drive can be made by operating the drive mode-selector (A). Set the drive mode-selector to an appropriate position according to the road surface conditions. In addition, the 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp and low-range indicator lamp indicates the drive mode-selector setting state. Refer to “2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp and low-range indicator lamp”. 273 AHA103635 Drive mode-selector position and 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp Selector position Indicator lamp 2H Rear wheel drive Driving conditions When driving on dry paved road Fulltime 4wheel drive The basic position for Super select 4WD II. When driving on dry paved or slippery roads. 4HLc Centre differential lock engaged 4-wheel drive When driving on rough, sand or snow covered roads. 4H 4LLc Low range centre differential lock engaged 4-wheel drive and When driving up or down steep hills, on rough or muddy roads (especially when increased torque is required). — Illuminate — Remain off 133) 134) 169 STARTING AND DRIVING Drive mode-selector operation The drive mode is shown on the drive mode selector knob. 274 AHA103648 Turn the drive mode-selector Turn the drive mode-selector while holding it down The drive mode-selector should be positioned in accordance with the following operating conditions: 170 To shift from To 2H 4H 4H 2H or 4HLc 4HLc 4H 4HLc 4LLc 4LLc 4HLc To shift from Procedure for vehicles with Manual Transmission The drive mode-selector can be operated while the vehicle is either moving or stationary. When the vehicle is not in motion, shift the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position before operating the drive mode-selector. When the vehicle is moving, and only while it can be steered straight ahead, release the accelerator pedal before operating the drive mode-selector. Stop the vehicle, depress the clutch pedal to the floor and operate the drive mode-selector. Keep depressing the clutch pedal while the 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp continues to blink. To 2H 4H 4H 2H or 4HLc 4HLc 4H 4HLc 4LLc 4LLc 4HLc Procedure for vehicles with Automatic Transmission The drive mode-selector can be operated while the vehicle is either moving or stationary. When the vehicle is not in motion, shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position before operating the drive mode-selector. When the vehicle is moving, and only while it can be steered straight ahead, shift the selector lever to the “D” (DRIVE) position, and release the accelerator pedal before operating the drive mode-selector. Stop the vehicle, shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, and operate the drive mode-selector. If operation is made with the selector lever placed in any other position than “N” (NEUTRAL) position, a gear noise may be generated, with a possible failure to shift into a proper gear Setting of the drive mode-selector between “2H”, “4H” and “4HLc” should only be done at speeds below 100 km/h. During driving, never attempt to shift from “4HLc” to “4LLc”. When shifting between “2H”, “4H” and “4HLc” in cold weather while the vehicle is in motion, the transfer gear may make some noise. In cold weather, try to shift the gear while the vehicle is stopped. When shifting between “4LLc” and “4HLc”, the transfer gear may make some noise. When the drive mode-selector is set between “2H”, “4H” and “4HLc” while the vehicle is stopped, the 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp blinks while the selection is in process. Drive slowly and normally after confirming that the lamp is illuminated. (Refer to “2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp and low-range indicator lamp”). When the drive mode-selector is set between “2H”, “4H” and “4HLc” while the cruise control is activated, the transfer gear may make some noise. When the drive mode-selector is set between “4HLc” and “4LLc” in cold weather, its selection may not complete. Return the drive mode-selector to its previous position. After the engine is warmed up, make the range selection again. 135) 171 STARTING AND DRIVING 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp and low-range indicator lamp Switching between 2H and 4H Drive mode-selector position Drive mode selector position 2H 4H 275 AHA104951 A. Front wheel lamp B. Centre differential lock lamp C. Rear wheel lamp D. Low-range indicator lamp When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, the 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp and the low-range indicator lamp shows the shifting condition. The 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp comes on at each drive mode-selector position as follows: Drive mode switching in progress Drive mode switching in progress 4H 4HL Blink Illuminate Remain off 172 Indicator lamp Switching between 4H and 4HLc Blink Illuminate Remain off Indicator lamp Switching between 4HL and 4LLc Drive mode selector position Illuminate Remain off Indicator lamp 4HLc Drive mode switching in progress and 4LLc Blink and and NOTE When the drive mode-selector is set between “2H”, “4H” and “4HLc”, the front wheel and/or centre differential lock lamps blink while the selection is in process. Take the following precautions when the indicator lamp is blinking. Keep the steering wheel in the straight ahead position while making range selections. If you attempt to drive forward with the steering wheel turned, gear rattling or shock may occur and the desired range may not actually be selected. When the drive mode-selector is set between “2H”, “4H” and “4HLc”, while the vehicle is stopped, the front wheel and/or centre differential lock lamps blink while the selection is in process. Drive slowly and normally after confirming that the lamp is switched. If the front wheel and/or centre differential lock lamps blinking after a “2H” <-> “4H” <-> “4HLc” selection has been made with the vehicle moving, hold the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and slowly depress the accelerator pedal several times. NOTE The front and the rear wheel lamps will blink during shifting process from “4HLc” to “4LLc” or vice versa, as the transfer passes through the neutral position. Be sure to operate the drive mode-selector until the front and the rear wheel lamps illuminate again. NOTE When parking, apply the parking brake before stopping the engine and make sure that the front and the rear wheel lamps and the low range lamp are not blinking during shifting process between “4HLc” <-> “4LLc”. Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpectedly move even if the automatic transmission is in the “P” (PARK) position NOTE If, after a “4HLc” <-> “4LLc” selection has been made, front and the rear wheel lamps continue blinking and the desired range is not actually selected, return the drive modeselector to its previous position. Place the steering wheel in the straight ahead position, drive the vehicle forward, and release the accelerator pedal. Next, hold down the clutch pedal (with manual transmission) or place the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position (with automatic transmission) and make the range selection again. 173 STARTING AND DRIVING NOTE If the low range lamp blinks when you attempt to make a “4HLc” <-> “4LLc” selection, a “4HLc” <-> “4LLc” selection cannot be made. Stop the vehicle and release the accelerator pedal. Next, hold down the clutch pedal (with manual transmission) or place the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position (with automatic transmission) and make the range selection again. NOTE The ESC function is suspended while “4LLc” is selected indicator lamp is illuminated while these functions are suspended. It does not indicate a problem. When “2H” or “4H” or “4HLc” is selected, this lamp goes out and function again. Refer to “ESC indicator lamp, ESC OFF indicator lamp”. 136) 276 174 AHZ101128 IMPORTANT REAR DIFFERENTIAL LOCK (where provided) 133) The “4LLc” range gives maximum torque for low-speed driving on steep slopes, as well as sandy, muddy, and other difficult surfaces. On vehicles with automatic transmission, do not exceed speeds of approximately 70 km/h in “4LLc” range. 134) Do not drive your vehicle in the “4HLc” or “4LLc” position on dry paved roads and highways. Doing so may result in excessive tyre wear, increased fuel consumption, and possible noise generation. It may also increase the differential oil temperature, which may damage the drive system. Further, the drive train will be subjected to excessive loading, resulting in oil leakage, component seizure, or other serious problems. On dry paved roads and highways, drive the vehicle in “2H” or “4H” only. 135) Do not operate the drive mode-selector while the rear wheels of the vehicle are slipping on snow or ice. 136) If a problem is detected in the transfer system, a safety device will activate. The front and rear wheel lamps will go out, the centre differential lock lamp will blink rapidly (twice per second), and transfer shifting will become impossible fig. 276. Park your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine for a few moments. Restart the engine. The lamp should resume normal operation. If the lamps continue to blink, have the vehicle checked by a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. If one wheel starts to spin freely and the vehicle becomes stuck and cannot be freed even using 4-wheel drive, the rear differential lock switch (A) can be used to activate the rear differential lock for extra traction. 277 AHA106069 Operating the rear differential lock 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 2. Move the drive mode-selector to “4L” or “4H” position (Easy select 4WD), “4LLc” or “4HLc” position (Super select 4WD II). 3. To activate the rear differential lock, press the rear differential lock switch (A). 4. To deactivate the rear differential lock, press the rear differential lock switch (B). Operation state of rear differential lock Rear differential lock indicator lamp Easy select 4WD Super select 4WD II Rear differential lock deactivated 278 AHA106072 279 AHA104980 Switching in progress 137) The rear differential lock does not operate when the drive mode-selector is in “2H” position (Easy select 4WD), “2H” or “4H” position (Super select 4WD II). When the rear differential is locked with the drive mode-selector in “4L” or “4H” position (Easy select 4WD), “4LLc” or “4HLc” position (Super select 4WD II) changing the drive mode-selector to “2H” position (Easy select 4WD), “2H” or “4H” position (Super select 4WD II) makes the rear differential unlock automatically. Rear differential lock activated 280 AHA104993 The 2WD/4WD operation indicator lamp also illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the Rear differential lock indicator lamp “ON” position or the operation mode is When the ignition switch is turned to put in ON. Refer to “2WD/4WD the “ON” position or the operation operation indicator lamp”. The status of mode is put in ON, the rear differential the rear differential lock (resulting from lock indicator lamp (A) in the meter depression of the rear differential lock cluster illuminates for a few seconds switch) is shown by blinking or steady then indicates the rear differential lock’s illumination of the rear differential lock operating status (activated or deactivated). indicator lamp. Blink Illuminate Remain off The indicator lamp blinks while the rear differential lock is being switched between its activated and deactivated conditions. When the switching operation is complete, the indicator lamp is either illuminated steadily or not illuminated. 175 STARTING AND DRIVING The ESC and ABS functions are suspended while the rear differential lock is activated. ESC indicator lamp, ESC OFF indicator lamp and ABS warning lamp are illuminated while these functions are suspended. It does not indicate a problem. When the rear differential lock is disengaged, these lamps go out and function again. Refer to “ABS warning lamp”, “ESC indicator lamp, ESC OFF indicator lamp”. If the vehicle speed is 12 km/h or lower, turn the steering wheel from side to side until the indicator lamp illuminates steadily. If the vehicle is stuck in soft ground, make sure the area around the vehicle is clear then repeatedly attempt to drive forward and backward. The indicator lamp will illuminate steadily and the rear differential lock will be activated. If the indicator lamp continues blinking after the switch has been pressed to deactivate the rear differential lock, hold the steering wheel in the straight ahead position then slowly depress and release the accelerator pedal several times. Examples of effective use of the rear differential lock When driving on rocky roads When the vehicle is unable to move because one of the wheels is suspended in the air. 138) 139) When one of the wheels has fallen in a ditch 282 When getting out of snow When the vehicle is unable to get going because one of the wheels is on the snow and the other on a paved road. If the indicator lamp continues blinking after the switch has been pressed to activate the rear differential lock, bear in mind the following instructions: If the vehicle speed is 12 km/h or higher, decelerate to a speed of 2.5 km/h or lower. The indicator lamp will illuminate steadily and the rear differential lock will be activated. 281 AHA105206 283 176 AHA105219 AHA105222 Examples of incorrect use of the rear differential lock 228) 286 284 AHA105235 AHA105251 230) If the rear differential lock is used by mistake except when making an emergency escape on snow or frozen road: It becomes difficult to make a steady turn. 231) In the case where the condition of the road is different for the right tyre to drive from the left tyre (such as one tyre on a paved road and the other on ice), direction of the vehicle may change abruptly when engine braking or accelerating. Do not use the rear differential lock except when making an emergency escape on a snow or frozen road, but drive with 4WD. WARNING IMPORTANT 229) 285 AHA105248 230) 231) 228) If the “4L” or “4H” position (Easy select 4WD), “4LLc” or “4HLc” position (Super select 4WD II) is selected along with the rear differential lock, the following phenomena appear and it is very dangerous. Please be sure to release the rear differential lock on normal roads. If the rear differential lock is used by mistake when driving on a paved road: With the rear differential lock on, the power to drive the vehicle straight ahead becomes very strong, which may make it difficult to turn the steering wheel. 229) If the rear differential lock is used by mistake when turning a curve or making a right or left turn at a crossing or the like: The vehicle is unable to make a turn and may go straight ahead. 137) Operate the rear differential switch after the wheels are stopped. Operating the switch with the wheels turning may cause the vehicle to dart in unexpected directions. 138) If a problem is detected in the rear differential lock system, a safety device will activate. The rear differential lock indicator lamp will blink rapidly (twice per second), and the rear differential lock will deactivate. Park your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine for a few moments. Restart the engine. It is safe to continue driving if the lamps resume normal operation. If the rear differential lock indicator lamp blinks when the rear differential lock is reactivated, have the vehicle checked by a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. 177 STARTING AND DRIVING 178 139) Use the rear differential lock only as an emergency measure when the vehicle is stuck and cannot be freed with the drive mode-selector in “4L” or “4H” position (Easy select 4WD) or in “4LLc” or “4HLc” position (Super select 4WD II). Deactivate the rear differential lock immediately after using it. 4 WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION By selecting 4-wheel drive, both axles of the vehicle are rigidly connected with each other. This improves the traction characteristics. When turning sharp corners or moving forward and backward repeatedly, however, the drive line is stressed, which is felt as a braking effect. A 4-wheel drive vehicle can accelerate more quickly and smoothly. However, note that the braking distance is not shorter than that of a rear-wheel drive vehicle. When using 4-wheel drive on rough roads (snow, mud, sand, etc.), it is important to operate the vehicle correctly. NOTE The driving posture should be more upright and closer to the wheel than usual; adjust the seat to a good position for easy steering and pedal operation. Be sure to wear the seat belt. NOTE After driving on rough roads, check each part of the vehicle and wash it thoroughly with water. Refer to “Vehicle care” and “Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation”. Driving on dry paved road and highway Select “2H” position (Easy select 4WD), “2H” or “4H” position (Super select 4WD II) to drive on the dry paved road. Especially on dry highway, never select the “4H” or “4L” position (Easy select 4WD), “4HLc” or “4LLc” position (Super select 4WD II). 140) Driving on snowy or icy roads Set the drive mode-selector to “4H” position (Easy select 4WD), “4H” or “4HLc” position in accordance with the road conditions (Super select 4WD II) and then gradually depress the accelerator pedal for a smooth start. Keep the pressure on the accelerator pedal as constant as possible, and drive at low speed. NOTE The use of snow tyres and/or tyre chains is recommended. NOTE Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, avoid sudden braking, and use engine braking (downshifting). 141) Driving on sandy or muddy roads Set the drive mode-selector to “4H” or “4L” position (Easy select 4WD), “4HLc” or “4LLc” position (Super select 4WD II) and then gradually depress the accelerator pedal for a smooth start. Keep the pressure on the accelerator pedal as constant as possible, and drive at low speed. 142) 143) 232) NOTE Avoid sudden braking, acceleration, and turning; such operations could result in the vehicle becoming stuck. NOTE If the vehicle becomes stuck in sandy or muddy roads, it can often be moved a rocking motion. Move the selector lever rhythmically between the “D” (DRIVE) and “R” (REVERSE) position (with manual transmission, between 1st and Reverse), while applying slight pressure to the accelerator pedal. NOTE It is recommended to start the vehicle with parking brake partially, but not completely, applied by slightly pulling the parking brake lever. After the vehicle has become free, do not forget to release the parking brake. NOTE If it is necessary to drive in extremely muddy conditions, the use of tyre chains is recommended. Because the extent of muddy conditions is difficult to judge and the vehicle could become bogged down very deeply, operation should be at a low speed. If possible, get out of the vehicle and check the conditions ahead before proceeding. NOTE Driving over roads in coastal areas or roads on which anti-skid preparations have been spread can cause rust on the vehicle; wash the vehicle thoroughly as soon as possible after such use. Climbing sharp grades Set the drive mode-selector to “4L” position (Easy select 4WD), “4LLc” position (Super select 4WD II) to maximize the engine torque. 233) 234) NOTE Choose as smooth a slope as possible with few stones or other obstacles. NOTE Before attempting to drive up the slope, walk up it to confirm that the vehicle can handle the grade. Descending sharp grades Set the drive mode-selector to “4L” position (Easy select 4WD), “4LLc” position (Super select 4WD II), use the engine brake (downshifting) and descend slowly. 235) NOTE When descending a sharp grade, if the brakes are applied suddenly because of an obstacle encountered, control of the vehicle could be lost. Before descending the slope, walk down it and confirm the path. NOTE Before descending a grade, it is necessary to choose the appropriate gear. Avoid changing gears or depressing the clutch while descending the grade. NOTE Fiat is not responsible to the operator for any damage or injury caused or liability incurred by the improper and negligent operation of a vehicle. All techniques of vehicle operation described herein depend on the skill and experience of the operator and other participating parties and any deviation from the recommended operation instructions above is at their own risk. Turning sharp corners When turning a sharp corner in “4H” or “4L” position (Easy select 4WD), “4HLc” or “4LLc” position (Super select 4WD II) at low speed, a slight difference in steering may be experienced similar to as if the brakes were applied. This is called tight corner braking and results from each of the 4 tyres being at a different distance from the corner. Crossing a stream 4-wheel drive vehicles are not necessarily waterproof. If the electrical circuits become wet, further operation of the vehicle will be impossible; therefore, avoid crossing streams unless absolutely necessary. If crossing a stream is unavoidable, use the following procedure: Check depths of a stream and 179 STARTING AND DRIVING 180 geographical features before attempting to cross a stream and ford the stream where the water is as shallow as practicable.Set the drive mode-selector to “4L” position (Easy select 4WD), “4LLc” position (Super select 4WD II).Drive slowly at a speed of approximately 5 km/h to avoid splashing too much water. 144) 145) Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation After operating the vehicle in rough road conditions, be sure to perform the following inspection and maintenance procedures: Check that the vehicle has not been damaged by rocks, gravel, etc. Carefully wash the vehicle with water. Drive the vehicle slowly while lightly depressing the brake pedal in order to dry out the brakes. If the brakes still do not function properly, contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible to have the brakes checked. Remove the insects, dried grass, etc. clogging the radiator core and the A/T oil cooler. After crossing a stream, be sure to have the following items inspected at a Fiat Dealership and take the necessary measures: Check the brake system and, if necessary, have it serviced. Check the engine, transmission, transfer, and differential oil or grease level and turbidity. If the oil or grease is milky, it indicates water contamination. Replace it with new oil or grease. Grease the propeller shaft. Check the inside of the vehicle. If ingress of water is found, dry the carpet etc. Inspect the headlamps. If the headlamp bulb is flooded with water, have the headlamp drained off. IMPORTANT 140) Selecting “4H” or “4L” position (Easy select 4WD), “4HLc” or “4LLc” position (Super select 4WD II) to drive on dry paved road will increase the fuel consumption with possible noise generation and early tyre wear. It may also increase the differential oil temperature, resulting in possible damage to the driving system. Further, the drive train will be subjected to excessive loading, possibly leading to oil leakage, component seizure, or other serious faults. 141) Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration, and sharp turning; such operations could cause skidding and spinouts. 142) Do not force the vehicle or drive recklessly on sandy surfaces. In comparison with normal road surfaces, the engine and other drive-system components are put under excessive strain when driving on such a surface, and this could lead to accidents. 143) If any of following conditions occur while the vehicle is being driven, immediately park your vehicle in a safe place and follow these procedures: the needle in the temperature gauge approaches the overheating zone. Refer to “Engine overheating”; automatic transmission fluid temperature warning lamp comes on. Refer to “When the A/T (automatic transmission) fluid temperature warning lamp comes on”. 144) Never cross a stream where the water is deep. Do not change gears while crossing the stream. Frequent crossing of streams can adversely affect the life span of the vehicle; we recommend you to take the necessary measures to prepare, inspect, and repair the vehicle. 145) After crossing a stream, apply the brakes to be sure they are functioning properly. If the brakes are wet and not functioning properly, dry them out by driving slowly while lightly depressing the brake pedal. Inspect each part of the vehicle carefully. WARNING 232) When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that the area around the vehicle is clear of people and physical objects. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to suddenly launch forward or backward, causing injury or damage to nearby people or objects. 233) Go straight up. Do not try to traverse across a steep slope. 234) If you begin to lose traction, ease off the accelerator pedal and gently turn the steering wheel alternatively left and right to regain adequate traction again. 235) Avoid snaking down a sharp grade. Descend the grade as straight as possible. CAUTIONS ON HANDLING OF 4 WHEEL DRIVE VEHICLES Tyres and wheels Since the driving torque can be applied to the 4 wheels, the performance of the vehicle when operating in 4-wheel drive is greatly affected by the condition of the tyres. Pay close attention to the tyres. Install specified tyres on all wheels. Refer to “Tyres and wheels”. Be sure to the appropriate tyre inflation pressure according to no cargo or cargo. Refer to “Tyre inflation pressures”. Be sure to fit all 4 tyres and wheels of the same size and type. When replacement of any of the tyres or wheels is necessary, replace all of them. All tyres should be rotated whenever the wear difference between the front and rear tyres is recognizable. Good vehicle performance cannot be expected if there is a difference in wear between tyres. Refer to “Tyre rotation”. Check the tyre inflation pressure regularly. Towing If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by a Fiat Dealership or a commercial tow truck service. In the following cases, transport the vehicle using a tow truck. The engine runs but the vehicle does not move or abnormal noise is produced. Inspection of the vehicle’s underside reveals that oil or some other fluid is leaking. If a wheel gets stuck in a ditch, do not try to tow the vehicle. Please contact your Fiat Dealership or a commercial tow truck service for assistance. Only when you cannot receive a towing service from a Fiat Dealership or commercial tow truck service, tow your vehicle carefully in accordance with the instructions given in “Towing”. 146) 181 STARTING AND DRIVING BRAKING SYSTEM IMPORTANT 146) Always use tyres of the same size, same type, and same brand which have no wear differences. Using the tyres which differ in size, type, brands or the degree of wear or the inappropriate tyre inflation pressure, will increase the differential oil temperature, resulting in possible damage to the driving system. Further, the drive train will be subjected to excessive loading, possibly leading to oil leakage, component seizure, or other serious faults. 147) Transport the vehicle with the driving wheels on a carriage (Type C or D) as illustrated. Never try to tow with the front or rear wheels on the ground (Type A or B) as illustrated. This could result in damage to the drivetrain, or unstable towing. WARNING 287 AHE100182 147) Jacking up a 4-wheel drive vehicles 236) Clutch operation Quick or slight clutch engagement made while the engine is running at high speed will cause damage to the clutch and transmission because the tractive force is very great. Operate the pedal slowly and positively. 182 236) Do not crank the engine while jacking up the vehicle. The tyre on the ground may turn and the vehicle may roll off the jack. All the parts of the brake system are critical to safety. We recommend you to have the vehicle checked at regular intervals according to the service booklet. 238) Brake system The service brake is divided into two brake circuits. And your vehicle is equipped with power brakes. If one brake circuit fails, the other is available to stop the vehicle. If your vehicle should lose the power assist for some reason, the brakes will still work. In these situations even if the brake pedal moves down to the very end of its possible stroke or resists being depressed, keep depressing the brake pedal down harder and further than usual; stop driving as soon as possible and have the brake system repaired. 237) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Warning lamp The brake warning lamp illuminates to indicate a fault in the braking system. Refer to “Brake warning lamp”. When brakes are wet Check the brake system while driving at a low speed immediately after starting, especially when the brakes are wet, to confirm they work normally. A film of water can be formed on the brake discs or brake drums and prevent normal braking after driving in heavy rain or through large puddles, or after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry the brakes out by driving slowly while lightly depressing the brake pedal. When driving downhill It is important to take advantage of the engine braking by shifting to a lower shift position while driving on steep downhill roads in order to prevent the brakes from overheating. 239) Brake pads and linings Avoid hard braking situations. New brakes need to be broken-in by moderate use for the first 200 km. The disc brakes are provided with a warning device which emits a shrieking metallic sound while braking if the brake pads have reached their wear limit. If you hear this sound, have the brake pads replaced. CRUISE CONTROL WARNING 237) Do not turn off the engine while your vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the engine while driving, the power assistance for the braking system will stop working and your brakes will not work effectively. 238) If the power assist is lost or if either brake hydraulic system stops working properly, have your vehicle checked immediately. 239) Do not leave any objects near the brake pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; doing so could prevent the full pedal stroke that would be necessary in an emergency. Make sure that the pedal can be operated freely at all times. Make sure the floor mat is securely held in place. 240) Driving with worn brake pads will make it harder to stop, and can cause an accident. (where provided) Cruise control is an automatic speed control system that keeps a set speed. It can be activated at approximately 40 km/h or more. 241) 242) 149) 150) 151) NOTE Cruise control may not be able to keep your speed on uphills or downhills. Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill. You may use the accelerator pedal if you want to stay at your set speed. Your speed may increase to more than the set speed on a steep downhill. You have to use the brake to control your speed. As a result, the set speed driving is deactivated. 240) IMPORTANT 148) Avoid driving habits that cause heavy braking and never “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. It causes bake overheating and fade. 183 STARTING AND DRIVING Cruise control switches Type 1 288 AA0110608 Type 2 289 184 AHA108425 A — CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch Used to turn on and off the cruise control. B — SET - switch Used to reduce the set speed and to set the desired speed. C — RES + switch Used to increase the set speed and to return to the original set speed. D — CANCEL switch Used to deactivate the set speed driving. NOTE When operating the cruise control switches, press the cruise control switches correctly. The set speed driving may be deactivated automatically if two or more switches of the cruise control are pressed at the same time. To activate 1. With the ignition switch in the “ON” position or the operation mode in ON, press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch (A) to turn on the cruise control. The indicator lamp in the meter cluster will come on. Type 1 290 AA0110611 Type 2 291 AHA114055 Type 2 292 AHA112846 2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired speed, then push down and release the SET - switch (B) when the indicator lamp is illuminated. The vehicle will then maintain the desired speed. Type 1 293 Type 1 AA0110624 294 AHA108441 NOTE When you release the SET switch (B), the vehicle speed will be set. To increase the set speed There are 2 ways to increase the set speed. RES + switch Push up and hold the RES + switch (C) while driving at the set speed, and your speed will then gradually increase. When you reach your desired speed, release the switch. Your new cruising speed is now set. 295 AA0110637 Type 2 296 AHA108454 To increase your speed in small amounts, push up the RES + switch (C) for less than approximately 1 second and release it. Each time you push up the RES + switch (C), your vehicle will go approximately 1.6 km/h faster. 185 STARTING AND DRIVING Accelerator pedal While driving at the set speed, use the accelerator pedal to reach your desired speed and then push down the SET switch (B) and release the switch momentarily to set a new desired cruising speed. Type 1 To decrease the set speed There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed. SET - switch Push down and hold the SET - switch (B) while driving at the set speed, and your speed will slow down gradually. When you reach your desired speed, release the switch. Your new cruising speed is now set. Type 1 300 297 AA0110640 Type 2 299 298 186 Type 2 AHA108467 AA0110624 AHA108441 To slow down your speed in small amounts, push down the SET - switch (B) for less than approximately 1 second and release it. Each time you push down the SET - switch (B), your vehicle will slow down by approximately 1.6 km/h. Brake pedal While driving at the set speed, use the brake pedal, which disengages the cruise control, then push down the SET - switch (B) and release the switch momentarily to set a new desired cruising speed. Type 1 301 To temporarily increase the speed Depress the accelerator pedal as you would normally. When you release the pedal, you will return to your set speed. 305 AA0110653 AHA108496 To temporarily decrease the speed Depress the brake pedal to decrease the speed. To return to the previously set speed, push up the RES + switch (C). Refer to “To resume the set speed”. To deactivate The set speed driving can be deactivated as follows: Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch (A) (Cruise control will be turned off). Press the CANCEL switch (D). Depress the brake pedal. Type 1 Type 1 Type 2 303 302 Type 2 AA0001395 AHA108483 304 AA0110666 306 AA0110679 187 STARTING AND DRIVING Type 2 To resume the set speed If the set speed driving is deactivated by the condition described in “To deactivate”, you can resume the previously set speed by push up the RES + switch (C) while driving at a speed of approximately 40 km/h or higher. Type 1 307 AHA108438 The set speed driving is deactivated automatically in any of the following ways. When you depress the clutch pedal (on vehicles with M/T). When your speed slows to approximately 15 km/h or more below the set speed because of a hill, etc. When your speed slows to approximately 40 km/h or less. When the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) starts operating (if so equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)”. WARNING 308 AA0110637 Type 2 243) Also, the set speed driving may be deactivated when the engine speed rises and approaches the tachometer’s red zone (the red-coloured part of the tachometer dial). 152) 188 Under either of the following conditions, however, using the switch does not allow you to resume the previously set speed. In these situations, repeat the speed setting procedure: The CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch is pressed. The ignition switch is turned OFF or the operation mode is put in OFF. Indicator lamp go off. 309 AHA108454 241) If the device is faulty, turn ring nut A to O, check the condition of the fuse and contact a Fiat Dealership. 242) When travelling with the device active, never move the gear lever to neutral. 243) On vehicles equipped with A/T, although the set speed driving will be deactivated when shifting to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, never move the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while driving. You would have no engine braking and could cause a serious accident. SPEED LIMITER IMPORTANT 149) When you do not wish to drive at a set speed, turn off the cruise control for safety. 150) On vehicles with M/T, do not move the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position while driving at a set speed without depressing the clutch pedal. The engine will run too fast and might be damaged. 151) Do not use cruise control when driving conditions will not allow you to stay at the same speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet, slippery, on a steep downhill slope. 152) When the set speed driving is deactivated automatically in any situation other than those listed above, there may be a system malfunction. Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch to turn off the cruise control and have your vehicle inspected by a Fiat Dealership. The Speed Limiter is a driver assist function to prevent from exceeding the speed set by driver while engine power control. 153) NOTE If depressing the clutch pedal (M/T), the Speed Limiter does not activate. If the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed, control state “LIMIT” and the Speed Limiter’s symbol will blink in the combination meter. If the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed after indicated, control state “LIMIT” and the beep alert will sound a certain period of time. While running without blinked control state “LIMIT” and the Speed Limiter’s symbol, if you decrease the set speed and vehicle speed is more than set speed, control state “LIMIT” and the Speed Limiter’s symbol blinking starts but beep alert is delayed. In this case, when vehicle speed keeps exceeding set speed for about 30 seconds after control state “LIMIT” and the Speed Limiter’s symbol are blinked, beep alert will sound a certain period of time. If the vehicle speeds decreases less than set speeds, control state “LIMIT” and the Speed Limiter’s symbol stop blinking. When beep alert is sounding, the beep alert also goes off. NOTE However, this gives priority to audio and visual signal of safety reasons or driver’s demand. If the set speed is too lower based on current shift position, the Speed Limiter may not limit the vehicle speed to prevent engine stall. Speed Limiter control switches There are 4 switches which relate to the Speed Limiter on the steering wheel. Type 1 310 AA0113771 189 STARTING AND DRIVING 190 Speed Limiter information on the multi information display area The Speed Limiter information is displayed on the multi information display area in the combination meter. Type 2 311 To start up First of all, press the ON/OFF switch in order to power up the Speed Limiter when the ignition switch in the “ON”, position or the operation mode in ON. The Speed Limiter indication will be appeared in the combination meter. AHA110510 A — SPEED LIMITER ON/OFF switch To turn on/off the Speed Limiter. B — SET - switch To set the current vehicle speed to a set speed decrease the set speed. C — RES + switch To resume the Speed Limiter with set speed memorized or increase the set speed. D — CANCEL switch To cancel the Speed Limiter. NOTE Press the switch one by one. The Speed Limiter may be cancelled automatically, if two or more switches are pressed at the same time. 312 AHA105004 A — Control state There are 2 control states as below. LIMIT OFF When the Speed Limiter is in STANDBY, the vehicle speed can exceed the set speed LIMIT When the Speed Limiter is in operation. The vehicle is controlled in order not to exceed the set speed. B — SPEED LIMITER ON indication When the Speed Limiter is started up, the Speed Limiter’s symbol is appeared. C — Set speed Set speed is appeared if it is stored. 313 AHA105020 To activate Accelerate or decelerate to your desired speed, and push down the SET switch (B). the Speed Limiter memorizes the current vehicle speed when you release the SET - switch (B). Now, the Speed Limiter starts controlling in order not to exceed the set speed. And, control state “LIMIT” is displayed in the combination meter. The set speed is displayed in the combination meter. And, control state “LIMIT” is displayed in the combination meter. Type 1 314 317 AA0113784 AA0113797 Type 2 Type 2 316 315 Type 1 AHA110523 If the current vehicle speed is lower than approximately 30 km/h (settable minimum speed), the set speed is set at approximately 30 km/h. The set speed is displayed in the combination meter. AHA105017 To increase the set speed By using the RES + switch Push up the RES + switch continuously. Then the set speed displayed in the combination meter is gradually increased. If the set speed reaches your desired speed, release the RES + switch (C). 318 AHA110536 The set speed is increased each approximately 5 km/h. If a driver wants to increase the set speed a little, push up the RES + switch and release it. The set speed is increased 1 km/h each taps 191 STARTING AND DRIVING By using the CANCEL switch, the accelerator pedal and the SET switch Press the CANCEL switch (D) to deactivate the Speed Limiter. Control state “LIMIT” is disappeared and change control state “LIMIT OFF” in the combination meter. Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 320 AHA110578 AA0113814 Type 2 319 AHA114303 321 AHA114316 Accelerate to driver’s desired vehicle speed and push down SET - switch (B) and release. 192 322 323 AHA114505 Control state “LIMIT” is displayed again and the set speed is updated. To decrease the set speed By using the SET - switch Push down the SET - switch (B). Then the set speed displayed in the combination meter is gradually decreased. If the set speed reaches to your desired speed, release the SET switch (B). By using the CANCEL switch, the service brake and the SET - switch Press the CANCEL switch (D) to deactivate the Speed Limiter. Control state “LIMIT” is disappeared and change control state “LIMIT OFF” in the combination meter. Type 2 Type 1 Type 1 325 AHA110523 The set speed decrease each approximately 5 km/h. If a driver wants to decrease the set speed a little, press SET - switch (B) and release it. The set speed is decreased 1 km/h each taps. 326 324 AA0113784 AHA110578 Type 2 327 AHA114303 193 STARTING AND DRIVING Type 2 328 331 AHA114316 330 Decelerate to driver’s desired speed and push down SET - switch (B) and release. Type 1 329 AA0113784 245) The Speed Limiter indication is displayed again and the set speed is updated. To increase the vehicle speed temporarily A driver can temporarily accelerate for emergency use. The Speed Limiter is temporarily deactivated, and the vehicle speed can be increased. The Speed Limiter will resume when the vehicle speed goes down to enough less than the set speed. Put on an accelerator pedal to the pedal stroke end (over a detent that makes pedal reaction force bigger before pedal stroke end). 244) If vehicle speed exceeds set speed, control state “LIMIT” and the Speed Limiter’s symbol will blink. 194 AHA105033 AHA110523 A driver can change the set speed during this emergency use. To deactivate Use whichever following ways to deactivate. Press CANCEL switch Press the Speed Limiter ON/OFF switch NOTE If the Speed Limiter is cancelled by other states, it may be a system malfunction. Stop using the Speed Limiter and turn off the Speed Limiter. Have your vehicle inspected by a Fiat Dealership. 246) To resume The Speed Limiter memorizes the set speed when system has been deactivated, the Speed Limiter can resume by push up the RES + switch (C). Type 1 IMPORTANT LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (where provided) 153) Because the system does not use service brake (hydraulic brake), the vehicle speed may exceed the set speed on the downhill. WARNING 332 AA0113797 Type 2 333 244) There is a possibility for the Speed Limiter to allow abrupt acceleration corresponding to accelerator pedal position. So be careful of the abrupt acceleration. 245) Be careful about over speed. 246) There is a possibility for the Speed Limiter to allow abrupt acceleration corresponding to accelerator pedal position when the Speed Limiter is deactivated. Be careful. 247) There is a possibility to occur jerk, depending on a running resistance. Be careful. By recognizing through a camera (A) the lane in which your vehicle is running, LDW gives you warning when your vehicle is likely to drift from its lane with an audible alarm and a visual alarm displayed on the information screen of the multi information display. 334 AA0114055 335 AHA106359 AHA110536 However, the Speed Limiter immediately starts controlling and the vehicle decreases as if an accelerator pedal is closed fully, when the vehicle speed is higher than the set speed. 247) 195 STARTING AND DRIVING How to operate LDW The indication changes as follows depending on the state of the system. Turning on the system When you set the ignition switch or operation mode to “ON”, the LDW system ON indicator lamp appears, showing that the system is placed in the ‘ON state’. 337 336 AHA106375 Turning off the system When you press the LDW switch, the LDW system ON indicator lamp goes out, showing that the system is placed in the ‘OFF state’. Press the switch again, the system returns to “ON”. AHA106388 NOTE When you set the ignition switch or operation mode to “OFF” with the system “OFF,” the system will be restored “ON.” (“LDW 1” mode) You can also select the “LDW 2” mode which makes always the LDW system in ‘OFF state’. 1. Press the LDW switch, and the system is placed in the ‘OFF state’. 2. Press and hold the LDW switch for more than approximately 10 seconds. A buzzer sounds, and switch to the “LDW 2” mode. 3. Press the LDW switch, and the LDW system ON indicator lamp goes out. To return to the “LDW 1” mode, put the system in ‘OFF state’, press and hold the LDW switch for more than approximately 10 seconds. A buzzer sounds, and switch to the “LDW 1” mode. Standby state In the standby mode, the system is capable of recognizing the lane in which your vehicle is positioned and issuing audible warning when your vehicle goes out of the lane. The system automatically shifts from the ‘ON state’ to the ‘standby state’ if all of the following conditions are simultaneously met. The LDW system ON indicator lamp change to the LDW standby indicator lamp (green). The vehicle speed is approximately 65 km/h or higher. The turn-signal lever is not operated. The hazard lamp is not activated. The brake pedal is not depressed. Environmental conditions are adequate for the system to recognize the lane markings on both sides. The system has been placed in the ‘ON state’. 338 196 AHA106391 NOTE The system stays in the “ON” state for about 7 seconds after the hazard lamp has stopped flashing or the turn-signal lever has returned to the home position. Lane departure warning A buzzer sounds intermittently and the LDW lamp (amber) flashing when your vehicle is about to leave or has left the lane in the standby mode. Too hot LDW camera If the system becomes temporarily unable due to too high a temperature of the LDW camera, the LDW system ON indicator lamp illuminates. If the camera cools down below the predetermined temperature, the system automatically recovers the normal state. 341 AHA106391 154) 155) 156) 157) 248) 249) 250) WARNING 340 339 AHA106405 NOTE If warning continues for about 3 seconds or more, the system switches to the standby mode before the warning stops. System problem warning If a problem occurs with the system, a visual warning specific to the type of the problem is given. AHA106375 NOTE The LDW system ON indicator lamp can be cleared temporarily by setting the LDW switch to “OFF.” LDW deactivation due to fault If LDW becomes to a non-initialized state due to a fault, the LDW lamp (amber) illuminates. If this happens, please contact a Fiat Dealership for inspection of the system. 248) In the case of indistinct, overlapping or missing lane demarcation lines, the system may not assist the driver: in this case the Driving Advisor will be inactive. 249) The Driving Advisor is not an automatic driving system and does not replace the driver in controlling the trajectory of the car. The driver is personally responsible for maintaining a sufficient level of attention to the traffic and road conditions and for controlling the trajectory of the car safely. 250) If the camera loses its position due to a load variation, the system may not work temporarily to allow the camera to perform an autocalibration. 197 STARTING AND DRIVING 198 IMPORTANT 154) LDW has its performance limitations. Do not over-rely on the system. 155) LDW is not designed to lessen risks associated with not looking ahead carefully (attention drawn to something on the side, absentmindedness, etc.) or poor visibility caused by bad weather etc. Keep steering your vehicle correctly and drive safely. 156) The system may not be able to detect the lane correctly in the following conditions. If required, set the LDW switch to “OFF.”: when driving on a road whose lane markings (white or yellow) are worn out or smeared with dirt to an extent not recognizable by the system; when lane markings are vague, typically during a drive in the rain, snow or fog, or when running against the sun; when the vehicle is moving in a place where lane markings are interrupted, such as a toll booth entrance and motorway junction; when running on a road portion with incompletely removed old lane markings, shadows, lingering snow, truck-like puddles mistakable for lane markings (especially after the rain when road surface is reflecting light) or similar confusing factors; when running in a lane other than the cruising lane and passing lane; when running beside a closed lane section or in a provisional lane in a traffic work zone; when running in an extremely narrow lane; when the following distance between your vehicle and a vehicle in front becomes extremely reduced (especially when a marking is hidden by a vehicle in front this is running too close to the marking); when entering a junction or other point of road where lanes are laid out complicatedly; when passing a road section where the number of lanes increases/decreases or multiple lanes are crossing each other; when the lane is marked by double or otherwise special lines; when driving on a winding or rough road; when driving on a slippery road covered by rain water, snow, ice, etc.; when passing through a place where the brightness suddenly changes, like the inlet or outlet of a tunnel; when turning steep curves; when the road surface is reflecting the light shining from the direction opposite to the running direction; vehicle largely lurches when it is running over steps or other irregularities of the road surface; when the headlamp illumination is inadequate because of contaminated or deteriorated lenses or improperly aimed headlamps; when the vehicle is leaning much to one side due to heavy luggage on it or improperly adjusted tyre pressures; when oncoming vehicles’ headlamps shine the LDW camera; when the vehicle is equipped with nonstandard tyres (including excessively worn tyres and temporary spare tyre), uses snow traction device (tyre chains), or has nonspecified components such as a modified suspension; when the windscreen is covered with rain water, snow, dust, etc. 157) Follow the instructions given below to keep your LDW in good operating conditions: always keep the windscreen clean; avoid applying a strong shock or pressure to the LDW camera. Do not attempt to disassemble it; disturbing the installation of the LDW camera or its removal is under no circumstances permitted. The camera has been precisely oriented at the factory; do not put anything like a sticker on the area in front of the LDW camera lens of the windscreen; use only GENUINE Parts when replacing the windscreen wipers. REAR VIEW CAMERA (where provided) The rear view camera is a system that shows the view behind the vehicle on a screen of the Multi Communication System (MCS), the Smartphone Link Display Audio or the DISPLAY AUDIO. 251) 252) 253) 158) Range of view of rear view camera The range of view of the rear view camera is limited to the area shown in the illustrations. It cannot show the both sides and the lower part of the rear bumper, etc. When reversing, be sure to visually confirm safety around the vehicle. 343 Location of rear view camera The rear view camera (A) is integrated into the part near the rear gate handle. 344 342 AHA103707 AHA103723 AHA103710 How to use the rear view camera When you place the gearshift lever or the selector lever in the “R” position with the ignition switch in the “ON” position or the operation mode in ON, the view behind the vehicle will automatically appear on the screen of 199 STARTING AND DRIVING 200 the Multi Communication System (MCS), the Smartphone Link Display Audio or the DISPLAY AUDIO. When you move the gearshift lever or the selector lever to any other position, the screen will return to its original indication. 159) NOTE Because the rear view camera has a special lens, the lines on the ground between parking spaces may not look parallel on the screen. NOTE In the following situations, the screen indication may be difficult to see. There is no abnormality. Low light (night time) When the light of the sun or the light from a vehicle’s headlamps shines directly into the lens If a fluorescent light shines directly into the lens, the screen indication may be flicker. There is no abnormality. NOTE If the camera is hot and is then cooled by rain or a car wash, the lens can mist up. This phenomenon does not indicate a malfunction. NOTE If the atmospheric temperature is extremely hot or extremely cold, the rear view camera images may not be clear. There is no abnormality. NOTE If a radio set is installed near the camera, the rear view camera images may cause electrical system interference and the system may stop functioning properly. NOTE It is not possible to fully see obstacles when the lens is dirty. If the lens becomes contaminated by water droplets, snow, mud, or oil, wipe off the contamination, taking care not to scratch the lens. NOTE Please observe the following cautions. Ignoring them could lead to a camera malfunction. Do not subject the camera to physical shock such as striking it strongly or throwing a thing. Do not adhere organic substances, waxes, oil remover, and glass cleaner to the camera. If adhered to them, immediately wipe off. Do not splash the camera with boiling water. Never spray or splash water on the camera or around it. Do not disconnect, disassemble or modify the camera. Do not scratch the camera, as this may cause damage to the rear view camera images. Reference lines on the screen Reference lines and upper surface of the rear bumper (A) are displayed on the screen. Red line (B) indicates approximately 50 cm behind the rear bumper. Two Green lines (C) indicate approximately 20 cm outside of the vehicle body Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate distance from the rear bumper. 345 AG0027115 1. Approximately at the rear edge of the rear bumper 2. Approximately 100 cm 3. Approximately 200 cm 160) Errors between the display and the actual road surface The reference lines for distance and vehicle width are based on a level, flat road surface. In the following cases, errors are produced between the display reference lines and the distance on the actual road surface. When the rear of the vehicle is weighed down with the weight of passengers and luggage in the vehicle The reference lines are displayed closer than the actual distance. Therefore when there is an obstacle on the upward slope, it appears farther than its actual position. When there is a downward slope behind the vehicle The reference lines are displayed farther than the actual distance. Therefore when there is an obstacle on the downward slope, it appears closer than its actual position. 346 AHA104720 A. Actual objects B. Objects shown on the screen When there is an upward slope behind the vehicle The reference lines are displayed closer than the actual distance. Therefore when there is an obstacle on the upward slope, it appears farther than its actual position. 348 AHA103749 A. Actual objects B. Objects shown on the screen When solid objects are located close to the vehicle When solid objects are located close to the vehicle, the displayed distance on the screen may differ from the actual distance. 347 AHA103736 349 AHE100241 When approaching solid objects The reference lines for distance and vehicle width are intended to indicate the distance to a flat object such as a level, flat road surface. This may make the distance to a projecting object shown on the screen differ from the actual distance to the projecting object. Do not use them as a guide to distances to solid objects. A. Actual objects B. Objects shown on the screen 201 STARTING AND DRIVING Example: On the screen the point B appears the nearest, then the point C and A in order of distance. The point A and B actually are the same distances from the vehicle, and the point C is farther off than the point A and B. IMPORTANT 350 AHA103765 WARNING 251) The responsibility for parking and other manoeuvres is always and in any case charged to the driver. While carrying out these manoeuvres, always make sure that no people (especially children) or animals are in the area concerned. The camera is an aid for the driver, but the driver must never allow his/her attention to lapse during potentially dangerous manoeuvres, even those executed at low speeds. Always keep a slow speed, so as to promptly brake in the case of obstacles. 202 252) The rear view camera is an assistance system that enables the driver to check for obstacles behind the vehicle. Its range of view is limited, so you should not overly depend on it. Please drive just as carefully as you would if the vehicle did not have the rear view camera. 253) Be sure to visually confirm safety around the vehicle with your own eyes. Do not depend entirely on the rear view camera. 158) It is vital, for correct operation, that the camera is always kept clean and free from mud, dirt, snow or ice. Be careful not to scratch or damage the camera while cleaning it. Avoid using dry, rough or hard cloths. The camera must be washed using clean water, with the addition of car shampoo if necessary. In washing stations which use steam or high-pressure jets, clean the camera quickly, keeping the nozzle more than 10 cm away from the sensors. Do not apply stickers to the camera. 159) The rear view camera has a special lens that can make objects shown on the screen appear to be closer or further away than they actually are. 160) Due to the number of people in the vehicle, the fuel quantity, the weight and positioning of luggage, and/or the condition of the road surface, the lines in the view from the rear view camera may not be accurately positioned relative to the actual road. Use the reference lines only as a guideline, and always do a safety check of your behind and surroundings directly while driving. IN AN EMERGENCY A punctured tyre or a burnt-out bulb? At times, a problem may interfere with our journey. The pages on emergencies can help you to deal with critical situations independently and with calm. In an emergency we recommend that you call the freephone number found in the Warranty Booklet. It is also possible to call the 00 800 3428 0000 freephone number to search the nearest Fiat Dealership. ERA GLONASS . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 IF THE VEHICLE BREAKS DOWN. .208 EMERGENCY STARTING . . . . . . .209 ENGINE OVERHEATING. . . . . . . .210 BLEEDING THE FUEL SYSTEM . . .211 TOOLS, JACK AND JACK HANDLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 HOW TO CHANGE A TYRE . . . . .216 TOWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 OPERATION UNDER ADVERSE DRIVING CONDITIONS . . . . . . . .226 FUSIBLE LINKS . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 REPLACEMENT OF LAMP BULBS .235 203 IN AN EMERGENCY ERA GLONASS NOTE Depending on the level of impact or the angle of the collision, the system may not operate. Manual Report: when you open the cover (C) and press the SOS switch (D). (where provided) ERA-GLONASS is a system designed to reduce the severity of accidents. The location and vehicle information is transmitted from the system to the emergency call centre in case of an accident or sudden illness, and the emergency call centre arranges for despatch of emergency vehicles as required. 254) 255) 256) 257) NOTE This system reports to the emergency call centre, but does not directly arrange an emergency vehicle or pass to the road service. This system helps an emergency call for a traffic accident or sudden illness, but does not have a function to protect the occupants. Flow of the emergency call 262) 161) 352 AHA114143 A — Red lamp B — Green lamp C — Cover D — SOS switch E — Microphone F — Door speaker (only front passenger side) 258) 1 — After setting the ignition switch or the operation mode to “ON”, the red lamp (A) and the green lamp (B) illuminate for approximately 10 seconds. When approximately 10 seconds has elapsed after the lamps extinguish, the system is in the standby state. 259) 260) 261) 351 204 AH3101138 2 — The system operates by the following. Automatic Report: when the vehicle receives an impact above a certain level. NOTE Do not press the SOS switch except the case of emergency such as an accident or sudden illness. When an emergency vehicle, etc. is despatch for mischief, the applicable cost may be charged. 3 — The green lamp blinks and the system calls the emergency call centre. 263) 4 — The green lamp blinks slowly, and the location and vehicle information is transmitted to the emergency call centre. 5 — When the green lamp changes from a blinking state to an illumination state and the buzzer sounds once, a conversation with an operator of the emergency call centre is available. 264) 265) NOTE If the vehicle side microphone (E) and/or the speakers fail, you cannot talk with the operator of the emergency call centre. A call cannot be disconnected from the vehicle side. 6 — The emergency call centre arranges for despatch of the emergency vehicle as required. Indicator list Situation Red lamp Green lamp When setting the ignition switch or the operation mode to “ON” Illuminates (for approx. 10 seconds) Illuminates (for approx. 10 seconds) The system check is in process Wait for a while. The indicator lamps extinguish when the system check is complete. If the red lamp and/or the green lamp do not illuminate, there is a possible failure in the system. In this case, immediately have the system inspected at a Fiat Dealership Extinguishes Extinguishes The system works normally — Illuminates Extinguishes There is a possible failure in the system or the battery may be exhausted Immediately have the system inspected at a Fiat Dealership Extinguishes Blinks (at a 0.5 second interval) The system calls the emergency call centre — Extinguishes Blinks (at a 2 second interval) The system transmits the location and vehicle information to the emergency call centre — Extinguishes Illuminates A conversation with an operator of the emergency call centre is available Mutually confirm the details of the emergency call with the operator of the emergency call centre. If the green lamp does not extinguish even after the emergency call ends, have the system inspected at a Fiat Dealership Illuminates (for approx. 60 seconds) Extinguishes The emergency call failed Make an emergency call again, or directly arrange an emergency vehicle or road service with the nearest public telephone, etc. After approx. 20 seconds after setting the ignition switch or the operation mode to “ON” While the emergency call is activated When the emergency call failed Cause Solution 205 IN AN EMERGENCY 206 Test Mode You can check if the system is in the normal standby state by the following process. Before operation, stop the vehicle in a safe place, with good visibility, where radio waves can be transmitted and received. Change to Test Mode 1 — When the ignition switch or the operation mode is set to “OFF”, set the ignition switch or the operation mode to “ON” while pressing the SOS switch. 2 — After setting the ignition switch or the operation mode to “ON”, perform Steps 3 and 4 within 10 seconds. 3 — Release your finger from the SOS switch. 4 — Press the SOS switch 3 or more times. 5 — After approximately 10 seconds from Step 2, the red lamp and the green lamp extinguish. After that, the buzzer sounds 3 times. NOTE If the buzzer does not sound, repeat the process from Step 1. 6 — Approximately 60 seconds later, the green lamp blinks. If you press the SOS switch within 20 seconds, the mode changes to the test mode. NOTE When the red lamp blinks instead of the green lamp, move the vehicle in a safe place, with good visibility, where radio waves can be transmitted and received, then repeat the process from Step 1. Within approximately 20 seconds after the mode is changed to the test mode, press the SOS switch for one of the following periods to select the desired test type. 10 seconds or more: report test to the emergency call centre Less than 10 seconds: test of the ERA-GLONASS system equipment of the vehicle NOTE If you do not press the SOS switch within approximately 20 seconds, the test mode ends. If you drive a certain distance in the test mode, the test mode ends. Report test to the emergency call centre 1 — The green lamp illuminates, and the report test to the emergency call centre is started. NOTE If the red lamp illuminates for approximately 60 seconds, the vehicle is in a place where radio waves cannot be transmitted and received. Therefore you cannot report to the emergency call centre. 2 — When the green lamp extinguishes, the test mode is completed. Test of the ERA-GLONASS system equipment of the vehicle 1 — After the buzzer sounds once, press the SOS switch. Lamp Check: when the buzzer sounds once and the red lamp and the green lamp illuminate alternately, they are working normally. 2 — When the lamps are normal, press the SOS switch. When the lamps do not illuminate normally, wait for approximately 20 seconds. Speaker Check: when the buzzer sounds twice and continues sounding, they are working normally 3 — When the speakers are normal, press the SOS switch. When the buzzer does not sound normally, wait for approximately 20 seconds. Microphone Check: after the buzzer sounds 3 times, say something towards the microphone. If your voice sounds from the speakers, they are working normally. 4 — When the microphone is normal, press the SOS switch. When it does not operate normally, wait for approximately 20 seconds. 5 — If all check results are normal, the green lamp illuminates (for approximately 5 seconds) and the buzzer sounds once. 6 — When the green lamp extinguishes, the test mode is completed. 266) WARNING 254) In the country or area where is no available emergency call centre of the ERA-GLONASS, or where the radio wave of emergency call cannot be transmitted or received normally, the system does not operate. In this case, directly arrange an emergency vehicle or road service with a cellular phone, etc. 255) If an emergency occurs and you feel a smell of the fuel or a bad smell, do not stay inside the vehicle and escape to a safe place immediately. 256) While waiting for the rescue after the emergency call, take action to prevent secondary accidents such as a rear end collision with the following vehicle, and escape to a safe place. 257) In the following cases, directly arrange an emergency vehicle or road service with a cellular phone, etc. 1 - When the system does not operate by failing because of collision, etc. 2 - When the vehicle is in the place where radio waves cannot be transmitted and received (for example, indoor, a basement parking area, mountainous area, inside a tunnel, etc.). 3 When the line to the emergency call centre is busy and the call is not reachable to the emergency call centre. 258) Do not remove or install the above parts. This can cause failure of contact or equipment, and the system may not operate normally. 259) If the red lamp and/or the green lamp do not illuminate after setting the ignition switch or the operation mode to “ON”, there is a possible failure in the system. Have the system inspected by a Fiat Dealership. 260) If the red lamp remains illuminated or illuminates again after approximately 20 seconds has elapsed after setting the ignition switch or the operation mode to “ON”, there is a possible failure in the system or the battery for exclusive use of the ERA-GLONASS may be exhausted. The battery life is approximately 3 years. Have the system immediately inspected or replace the battery by a Fiat Dealership. 261) When the system is not in the standby state, the system does not operate. When you drive, make sure to check that the system is in the standby state. 262) Before pressing the SOS switch, stop the vehicle in a safe place. If you operate it while driving, your attention to the surrounding circumstances becomes insufficient enough to cause an unexpected accident. 263) If the red lamp illuminates as follows, directly arrange an emergency vehicle or road service with a cellular phone, etc. 1 When the red lamp remains illuminated (there is a possible failure in the system). 2 - When the red lamp illuminates for 60 seconds (the vehicle may be in the place where radio waves cannot be transmitted and received). 264) Do not replace the speakers. If they are replaced, the buzzer sound or the voice of the operator at the emergency call centre may not be audible. If the speakers need to be replaced due to a failure etc. we recommend you to consult a Fiat Dealership. 265) An error may occur between the actual report point and the point reported to the emergency call centre. Mutually confirm the report point and the object through the phone call with the operator of the emergency call centre. 266) If any of the check results are not normal, the red lamp illuminates (for approximately 5 seconds) and the buzzer sounds 3 times. In this case, there is a possible failure in the system. Have the system immediately inspected at a Fiat Dealership. IMPORTANT 161) Do not open the cover except when you press the SOS switch. You may press the SOS switch by mistake. In addition, if the cover is opened while driving, the cover can cause injury in case of emergency. 207 IN AN EMERGENCY IF THE VEHICLE BREAKS DOWN If the vehicle breaks down on the road, move it to the shoulder and use the hazard warning flashers and/or the warning triangle etc. Refer to “Hazard warning flasher switch”. If the engine stops/fails Vehicle operation and control are affected if the engine stops. Before moving the vehicle to a safe area, be aware of the following: The brake booster becomes inoperative and the pedal effort will increase. Press down the brake pedal harder than usual. Since the power steering system is no longer operative, the steering wheel feels heavy when turning it. First-aid kit and warning triangle securing bands* A first-aid kit and a warning triangle can be secured with the band(s) installed in the illustrated position fig. 353. Single cab, Double cab The wall behind the seat is provided with a band for securing a first-aid kit and a warning triangle fig. 355. 355 353 AHA106274 Club cab A band for securing a first-aid kit is installed under the floor on the right-hand side of the rear seat fig. 354. 354 208 A band for securing a warning triangle is installed left under the rear seat. AHA106287 AHA106290 EMERGENCY STARTING WARNING 267) 268) 269) 270) 271) 272) 273) 274) 275) 276) 277) 278) 279) 280) 281) 282) 283) If the engine cannot be started because the battery is weak or dead, the battery from another vehicle can be used with jumper cables to start the engine. 1. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching each other. 2. Turn off all lamps, heater and other electrical loads. 3. Set the parking brake firmly on each vehicle. Put an automatic transmission in “P” (PARK) or a manual transmission in “N” (Neutral). Stop the engine. 4. Make sure battery electrolyte is at the proper level. Refer to “Battery”. 5. Connect one end of one jumper cable (1) to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery (A), and the other end (2) to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery (B). Connect one end of the other jumper cable to the negative (−) terminal of the booster battery (B), and the other end to the engine block of the vehicle with the discharged battery at the point farthest from the battery. NOTE Open the terminal cover before connecting the jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the battery. Refer to “Battery”. 356 AHA102061 6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. NOTE For vehicles equipped with the Start&Stop system, press the “Start&Stop OFF” switch to deactivate the Start&Stop system and prevent the engine from automatically stopping before the battery is sufficiently charged. Refer to “To deactivate”. 7. After the engine is started, disconnect the cables in the reverse order and keep the engine running for several minutes. NOTE If the vehicle is put in motion without fully charging the battery, it might cause the loss of the smooth engine operation and the antilock brake warning lamp to illuminate. Refer to “Anti-lock brake system (ABS)”. 267) To start the engine using jumper cables from another vehicle, perform the correct procedures according to the instruction below. Incorrect procedures could result in a fire or explosion or damage to the vehicles. 268) Keep sparks, cigarettes and flames away from the battery because the battery may produce an explosion. 269) Do not attempt to start the engine by pulling or pushing the vehicle. It could damage your vehicle. 270) Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery. If the other system isn’t 12-volt, shorting can damage both vehicles. 271) Use the proper cables suitable for the battery size to prevent overheating of the cables. 272) Check the jumper cables for damage and corrosion before use. 273) Always wear protective eye goggles when working near the battery. 274) Keep the battery out of the reach of children. 275) Turn off the ignition on both vehicles beforehand. Make sure that the cables or your clothes cannot be caught by the fan or drive belt. Personal injury could result. 276) If electrolyte fluid is not visible, or appears to be frozen, Do Not Attempt Jump Starting! A battery might rupture or explode if the temperature is below the freezing point or if it is not filled to the proper level. 209 IN AN EMERGENCY 277) Electrolyte is corrosive diluted sulphuric acid. If electrolyte (battery acid) comes into contact with your hands, eyes, clothes or the painted surface of your vehicle, it should be thoroughly flushed with water. If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them with water immediately and thoroughly, and get prompt medical attention. 278) Make sure that the connection is made to the appointed position (shown in the illustration). If the connection is made directly to the negative (−) side of the battery, the inflammable gases generated from the battery might catch fire and explode. 279) When connecting the jumper cables, do not connect the positive (+) cable to the negative (−) terminal. Otherwise sparks might cause explosion of the battery. 280) Use care not to get the jumper cable caught in the cooling fan or other rotating part in the engine compartment. 281) Keep the engine of the vehicle giving assistance running. 282) Battery fluid is poisonous and corrosive: avoid contact with your skin and eyes. The battery should be charged in a well ventilated place, away from naked flames or possible sources of sparks: danger of explosion and fire. 283) Do not attempt to charge a frozen battery: it must be thawed first, otherwise it may explode. If freezing has occurred, the battery should be checked by skilled personnel to make sure that the internal elements are not damaged and that the body is not cracked, with the risk of leaking poisonous and corrosive acid. ENGINE OVERHEATING When the engine is overheating, will blink. If this occurs, take the following corrective measures: 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. 2. Check whether steam is coming from the engine compartment. If steam does not come from the engine compartment: with the engine still running, raise the bonnet to ventilate the engine compartment. NOTE For vehicles equipped with the Start&Stop system, press the “Start&Stop OFF” switch to deactivate the system before stopping the vehicle. If steam is coming from the engine compartment: stop the engine, and when the steam stops, raise the bonnet to ventilate the engine compartment. Restart the engine. 357 AHA102074 A. Radiator cap B. Cooling fan C. Reserve tank 287) 4. Check the coolant level in the reserve tank (C). 284) 285) 286) 3. Confirm that the cooling fan (B) is turning. If the cooling fan is turning: after the high coolant temperature warning has gone off, stop the engine If the cooling fan is not turning: stop the engine immediately and contact a Fiat dealership for assistance. 358 AHA102087 5. Add coolant to the radiator and/or reserve tank if necessary (refer to the “Maintenance” section). 288) 210 162) 6. Examine the radiator hoses for coolant leakage and the drive belt for looseness or damage. If there is anything wrong with the cooling system or drive belt, we recommend you to have it checked and repaired. WARNING 284) Do not open the bonnet while steam is coming from the engine compartment. It could cause steam or hot water to spurt out, causing burns. Hot water could spurt out even when there is no steam coming out, and some parts will be very hot. Be very careful when opening the bonnet. 285) Be careful of hot steam, which could be blowing off the reserve tank cap. 286) Do not attempt to remove the radiator cap while the engine is hot. 287) Be careful not to get your hands or clothes caught in the cooling fan. 288) Make sure that the engine has cooled down before removing the radiator cap (A), because hot steam or boiling water otherwise will gush from the filler port and may scald you. BLEEDING THE FUEL SYSTEM TOOLS, JACK AND JACK HANDLE The fuel system should be bled to remove air as described below if the fuel supply is exhausted during travel. Pump the hand pump (A) at the top of the fuel filter until the hand pump becomes stiff. Then try again to start the engine. If the engine does not start, repeat the process above. Storage The storage location of the tools, jack and jack handle should be remembered in case of an emergency. Single cab Type 1 360 359 AHA102090 289) 290) AHA104052 A — Tool (wheel nut wrench) B — Jack handle C — Jack WARNING IMPORTANT 162) Do not add coolant while the engine is hot. Suddenly adding cold coolant could damage the engine. Wait for the engine to cool down, then add coolant a little at a time. 289) Do not smoke or have any other open flame near the vehicle while bleeding the fuel system. 290) Be sure to carefully clean away any spilt fuel which could ignite and cause a fire. 211 IN AN EMERGENCY 361 AHA104065 363 A — Tools B — Jack handle C — Jack A. Tools B. Jack C. Jack handle 212 AHA102120 365 AHA104094 Single cab, Double cab 1. Wheel nut wrench Club cab 1. Tool bag 2. Wheel nut wrench Type 2 A. Tool (wheel nut wrench) B. Jack handle C. Jack Type 2 Club cab 362 Tools Type 1 Double cab Type 1 Type 2 AHA104078 364 A. Tools B. Jack handle C. Jack AHA104081 366 AHA105873 1. Tool bag 2. Wheel nut wrench 3. Plier 4. Driver 5. Spanner Jack The jack is used only for the purpose of changing a tyre when a tyre is punctured. NOTE The jack is maintenance-free. NOTE The jack is in conformity with EC law as approximated by the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC. NOTE The EC declaration of conformity is attached to the section “Declaration of Conformity” in the end of this owner's manual. The business name, full address of the manufacturer and of his authorised representative and the designation of the jack are described in the EC declaration of conformity. 367 AHA104111 3. Remove the securing nut (E), and then take out the jack (F). AHA104140 5. Reverse the removing procedure when storing the tools, jack and jack handle. When stowing the jack handle, align the black-marked part (I) of the jack handle with the holder (H). Removing and storing the tools, jack and jack handle Single cab The tools, jack, and jack handle are located behind the seat. 1. Tip forward the seatback (refer to “Seats”). 2. Type 1: Remove the wheel nut wrench (A) from the holder (B), and take out the wrench. Type 2: Remove the securing band (C), and then take out the tools (D). 369 368 AHA104124 4. Remove the jack handle (G) from the holder (H), and take out the handle. 370 AHA104137 213 IN AN EMERGENCY Club cab The tools are stored under the floor on the left-hand side of the rear seat. The jack, and jack handle are stored under the floor on the right-hand side of the rear seat. 1. Raise the seat cushion. Refer to “Folding up the seat cushion (Club cab)”. Open the rear door. Refer to “To open or close the rear door (Club cab)”. 2. Open the lid. 372 AHA104166 4. Remove the securing nut (C), and then take out the jack (D) on the right-hand side. 374 AHA104182 6. Reverse the removing procedure when storing the tools, jack and jack handle. NOTE When stowing the jack handle, align the coloured marking on the jack handle with that on the holder, and fit the jack in the holder. 371 AHA104153 3. Remove the securing band (A), and then take out the tools (B) on the left-hand side. 373 AHA104179 5. Remove the jack handle (E) from the holder (F), and then take out the jack handle on the right-hand side. 214 Double cab The tools, jack, and jack handle are located behind the rear seat. 1. Tip forward the seatback of the rear seat. (Refer to “Folding the seatback forward (Double cab)”. 2. Type 1: remove the wheel nut wrench (A) from the holder (B), and take out the wrench. Type 2: remove the securing band (C), and then take out the tools (D). To use the jack handle (Club cab) 1. While pressing the snap pin (A) on the handle that has a black marking, withdraw and remove the inner handle (B). 375 AHA104195 3. Remove the securing nut (E), and then take out the jack (F). 377 AHA104140 5. Reverse the removing procedure when storing the tools, jack and jack handle. NOTE When stowing the jack handle, align the black-marked part (I) of the jack handle with the holder (H). 376 379 AHA104212 2. Reverse the inner handle (B) then, while pressing the snap pin (C), insert it into the outer handle (D) until it is locked by snap pin as illustrated. AHA104209 4. Remove the jack handle (G) from the holder (H), and take out the handle. 378 AHA104137 380 AHA104225 215 IN AN EMERGENCY 3. While pressing the snap pin (F) on the assembled handle (E), insert the whitemarked handle (G) until it is locked by snap pin as illustrated. 381 216 AHA104238 HOW TO CHANGE A TYRE 163) 164) Before changing a tyre, first stop your vehicle in a safe, flat location. 1. Park the vehicle on level and stable ground, free of loose pebbles, etc. 2. Set the parking brake firmly. 3. On vehicles with manual transmission, turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position or put the operation mode in OFF, and move the gearshift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position. On vehicles with automatic transmission, move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position, and turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position or put the operation mode in OFF. 4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a warning triangle, flashing signal lamp, etc., at an adequate distance from the vehicle, and have all your passengers leave the vehicle. 5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when jacking up the vehicle, place chocks or blocks (A) at the tyre that is diagonally opposite from the tyre (B) you are changing. 382 AHA102162 291) 292) 293) 294) 295) 296) NOTE The chocks shown in the illustration do not come with your vehicle. It is recommended that you keep ones in the vehicle for use if needed. NOTE If chocks are not available, use stones or any other objects that are large enough to hold the wheel in position. 6. Get the jack, jack handle and wheel nut wrench ready. Refer to “Tools, jack and jack handle”. Spare wheel information The spare wheel is stored under the floor of the cargo bed. Check the air pressure of the spare tyre frequently and make sure it is ready for emergency use at any time. Maintaining the spare wheel at the highest specified air pressure will ensure that it can always be used under any conditions (city/high-speed driving, varying load weight, etc.). To remove the spare wheel 1. Set the jack handle. (Club cab) (Refer to “To use the jack handle (Club cab)”. 2. Insert the jack handle (A) in the hole (B) below the rear gate. 4. Insert the wheel nut wrench (E) through the end of the jack handle hole (F), and then turn it anticlockwise to lower the spare wheel completely to the ground and to slack the chain. NOTE Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body near the flat tyre. This makes it safer if the jack slips out of position. 387 383 AHA102263 385 AHA102322 AHA102289 3. Securely insert the pin (C) on the jack handle into the holder (D) of the spare wheel carrier. 5. Remove the hanger disc (G) from the spare wheel. To change a tyre 1. Loosen the wheel nuts a quarter turn with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet. 384 386 388 AHA102276 165) AHA102292 AHA102335 2. Place the jack under one of the jacking points shown in the illustration. 217 IN AN EMERGENCY Use the jacking point closest to the tyre you wish to change. NOTE When jacking up the rear of the vehicle, turn the tip of the jack so that the grooved portion (C) properly meets the designated point. 5. Move the jack handle up and down to raise the ram until just before the jack contacts the jacking point of the vehicle. Ensure that the jack will properly contact the vehicle jacking point. Move the jack handle up and down to raise the vehicle. C 389 AHA105730 391 A — Front jacking point AHZ101102 3. Using the jack handle, turn the release valve (D) clockwise until it stops. 393 AHA105769 NOTE This jack is a 2 stage expansion type. 299) 300) 301) 302) 303) 304) 305) 306) 390 6. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench, then take the wheel off. 7. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub surface (G), hub bolts (H) or in the installation holes (I) in the wheel, and then mount the spare wheel. AHA105743 B — Rear jacking point 297) 298) 392 AHA105756 4. Insert the jack handle in the bracket of the jack and hook the notch (E) on the jack handle end to the claw (F) of the bracket. 218 307) Type 2: On vehicles with aluminium wheels Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts by hand until the flange parts of the wheel nuts make light contact with the wheel and the wheel is not loose. 394 398 AHA105772 308) 395 AHZ100596 166) 396 AA0027931 397 AHA102364 NOTE If all 4 aluminium wheels are changed to steel wheels. e. g. when fitting winter tyres, use tapered nuts. 9. Put the notch (K) provided on the jack handle end on the valve (L) of the jack. Using the jack handle, turn the release valve anticlockwise slowly to lower the vehicle until the tyre touches the ground. AHA105785 8. Turn the wheel nuts clockwise by hand to initially tighten them. Type 1: On vehicles with steel wheels Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts by hand until the tapered parts of the wheel nuts make light contact with the seats of the wheel holes and the wheel is not loose. 399 AHA105798 309) 219 IN AN EMERGENCY 10. Tighten the nuts crisscross in 2 or 3 steps until each nut has been tightened securely. Tightening torque Steel wheel: 137 to 157 Nm Aluminium wheel: 118 to 137 Nm (Achieved by applying a force at the end of the wheel nut wrench supplied with the vehicle. Steel wheel: 510 to 580 N; Aluminium wheel: 440 to 500 N) If the jack is difficult to remove by hand, insert the jack handle (M) into the bracket (N). Then using the handle, remove the jack. 401 400 AHA102377 AHZ101131 12. Press the piston down all the way, and turn the release valve clockwise as far as possible. 13. Check your tyre inflation pressure. The correct pressures are shown on the door label. See the illustration. To store the spare wheel 1. Install the hanger disc (A) in the wheel disc hole. 403 AHA102306 2. Turn the wheel nut wrench (B) clockwise to wind up the chain. 310) 11. Lower the jack all the way and remove it. 167) 168) NOTE Occasionally when the vehicle is jacked up, the grooved portion of the designated point will not come off. When this happens, rock the vehicle to lower the ram. 404 402 311) 312) 313) 314) 220 AHA105538 AHA102319 NOTE Confirm that the hanger disc is securely fitted in the wheel disc hole when the wheel is just lifted off the ground. 3. After winding up the spare wheel sufficiently, make sure it is not loose (the tightening torque should be approximately 40 Nm (achieved by applying a force of 200 N at the end of the wheel nut wrench) then withdraw the jack handle. 4. Have your damaged tyre repaired as soon as possible. 315) 316) 317) To store the tools, jack and jack handle Reverse the removing procedure when storing the jack, jack handle and wheel nut wrench. Refer to “Tools, jack and jack handle”. WARNING 291) Use the jack only to replace wheels on the vehicle with which it is supplied or on other vehicles of the same model. Never use the jack for other purposes, such as lifting other car models. Never use the jack to carry out repairs under the vehicle. Incorrect positioning of the jack may cause the lifted vehicle to fall. Do not use the jack for loads higher than those shown on the label. 292) Have the wheel repaired and refitted as soon as possible. Do not apply grease to the bolt threads before fitting: they could come unscrewed. 293) The spare wheel supplied (for versions/markets, where provided) is specific for your vehicle. Therefore, it must not be used on other models. Do not use spare wheels of other models on your vehicle. The wheel bolts are specific for your vehicle: do not use them on different models and do not use bolts from other models on your car. 294) Use your hazard lights, warning triangle, etc. to show that your vehicle is stationary according to the regulations in force. Passengers should get out of the vehicle, particularly if it is heavily loaded, and wait for the wheel to be changed away from the traffic. Apply the handbrake. in the event of a wheel change on a slope or on unsurfaced roads, put any object as stop under the wheels. 295) Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the correct tyre when jacking up the vehicle. If the vehicle moves while jacked up, the jack could slip out of position, leading to an accident. 296) The pressure should be periodically checked and maintained at the specified pressure while the tyre is stowed. Driving with an insufficient tyre pressure can lead to an accident. If you have no choice but to drive with an insufficient tyre pressure, keep your speed down and inflate the tyre to the correct pressure as soon as possible. (Refer to “Tyre inflation pressures”). 297) Set the jack only at the positions shown here. If the jack is set at a wrong position, it could dent your vehicle or the jack might fall over and cause personal injury. 298) Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft surface. Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause personal injury. Always use the jack on a flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack, make sure there are no sand or pebbles under the jack base. 299) Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the tyre is raised off the ground. It is dangerous to raise the vehicle any higher. Do not get under your vehicle while using the jack. Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it sitting on the jack for a long time. Both are very dangerous. Do not use a jack except the one that came with your vehicle. The jack should not be used for any purpose other than to change a tyre. No one should be in your vehicle when using the jack. Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is on the jack. Do not turn the raised wheel. The tyres still on the ground could turn and make your vehicle fall off the jack. 300) Do not get under your vehicle while using the jack. 301) Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it sitting on the jack for a long time. Both are very dangerous. 302) Do not use a jack except the one that came with your vehicle. 303) The jack should not be used for any purpose other than to change a tyre. 304) No one should be in your vehicle when using the jack. 305) Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is on the jack. 221 IN AN EMERGENCY 222 306) Do not turn the raised wheel. The tyres still on the ground could turn and make your vehicle fall off the jack. 307) Handle the wheel carefully when changing the tyre, to avoid scratching the wheel surface. 308) Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem (J) facing outboard. If you cannot see the valve stem (J), you have installed the wheel backwards. Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel installed backwards can cause vehicle damage and result in an accident. 309) Be sure to open the release valve slowly. If it is opened quickly, the vehicle will drop abruptly and the jack may come out of position, causing a serious accident. 310) Never use your foot or a pipe extension for extra force in the wheel nut wrench. If you do so, you will tighten the nut too much. 311) The tyre pressure should be periodically checked and maintained at the specified pressure while the tyre is stowed. 312) After changing the tyre and driving the vehicle about 1,000 km, retighten the wheel nuts to make sure that they have not come loose. 313) If the steering wheel vibrates when driving after changing the tyre, we recommend you to have the tyres checked for balance. 314) Do not mix one type of tyre with another or use a different size from the one listed. This would cause early wear and poor handling. 315) The spare wheel should always be securely in position. If a flat tyre is changed, put the flat tyre in the spare wheel mounting position with the wheel outer surface upward, and use the wheel nut wrench to secure it firmly. 316) Never tamper with the inflation valve. Never introduce tools of any kind between rim and tyre. Check tyre and spare wheel pressure regularly, referring to the values shown in the "Technical specifications" section. 317) The moving components of the jack (screw and joints) can also cause injuries: do not touch them. If you come into contact with lubricating grease, clean yourself thoroughly. IMPORTANT 163) Avoid using different size tyres from the one listed and the combined use of different types of tyres, as this can affect driving safety. 164) Even if a wheel has the same rim size and offset as the specified type of wheel, its shape may prevent it from being fitted correctly. Consult an authorised Fiat Dealership before using wheels that you have. 165) When installing or removing the spare wheel, please observe the followings. If you do not follow them, it could result in break the spare wheel carrier. Do not use the power tool. Use the wheel nut wrench stowed on the vehicle. Do not apply a force of 400 N or more at the end of the wheel nut wrench. 166) Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or the nuts or they will tighten too much. 167) If the release valve is loosened too much (2 or more turns) in the anticlockwise direction, the jack’s oil will leak and the jack cannot be used. 168) Close the release valve slowly when lowering the vehicle, or the valve may be damaged. TOWING If your vehicle needs to be towed If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by a Fiat Dealership or a commercial tow truck service. In the following cases, transport the vehicle using a tow truck. The engine runs but the vehicle does not move, or an abnormal noise is produced. Inspection of the vehicle’s underside reveals that oil or some other fluid is leaking. If a wheel gets stuck in a ditch, do not try to tow the vehicle. Please contact a Fiat Dealership or a commercial tow truck service for assistance. Only when you cannot receive a towing service from a Fiat Dealership or commercial tow truck service, tow your vehicle carefully in accordance with the instructions given in “Emergency towing” in this part. The regulations concerning towing may differ from country to country. It is recommended that you obey the regulations of the area where you are driving your vehicle. Towing with rear wheels off the ground (Type C) Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position (manual transmission) or the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position (automatic transmission). Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” position or put the operation mode in ACC and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or tiedown strap. Never place the ignition switch in the “LOCK” position or put the operation mode in OFF when towing. Emergency towing If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a rope secured to the towing hook. If your vehicle is to be towed by another vehicle or if your vehicle tows another vehicle, pay careful attention to the following points. 405 AHE100108 Towing the vehicle by a tow truck 169) 170) 171) 172) 173) 318) 319) 320) Towing with front wheels off the ground (Type B) Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position (manual transmission) or the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position (automatic transmission). Release the parking brake. If your vehicle is to be towed by another vehicle 1. The front towing hooks are located as shown in the illustration. Secure the tow rope to the front towing hook. 174) 223 IN AN EMERGENCY 406 AHA102423 NOTE Using any part other than the designated towing hooks could result in damage to the vehicle body. Using a wire rope or metal chain can result in damage to the vehicle body. It is best to use a non-metallic rope. If you use a wire rope or metal chain, wrap it with cloth at any point where it touches the vehicle body. Use care that the tow rope is kept as horizontal as possible. An angled tow rope can damage the vehicle body. Secure the tow rope to the same side towing hook, to keep the tow rope as straight as possible. 2. Keep the engine running. If the engine is not running, perform the following operation to unlock the steering wheel. [Except for vehicles with the keyless operation system] On vehicles with manual transmission, turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or “ON” position. 224 On vehicles with automatic transmission, turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position. [For vehicles with the keyless operation system] On vehicles with manual transmission, put the operation mode in ACC or ON. On vehicles with automatic transmission, put the operation mode in ON. NOTE For vehicles equipped with the Start&Stop system, press the “Start&Stop OFF” switch to deactivate the Start&Stop system before stopping the vehicle. Refer to “To deactivate”. If your vehicle tows another vehicle (vehicles with rear towing hook only) 324) 325) 326) 327) 328) 329) The rear towing hook is located as shown in the illustration. Secure the tow rope to the rear towing hook. Otherwise, the instructions are the same as for “When being towed by another vehicle”. 175) 176) 3. Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position (manual transmission) or the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position (automatic transmission). 4. On 4WD vehicles, set the drive modes elector to “2H” position. 5. Turn on the hazard warning lamps if required by law. (Follow the local driving laws and regulations). 6. During towing make sure that close contact is maintained between the drivers of both vehicles, and that the vehicles travel at low speed. 321) 322) 323) 407 AHA104326 NOTE Using any part other than the designated towing hook could result in damage to the vehicle body. 177) NOTE Do not tow a vehicle heavier than your own vehicle. 408 AHZ101027 WARNING 318) Towing must not be made for getting past significant obstacles on the road (e.g. heaps of snow or material on the road surface). 319) Towing must be made exclusively on roads/streets; the device must not be used to recover the vehicle if it got off the road. 320) As your vehicle is equipped with ESC, if the vehicle is towed with the ignition switch in the “ON” position or the operation mode in ON and only the front wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the ground, the active traction control system may operate, resulting in an accident. 321) Avoid sudden braking, acceleration and steering wheel movements; such driving operation could cause damage to the towing hook or towing rope. People in the vicinity could be injured as a result. 322) When going down a long slope, the brakes may overheat, reducing effectiveness. Have your vehicle transport by a tow truck. 323) The person in the vehicle being towed must pay attention to the brake lamps of the towing vehicle and make sure the rope never becomes slack. 324) Do not use flexible cables for towing and avoid jerking. During towing operations, make sure that the fastened joint does not damage adjoining components. 325) When towing the vehicle comply with the specific rules of the Highway Code regarding the towing device and the behaviour on the road. 326) Do not start the engine while towing the vehicle. 327) Towing must be made exclusively on roads/streets; the device must not be used to recover the vehicle if it got off the road. 328) Towing must not be made for getting past significant obstacles on the road (e.g. heaps of snow or material on the road surface). 329) Towing must take place with the two vehicles (one towing, the other towed) aligned as much as possible; towing by roadside assistance vehicles, too, must take place with the two vehicles aligned as much as possible. IMPORTANT 169) This vehicle must not be towed by a tow truck using sling lift type equipment (Type A) as illustrated fig. 405. Using a sling lift will damage the bumper and front end. 170) On 4WD vehicles, be sure to set the drive mode-selector to “2H” position and transport the vehicle with the driving wheels on a carriage (Type D or E) as illustrated. Never try to tow with the drive mode-selector in “4H” or “4L” positions (easy select 4WD), “4H”, “4HLc” or “4LLc” positions (super select 4WD II) and with the front or rear wheels on the ground (Type B or C) as illustrated. This could result in the driving system damage or vehicle may jump at the carriage. If you cannot set the drive mode-selector to “2H” position or the transmission is malfunctioning or damaged, transport the vehicle with the all wheels on a carriage (Type D or E) as illustrated. 171) On 2WD vehicles, if the transmission is malfunctioning or damaged, transport the vehicle with the driving wheels on a carriage (Type C, D or E) as illustrated. 172) If you tow the vehicles with automatic transmission with the driving wheels on the ground (Type B) as illustrated, make sure that the towing speed and distance given below are never exceeded, causing damage to the transmission. Towing speed: 30 km/h Towing distance: 80 km For the towing speed and the towing distance, follow the local driving laws and regulations. 173) On vehicles with manual transmission, do not tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground (Type B) as illustrated. 225 IN AN EMERGENCY 174) Never tow an automatic transmission vehicle with the front wheels up (and the rear wheels on the ground) (Type B) when the automatic transmission fluid level is low. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. 175) When the engine is not running, the brake booster and power steering pump do not operate. This means higher brake depression force and higher steering effort are required. Therefore, vehicle operation is very difficult. 176) Do not leave the ignition switch in the “LOCK” position or the operation mode in OFF. The steering wheel will lock, causing loss of control. 177) On vehicles with super select 4WD II, when you are going to tow another vehicle, set the drive mode-selector to “4H” position. Selecting “2H” drive may increase the differential oil temperature, resulting in possible damage to the driving system. Further, the drive train will be subjected to excessive loading possibly leading to oil leakage, component seizure, or other serious faults. OPERATION UNDER ADVERSE DRIVING CONDITIONS On a flooded road Avoid flooded roads. In the event driving flooded roads, doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle. Engine stalling Short in electrical components Engine damage caused by water immersion After driving flooded roads, be sure to have an inspection at a Fiat Dealership and take the necessary measures or repair. When driving in rain, or water-covered roads, or through a car wash, water could enter the brake discs, resulting in temporarily ineffective brakes. In such cases, lightly depress the brake pedal to see if the brakes operate properly. If they do not, lightly depress the pedal several times while driving in order to dry the brake pads. On a wet road When driving in rain or on a road with many puddles a layer of water may form between the tyres and the road surface. This reduces a tyre’s frictional resistance on the road, resulting in loss of steering stability and braking capability. 226 To cope with this, observe the following items: (a) Drive your vehicle at a slow speed. (b) Do not drive on worn tyres. (c) Always maintain the specified tyre inflation pressures. On a snow-covered or frozen road When driving on a snow-covered or frozen road, it is recommended that you use snow tyres or snow traction device (tyre chains). Refer to the “Snow tyres” and “Snow traction device (tyre chains)” sections. Avoid high-speed operation, sudden acceleration, abrupt brake application and sharp cornering. Depressing the brake pedal during travel on snowy or icy roads may cause tyre slippage and skidding. When traction between the tyres and the road is reduced the wheels may skid and the vehicle cannot readily be brought to a stop by conventional braking techniques. Braking will differ, depending upon whether you have anti-lock brake system (ABS). If you do have ABS, brake by pressing the brake pedal hard, and keeping it pressed. If you do not have ABS, pump the brake pedal with short rapid jabs, each time fully applying and fully releasing for greatest effect. Allow extra distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you, and avoid sudden braking. Accumulation of ice on the braking system can cause the wheels to lock. Pull away from a standstill slowly after confirming safety around the vehicle. 330) On a bumpy or rutted road Drive as slow as possible when driving on bumpy or rutted roads. 178) FUSIBLE LINKS FUSES The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if a large current attempts to flow through certain electrical systems. In case of a melted fuse link, we recommend you to have your vehicle inspected. For the fusible links, please refer to “Passenger compartment fuse location table” and “Engine compartment fuse location table”. Fuse block location To prevent damage to the electrical system due to short-circuiting or overloading, each individual circuit is provided with a fuse. There are fuse blocks in the passenger compartment and in the engine compartment. 331) WARNING WARNING 330) Do not press the accelerator pedal rapidly. If the wheels break free of the ice, the vehicle could suddenly start moving and possibly cause an accident. IMPORTANT Passenger compartment (LHD vehicles) The fuse blocks in the passenger compartment are located behind the fuse lid in front of the driver’s seat at the position shown in the illustration. Pull the fuse lid to remove it. 331) Fusible links must not be replaced by any other device. Failing to fit the correct fusible may result in fire in the vehicle, property destruction and serious or fatal injuries at any time. 178) The impact on tyres and/or wheels when driving on a bumpy or rutted road can damage the tyre and/or wheel. 409 AHA102612 Passenger compartment (RHD vehicles) The fuse block in the passenger compartment is located behind the glove box at the position shown in the illustration. 227 IN AN EMERGENCY Fuse load capacity The fuse capacity and the names of electrical systems protected by the fuses are indicated on the inside of the fuse lid (LHD vehicles), the back side of the glove box (RHD vehicles) and inside of the fuse block cover (inside of the engine compartment). 410 AHA102713 AHA102742 1. Open the glove box. 2. While pressing the side of the glove box, unhook the left and right hooks (A) and lower the glove box. Engine compartment In the engine compartment, the fuse block is located as shown in the illustration. 411 413 AHA102739 3. Remove the glove box fastener (B), and then remove the glove box. 228 412 A — Push the tab. B — Remove the cover. AHA102726 NOTE Spare fuses are provided in the fuse block of the engine compartment. Always use a fuse of the same capacity for replacement. Passenger compartment fuse location table 414 AA0103837 No. Electrical system Capacity 1 Tail lamp (left) 7.5 A 2 Cigarette lighter 15 A 3 Ignition coil 10 A 4 Starter motor 7.5 A 5 Sunroof 20 A 6 Accessory socket 15 A 229 IN AN EMERGENCY No. Electrical system Capacity 7 Tail lamp (right) 7.5 A 8 Outside rear view mirrors 7.5 A 9 Engine control unit 7.5 A 10 Control unit 7.5 A 11 Rear fog lamp 10 A 12 Central door lock 15 A 13 Room lamp 15 A 14 Rear window wiper 15 A 15 Gauge 10 A 16 Relay 7.5 A 17 Heated seat 20 A 18 Option 10 A 19 Heated door mirror 7.5 A 20 Windscreen wiper 20 A 21 Reversing lamps 7.5 A 22 Demister 30 A 23 Heater 30 A 24 Power seat 40 A* 25 Radio 10 A 26 Electronic controlled unit 20 A *: Fusible link Some fuses may not be installed on your vehicle, depending on the vehicle model or specifications. The table above shows the main equipment corresponding to each fuse. 230 Engine compartment fuse location table 415 No. AA3008441 Electrical system Capacities SBF1 Fuse (+B) 30 A* SBF2 Anti-lock braking system 30 A* SBF3 Ignition switch 40 A* SBF4 Electric window control 30 A* BF1 — — BF2 DC-DC (AUDIO) 30 A 231 IN AN EMERGENCY No. Electrical system Capacities F1 Headlamp low beam (left) 15 A F2 Headlamp low beam (right) 15 A F3 Headlamp high beam (left) 10 A F4 Headlamp high beam (right) 10 A F5 Horn 10 A F6 Front fog lamps 15 A F7 Daytime running lamps 10 A F8 Radiator fan motor 20 A F9 T/F 20 A F10 — — F11 Headlamp washer 20 A F12 Stop lamps (Brake lamps) 15 A F13 Ignition coil 10 A F14 Engine control 7.5 A F15 Alternator 7.5 A F16 Hazard warning flasher 15 A F17 Automatic transmission 20 A F18 Air conditioning 20 A ETV 15 A Fuel line heater 20 A F20 Starter 7.5 A F21 — — F22 Fuel pump 15 A F19 232 No. Electrical system Capacities F23 Engine 20 A F24 — — #1 Spare fuse 20 A #2 Spare fuse 30 A *: Fusible link Some fuses may not be installed on your vehicle, depending on the vehicle model or specifications. The table above shows the main equipment corresponding to each fuse. The fuse block does not contain spare 7.5 A, 10 A or 15 A fuses. If one of these fuses burns out, substitute with the following fuse. 7.5 A: Outside rear view mirrors 10 A: Option 15 A: Cigarette lighter When using a substitute fuse, replace with a fuse of the correct capacity as soon as possible. Identification of fuse Capacity Colour 7.5 A Brown 10 A Red 15 A Blue 20 A Yellow 30 A Green (fuse type) / Pink (fusible link type) 40 A Green (fusible link type) 233 IN AN EMERGENCY Fuse replacement WARNING 332) 333) 334) 335) 336) 337) 179) 1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off the electrical circuit concerned and place the ignition switch in the “LOCK” position or put the operation mode in OFF. 2. Remove the fuse puller (A) from the inside of the fuse block in the engine compartment. 417 AA0110129 B. Fuse is OK C. Blown fuse NOTE If any system does not function but the fuse corresponding to that system is normal, there may be a fault in the system elsewhere. We recommend you to have your vehicle checked. 4. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity by using the fuse puller. 416 AA0109871 3. Referring to the fuse load capacity table, check the fuse pertaining to the problem. 332) Never replace a fuse with another with a higher amp rating; DANGER OF FIRE. If a general protection fuse (MEGA-FUSE, MIDI-FUSE) is activated, contact a Fiat Dealership. 333) If the newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time, we recommend you to have the electrical system checked to find the cause and rectify it. 334) Never use a fuse with a larger capacity than specified or a substitute (such as a cable or foil). Doing so could cause the circuit wires to overheat and create a fire. 335) Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or other material. 336) Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition key has been removed and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. 337) If a general protection fuse for safety systems (airbag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, transmission system) or steering system blows, contact a Fiat Dealership. IMPORTANT 179) If it is necessary to wash the engine compartment, take care not to directly hit the fuse box and the window wiper motor with the water jet 418 234 AA0087304 REPLACEMENT OF LAMP BULBS 338) 339) 340) 341) 342) 343) 344) 345) Before replacing a bulb, ensure the lamp is off. Do not touch the glass part of the new bulb with your bare fingers; the skin oil left on the glass will evaporate when the bulb gets hot and the vapour will condense on the reflector and dim the surface. 419 AA0030717 NOTE If you are unsure of how to carry out the work as required, we recommend you to consult a specialist. Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body when removing a lamp and lens. When it rains, or when the vehicle has been washed, the inside of the lens sometimes becomes foggy. This is the same phenomenon as when window glass mists up on a humid day, and does not indicate a functional problem. When the lamp is switched on, the heat will remove the fog. However, if water gathers inside the lamp, we recommend you to have the lamp checked. 5. Side turn-signal lamps (on fender) *1, *2: 5W 6. Side turn-signal lamps (on outside rear view mirror) *1 Bulb location and capacity When replacing a bulb, use a new bulb with the same wattage and colour. Vehicles with high intensity discharge headlamps 1. Front turn-signal lamps: 21 W (PY21W) 2. Position lamps/Daytime running lamps 3. Headlamps, high/low beam: 25 W (D5S) 4. Front fog lamps: 19 W (H16) 5. Side turn-signal lamps (on fender) *1, *2: 5W 6. Side turn-signal lamps (on outside rear view mirror) *1 *1: if so equipped. *2: Have the lamps bulbs replaced at a Fiat Dealership. Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types. NOTE It is not possible to repair or replace only the bulb for the side turn-signal lamp (on fender). Check with a Fiat Dealership when the lamp need to be repaired or replaced. Outside Front 420 AHA104603 Except for vehicles with high intensity discharge headlamps 1. Position lamps: 5 W (W5W) 2. Front turn-signal lamps: 21 W (PY21W/P21W) 3. Headlamps, high/low beam: 60/55 W (H4) 4. Type 1 Front fog lamps: 35 W (H8) Daytime running lamps: 13 W (P13W) Type 2 Daytime running lamps: 13 W (P13W) 235 IN AN EMERGENCY The following lamps uses LEDs rather than bulbs. For repair and replacement, contact a Fiat dealership. Side turn-signal lamps (on outside rear view mirror) Position lamps (Vehicles with high intensity discharge headlamps) Daytime running lamps (Vehicles with high intensity discharge headlamps) High-mounted stop lamp Rear 423 Inside AHA103954 Straight arrow direction indicates the front of the vehicle NOTE When moving the upper cover towards the rear of the vehicle, remove the harness from the air cleaner hooks (C). 421 AH4100040 1. High-mounted stop lamp 2. Tail and stop lamps: 21/5 W (P21/5W) 3. Rear turn-signal lamps: 21 W (PY21W) 4. Rear fog lamp (driver’s side): 21W (P21W) Reversing lamps: 21 W (P21W) 5. Licence plate lamps: 5 W (W5W) Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types. 236 422 AHA106522 1. Rear room lamp: 8 W 2. Front room & map lamps*: 7.5 W 3. Glove box lamp: 1.4 W Headlamps (halogen bulb) 1. When replacing the bulb on the right side of the vehicle, remove the clamps (A) of the air cleaner filter and move the upper cover (B) towards the rear of the vehicle. 424 AHZ100961 Arrow direction indicates the front of the vehicle After replacing the bulb, make sure that the hinges at the front of the vehicle are firmly set. Position lamps 1. When replacing the bulb on the left side of the vehicle, remove the clip (A) holding down the washer tank spout and move the spout towards the rear of the vehicle. 425 AHZ100974 2. Disconnect the connector (A). 427 AHA102784 4. Unhook the spring (C) which secures the bulb, and then remove the headlamp bulb. 429 AHA103967 2. Turn the bulb socket anticlockwise to remove it. And remove the bulb from the socket by pulling out. 426 3. Remove the sealing cover (B). AHA102771 428 AHA102797 5. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. 430 AHA102801 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. 237 IN AN EMERGENCY 2. Turn the bulb socket anticlockwise to remove it. And remove the bulb from the socket by turning it anticlockwise while pressing in. Front turn-signal lamps Except for vehicles with high intensity discharge headlamps 1. When replacing the bulb on the left side of the vehicle, remove the clip (A) holding down the washer tank spout and move the spout towards the rear of the vehicle. 432 AHA102814 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. 431 AHA103967 2. Turn the bulb socket anticlockwise to remove it. And remove the bulb from the socket by turning it anticlockwise while pressing in. Vehicles with high intensity discharge headlamps 1. When replacing the bulb on the left side of the vehicle, remove the clip (A) holding down the washer tank spout and move the spout towards the rear of the vehicle. 433 238 AHA103967 434 AHA102827 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. Front fog lamps* / Daytime running lamps* 1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver with a cloth over its tip at the edge of the cover (A) and pry gently to remove the cover. 435 AHA102667 437 AHZ101056 3. Turn the socket anticlockwise to remove it. 2. Remove the 3 screws (B) and remove the lamp unit. 439 AA0103202 5. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse Rear combination lamps 1. Open the rear gate (refer to “Rear gate”). 2. Remove the screws (A) that hold the lamp unit. 436 AHA102670 NOTE When unfastening the screws of the fog lamp, be careful not to mistakenly move the beam position adjustment screw (C). 438 AA0112846 D. Front fog lamp E. Daytime running lamp 4. While holding down the tab, pull out the bulb 440 AHA102872 3. Move the lamp unit toward the rear of the vehicle and remove the clips (B). 239 IN AN EMERGENCY 5. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. When mounting the lamp unit, align the pins (F) and clip (G) on the lamp unit with the holes (H) in the body. 441 NOTE Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of the screwdriver in order to avoid scratching the lens and the body. 2. Remove the socket and bulb assembly together by turning it anticlockwise, and then remove the bulb by pulling out. AHA102885 4. Remove each socket and bulb assembly by turning it anticlockwise. 443 AHA102902 Licence plate lamps 1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver into the lamp assembly and pry gently to remove it. 442 AHA102928 AHA102898 C. Tail and stop lamp Remove the bulb from the socket by turning it anticlockwise while pressing in. D. Rear turn-signal lamp Remove the bulb by pulling it out. E. Rear fog lamp (driver’s side)*/Reversing lamp Remove the bulb by pulling it out. 240 445 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. NOTE When mounting the lamp unit, put the hook (A) on the right side of the lamp unit into the body first. 444 AHA102915 446 AHZ100639 NOTE When installing the lens, align the 2 tabs on the lens with the holes on the vehicle side. Front room & map lamps* 1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver into the notch of the lens and pry gently to remove it. Remove the bulb from the lamp holder. 448 447 AHA102931 AHA102944 Rear room lamp — Type 1 1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver into the notch of the lens and pry gently to remove it. Remove the bulb from the lamp holder. NOTE Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of the screwdriver in order to avoid scratching the lens. 2. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. NOTE When installing the lens, align the 2 tabs on the lens with the holes on the vehicle side. 449 450 AHA102960 NOTE When installing the lens, fit the two tabs on one side of the lens into the holes on the vehicle side before fitting the two tabs on the opposite side of the lens into the holes on the vehicle side. AHA102957 NOTE Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of the screwdriver in order to avoid scratching the lens. 2. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. 451 AHZ101043 241 IN AN EMERGENCY Rear room lamp — Type 2 1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver into the notch of the lens and pry gently to remove it. Remove the bulb from the lamp holder. 453 AHZ101043 Glove box lamp Have the glove box lamp bulb replaced at a Fiat dealership. 452 AHA104645 WARNING NOTE Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of the screwdriver in order to avoid scratching the lens. 2. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. NOTE When installing the lens, fit the two tabs on one side of the lens into the holes on the vehicle side before fitting the two tabs on the opposite side of the lens into the holes on the vehicle side. 242 338) Halogen bulbs contain pressurised gas; in the case of breakage they may burst. 339) Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after being turned off. When replacing a bulb, wait for it to cool sufficiently before touching it. You could otherwise be burnt. 340) Handle halogen lamp bulb with care. The gas inside halogen lamp bulb is highly pressurized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a halogen lamp bulb can cause it to shatter. 341) Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with a bare hand, dirty glove, etc. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated. If the glass surface is dirty, it must be cleaned with alcohol, paint thinner, etc., and refit it after drying it thoroughly. 342) Always consult a specialist when repairing or replacing the bulbs of high intensity discharge headlamps. This is because the power circuit, bulbs and electrodes generate a high voltage that could cause an electric shock. 343) Modifications or repairs to the electric system that are not carried out properly or do not take the system technical specifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire. 344) Only replace bulbs when the engine is off. Also ensure that the engine is cold, to prevent the risk of burns. 345) Do not install commercially available LED-type bulbs. Commercially available LED-type bulbs could adversely affect the operation of the vehicle, such as by preventing the lamps and other vehicle equipment from operating properly. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Correct maintenance permits the performance of the car to be maintained over time, as well as limited running costs and safeguarding the efficiency of the safety systems. This chapter explains how. SERVICE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . SCHEDULED SERVICING PLAN PERIODIC CHECKS . . . . . . . . DEMANDING VEHICLE USE . . . CHECKING LEVELS . . . . . . . . CATALYTIC CONVERTER . . . . . ENGINE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENGINE COOLANT. . . . . . . . . WASHER FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . BRAKE FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . . CLUTCH FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . POWER STEERING FLUID . . . . BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WIPER BLADE REPLACEMENT . GENERAL MAINTENANCE . . . . VEHICLE CARE PRECAUTIONS. CLEANING THE INTERIOR OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . CLEANING THE EXTERIOR OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . TYRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 .245 .250 .250 .251 .252 .252 .253 .255 .255 .256 .257 .258 .260 .261 .261 . .262 . .263 . .267 243 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SERVICE PRECAUTIONS 346) 347) 348) 349) 350) 351) 352) 353) Adequate care of your vehicle at regular intervals serves to preserve the value and appearance as long as possible. Maintenance items as described in this owner’s manual can be performed by the owner. We recommend you to have the periodic inspection and maintenance performed by a Fiat dealership. In the event a malfunction or a problem is discovered, we recommend you to have it checked and repaired. This section contains information on inspection maintenance procedures that you can do yourself. Follow the instructions and cautions for each of the various procedures. WARNING 346) When checking or servicing the inside of the engine compartment, make sure the engine is switched off and has had a chance to cool down. 347) If it is necessary to do work in the engine compartment with the engine running, be especially careful that your clothing, hair, etc., does not become caught by the cooling fan, drive belts, or other moving parts. 244 348) After performing the maintenance work, make sure that no tools or cloths are left behind in the engine compartment. If they are left behind, a fire or damage to the vehicle may occur. 349) The cooling fan can turn on automatically even if the engine is not running. Turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” position or put the operation mode in OFF to be safe while you work in the engine compartment. 350) Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames around fuel or battery. The fumes are flammable. 351) Be extremely cautious when working around the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulphuric acid. 352) Do not get under your vehicle with just the body jack supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands. 353) Improper handling of components and materials used in the vehicle can endanger your personal safety. We recommend you to consult a specialist for necessary information. SCHEDULED SERVICING PLAN DIESEL ENGINE 4N15 Thousand of miles 12,5 25 37,5 50 62,5 75 87,5 100 112 125 Thousands of kilometers or 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, boot, passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (1) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Check battery condition ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Change engine coolant Adjust the tappet clearance (where there is no hydraulic clearance adjustment) ● ● ● Check exhaust emissions/smokiness ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Use the diagnosis socket to check supply/engine management systems operation, emissions and, for versions/markets, where provided, engine oil degradation ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (1) Always only use the liquids shown in the handbook for topping up after having checked that the system is not damaged. 245 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Thousand of miles 12,5 25 37,5 50 62,5 75 87,5 100 112 125 Thousands of kilometers or 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Perform the "Small Injection Quantity Learning” procedure ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Lubricate the appropriate points of the transmission shaft ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Visually inspect condition of: underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system), rubber elements (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Visually inspect the integrity of the steering components and their fixings (including gaskets and covers) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Visually inspect the condition of the turbocompressor flexible air intake couplings and oil conduits (where present) ● ● ● ● Check windscreen/rear window wiper blade position/wear ● ● ● ● ● Check operation of the windscreen wiper/washer system and adjust jets, if necessary ● ● ● ● ● Check cleanliness of bonnet and luggage compartment locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage 246 ● ● ● ● ● ● Thousand of miles 12,5 25 37,5 50 62,5 75 87,5 100 112 125 Thousands of kilometers or 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Visually inspect conditions and wear of front disc brake pads and operation of pad wear indicator ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Visually inspect condition and wear of the rear drum brake lining ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Check the front and rear wheel bearing clearances Visually check for any fluid leaks from the automatic transmission (if leaks are found, check the oil level) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Change the automatic transmission oil (14) Visually check for any fluid leaks from the manual transmission (if leaks are found, check the oil level) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Change the manual transmission oil ● Visually inspect the integrity of the suspension system components and their fixings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Check handbrake lever travel and adjust, if necessary ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Check the brake and clutch pedal play ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (14) To be done only in case of heavy use, only on a mileage basis. 247 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Thousand of miles 12,5 25 37,5 50 62,5 75 87,5 100 112 125 Thousands of kilometers or 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Visually inspect conditions and check the tension of the accessory drive belts ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Visually check for any fluid leaks from the front and rear differentials (if leaks are found, check the oil level) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Change front and rear differential oil Visually check for any fluid leaks from the transfer case (if leaks are found, check the oil level) ● ● ● ● Change transfer case oil Change engine oil and replace oil filter ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Replace fuel filter cartridge (4) ● ● ● ● Replace air cleaner cartridge (5) Change the brake fluid (6) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (3) The belt should only be replaced if damage/wear is found during the periodic inspection. (4) In case of refueling with a type of diesel that does not comply with the Euro regulations, it is recommended to change this filter each 20,000 km. (5) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 20,000 km. (6) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage. 248 ● (3) Replace accessory drive belts Check the air filter cartridge for obstructions or damage ● ● Thousand of miles 12,5 25 37,5 50 62,5 75 87,5 100 112 125 Thousands of kilometers or 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Replace the passenger compartment air cleaner / pollen filter (where provided) 249 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 250 PERIODIC CHECKS Before long journeys, check and, if necessary, restore: engine coolant level; brake fluid level; windscreen washer fluid level; operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, etc.); tyre inflation pressure and condition; tyre alignment; operation of screen washer/wiper system and positioning/wear of windscreen/rear window wiper blades. To ensure that the vehicle is always efficient and well maintained, it is advisable to make sure that you carry out the above operations regularly (approximately every 1000 km and every 3000 km for checking and topping up engine oil is advisable). DEMANDING VEHICLE USE If the vehicle is mostly used in one of the following conditions: towing a trailer or caravan; dusty roads; short, repeated journeys (less than 7-8 km) at sub-zero outside temperatures; engine often idling or driving long distances at low speeds or long periods of inactivity; the following checks must be carried out more often than indicated in the Scheduled Servicing Plan: check front disc brake pad conditions and wear; check cleanliness of bonnet and boot locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage; visually inspect conditions of: engine, gearbox, transmission, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes) and rubber elements (boots - sleeves bushes - etc.); check battery charge and battery fluid level (electrolyte); visually inspect condition of the accessory drive belts; check and, if necessary, change engine oil and replace oil filter; check and, if necessary, replace pollen filter. CHECKING LEVELS 454 VANODIESEL3231 1. Engine coolant reservoir 2. Brake fluid reservoir 3. Clutch fluid reservoir (where provided) 4. Engine oil cap 5. Engine oil level gauge 6. Power steering fluid reservoir 7. Washer fluid reservoir 8. Battery A — RHD versions 354) 355) WARNING 354) Never smoke when performing operations in the engine compartment. Flammable gases and fumes may be present and risk igniting. 355) Be very careful when working in the engine compartment when the engine is hot: you may get burned. Remember that the fan may start up if the engine is hot: this could injure you. Scarves, ties and other loose clothing might be pulled by moving parts. 251 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE CATALYTIC CONVERTER To check and refill engine oil 356) 357) The exhaust gas scavenging devices used with catalytic converter are extremely efficient for the reduction of noxious gases. The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust system. It is important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage. A — Minimum level B — Maximum level C — Oil replacement indication mark NOTE Use fuel of the type recommended in “Fuel selection”. WARNING 455 356) As with any vehicle, do not park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as dry grass or leaves can come in contact with a hot exhaust since a fire could occur. 252 ENGINE OIL AHA102654 The engine oil used has a significant effect on the engine’s performance, service life and startability. Be sure to use oil of the recommended quality and appropriate viscosity. All engines consume a certain amount of oil during normal operation. Therefore, it is important to check the oil level at regular intervals or before starting a long trip. 1. Park the car on a horizontal surface. 2. Switch off the engine. 3.Wait a few minutes. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean cloth. 5. Reinsert the dipstick as far as it goes. 6. Remove the dipstick and read the oil level, which should always be within the range indicated. 7. If the oil level is below the specified limit, remove the cap located on the cylinder head cover and add enough oil to raise the level to within the specified range. Do not overfill to avoid engine damage. Be sure to use the specified engine oil and do not mix various types of oil. 8. After adding oil, close the cap securely. 9. Confirm the oil level by repeating step 4 to 6. NOTE Check or refill the oil according to the following manner. When the oil level is checked in step 6 above, check it on a low side of the dipstick because it is different in appearance of oil level in the two sides of the dipstick. On vehicles without diesel particulate filter (DPF), the oil level should be within the range (A) to (B) on the dipstick. On vehicles with DPF, the oil level should be within the range (A) to (C) (oil replacement indication mark) on the dipstick. If the oil level is beyond the oil replacement indication mark (C), replace the oil as soon as possible. Then, the oil should be refilled to the maximum level (B). On vehicle with DPF, the engine oil will be increased due to a few of the fuel gets mixed in the engine oil when the DPF regenerates to burn away the PM (particulate matter). However, it does not indicate a malfunction. The engine oil level will be increased due to an amount of the fuel being mixed in the engine oil when the DPF regenerates to burn away the PM (particulate matter). It does not indicate a malfunction. In the following conditions, the engine oil level may increase easily. We recommend you to have it checked frequently.: frequent driving at uphill and downhill; frequent driving at high altitudes; frequent and extended idling; frequent driving through a traffic jam. NOTE The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the vehicle is subjected to severe conditions, requiring earlier oil replacement. Please refer to the maintenance schedule. Protect the environment It is illegal to pollute drains, water courses and soil. Use authorized waste collection facilities, including civic amenity sites and garages providing facilities for disposal of used oil and used oil filters. If in doubt, contact your local authority for advice on disposal. ENGINE COOLANT To check the coolant level A transparent coolant reserve tank (A) is located in the engine compartment. The coolant level in this tank should be kept between the “L” (LOW) and “F” (FULL) marks when measured while the engine is cold. WARNING 357) If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for the engine to cool down before loosening the filler cap, particularly for vehicles with aluminium cap (where provided). WARNING: risk of burns! 358) Prolonged and repeated contact may cause serious skin diorders, including dermatitis and cancer. 359) Avoid contact with the skin as far as possible and wash thoroughly after any contact. 360) Keep use engine olis out of reach of children. Selection of engine oil Refer to “Refill Capacities” under Technical Specifications. Safety and disposal information for used engine oil 456 AHM100742 358) 359) 360) 253 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 254 To add coolant The cooling system is a closed system and normally the loss of coolant should be very slight. A noticeable drop in the coolant level could indicate leakage. If this occurs, we recommend you to have the system checked as soon as possible. If the level should drop below the “L” (LOW) level on the reserve tank, open the lid and add coolant. Also, if the reserve tank is completely empty, remove the radiator cap (B) and add coolant until the level reaches the filler neck. 361) 362) Anti-freeze The engine coolant contains an ethylene glycol anti-corrosion agent. Some parts of the engine are cast aluminium alloy, and periodic changing of the engine coolant is necessary to prevent corrosion of these parts. Use the recommended coolant by Fiat or equivalent (similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, nonnitrate and nonborate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid technology). Fiat genuine coolant has excellent protection against corrosion and rust formation of all metals including aluminium and can avoid blockages in the radiator, heater, cylinder head, engine block, etc. Because of the necessity of this anti-corrosion agent, the coolant must not be replaced with plain water even in summer. The required concentration of anti-freeze differs depending on the expected ambient temperature. Above -35 °C: 50 % concentration of antifreeze Below -35 °C: 60 % concentration of antifreeze 180) 181) 182) 183) 184) During cold weather If the temperatures in your area drop below freezing, there is the danger that the coolant in the engine or radiator could freeze and cause severe damage to the engine and/or radiator. Add a sufficient amount of antifreeze to the coolant to prevent it from freezing. The concentration should be checked before the start of cold weather and anti-freeze added to the system if necessary. WARNING 361) The used engine oil and the filter that has been replaced contain substances that are harmful to the environment. To change the oil and filters, we advise you to contact a Fiat Dealership. 362) Do not open the radiator cap (B) while the engine is hot. The coolant system is under pressure and any hot coolant escaping could cause severe burns. IMPORTANT 180) Do not use alcohol or methanol anti-freeze or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol anti-freeze. The use of an improper anti-freeze can cause corrosion of the aluminium components. 181) Concentrations exceeding 60 % will result in a reduction of both the anti-freeze and cooling performance thus adversely affecting the engine. 182) Do not top up with water only. 183) PARAFLU UP anti-freeze is used in the engine cooling system. Use fluid of the same type as that contained in the cooling system for any top-ups. PARAFLU UP cannot be mixed with any other type of fluid. If this happens, do not start the engine under any circumstances and contact a Fiat Dealership. 184) Do not use water to adjust the concentration of coolant. WASHER FLUID BRAKE FLUID Open the washer fluid reservoir cap and check the level of washer fluid with the dipstick. If the level is low, replenish the container with washer fluid. NOTE The washer fluid container server serves the windscreen and headlamps (if so equipped). WARNING 363) Do not travel if the windscreen washer reservoir is empty: using the windscreen washer is essential for improving visibility. Repeated operation of the system without fluid could damage or cause rapid deterioration of some system components. 364) Some commercial additives for windscreen washer fluid are flammable. The engine compartment contains hot components which may start a fire. To check the fluid level Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. The brake fluid level must be between the “MAX” and “MIN” marks on the reservoir. 458 457 AHA104599 During cold weather To ensure proper operation of the washers at low temperatures, use a fluid containing an anti-freezing agent. 363) 364) AHA102566 The brake fluid level is monitored by a float. When the brake fluid level falls below the “MIN” mark, the brake fluid warning lamp lights up. The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the brake pads, but this does not indicate any abnormality. If the brake fluid level falls markedly in a short length of time, it indicates leaks from the brake system. If this occurs, we recommend you to have the vehicle checked. 255 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 256 Fluid type Use brake fluid conforming to DOT3 or DOT4. The brake fluid is hygroscopic. Too much moisture in the brake fluid will adversely affect the brake system, reducing the brake performance. In addition, the brake fluid reservoir is equipped with a special cap to prevent the entrance of air, and this cap should not be removed. 365) 366) 367) 368) 369) 370) 371) 372) 185) 186) 187) 370) Use only the specified brake fluid. Do not mix or add different brand of brake fluid to prevent chemical reaction. Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch, mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This will damage the seals. 371) Clean the filler cap before removing and close the cap securely after maintenance. 372) Brake fluid is poisonous and highly corrosive. In the event of accidental contact, immediately wash the affected parts with water and mild soap. Then rinse thoroughly. Call a doctor immediately if swallowed. WARNING IMPORTANT 365) Prevent power steering fluid from coming into contact with hot engine parts: it is flammable. 366) Some commercial windscreen washer additives are flammable. The engine compartment contains hot parts which could start a fire on contact. 367) Do not travel with the windscreen washer reservoir empty: the windscreen washer is essential for improving visibility. 368) The cooling system is pressurised. If necessary, only replace the plug with another original one or the operation of the system may be adversely affected. Do not remove the reservoir plug when the engine is hot: risk of burns. 369) Take care in handling brake fluid as it is harmful to the eyes, may irritate your skin and also damage to painted surfaces. 185) Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to prevent the brake fluid from deteriorating except maintenance. 186) Prevent brake fluid, which is highly corrosive, from coming into contact with painted parts. Should it happen, immediately wash with water. 187) The symbol , on the brake fluid container indicates if a brake fluid is synthetic or mineral-based. Use of mineral type fluids will damage the special rubber seals of the braking system beyond repair. CLUTCH FLUID To check the fluid level The clutch fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when performing other underhood service. In addition, the system should be checked for leakage at the same time. Check to make certain that the clutch fluid level is always between the “MAX” and “MIN” level markings on the fluid reservoir. A rapid fluid loss indicates a leak in the clutch system which should be immediately inspected by a Fiat Dealership. 459 AHA106519 Fluid type Brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 should be used. The reservoir cap must be fully tightened to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture. DO NOT ALLOW PETROLEUM- BASED FLUID TO CONTACT, MIX WITH, OR OTHERWISE CONTAMINATE THE BRAKE FLUID. SEAL DAMAGE WILL RESULT. 373) WARNING POWER STEERING FLUID IMPORTANT 374) 3) To check the fluid level Check the fluid level in the reservoir while the engine is idling. Check to make certain that the power steering fluid level is always between the “MAX” and “MIN” level markings on the fluid reservoir and top up the fluid, if necessary. 3) Power steering fluid consumption is extremely low; if another top-up is required after only a short period of time, have the system checked for leaks at a Fiat Dealership. 373) Clutch fluid is poisonous and highly corrosive. In the event of accidental contact, immediately wash the affected parts with water and mild soap. Then rinse thoroughly. Call a doctor immediately if swallowed. 460 AHA102582 WARNING 374) Prevent power steering fluid from coming into contact with hot engine parts: it is flammable. 257 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE BATTERY 4) The condition of the battery is very important for quick starting of the engine and proper functioning of the vehicle’s electrical system. Regular inspection and care are especially important in cold weather. 375) 376) 377) 378) 379) 380) 381) 382) Checking battery electrolyte level 461 AHA102595 Check the electrolyte level at least once every four weeks, depending on the operating conditions. If the battery is not used, it will discharge by itself with time. Check it once every four weeks and charge with low current as necessary. During cold weather The capacity of the battery is reduced at low temperatures. This is an inevitable result of its chemical and physical properties. This is why a very cold battery, particularly one that is not fully charged will only deliver a fraction of the starter current which is normally available. We recommend you to have the battery checked before the start of cold weather and, if necessary, have it charged or replaced. This does not only ensure reliable starting, but a battery which is kept fully charged also has a longer life. NOTE Loosen the nut (B), and then disconnect the battery cable from the positive (+) terminal. 462 AHZ101072 463 AHZ101157 Disconnection and connection The electrolyte level must be between the specified limit on the outside of the battery. Replenish with distilled water as necessary. The inside of the battery is divided into several compartments; remove the cap from each compartment and fill to the upper mark. Do not top up beyond the upper mark because spillage during driving could cause damage. 258 188) 189) 190) 191) 192) 193) 194) 195) To disconnect the battery cable, stop the engine, first disconnect the negative (-) terminal and then the positive (+) terminal. When connecting the battery, first connect the positive (+) terminal and then the negative (-) terminal. NOTE Open the terminal cover (A) before disconnecting or connecting the positive (+) terminal of the battery. NOTE Keep the terminals clean. After the battery is connected, apply terminal protection grease. To clean the terminals, use lukewarm water. NOTE Check to see if the battery is securely installed and cannot be moved during travel. Also check each terminal for tightness. NOTE When the vehicle is to be left unused for a long period of time, remove the battery and store it in a place where the battery fluid will not freeze. The battery should be stored only in a fully charged condition. WARNING 375) Battery liquid is poisonous and corrosive. Avoid contact with skin and eyes. Keep naked flames and sources of sparks away from the battery: risk of explosion and fire. 376) Before performing any operation on the electrical system, disconnect the negative battery cable through the suitable terminal, after having waited at least one minute from turning the ignition key to STOP. 377) Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away from the battery because the battery could explode. 378) The battery electrolyte is extremely caustic. Do not allow it to come in contact with your eyes, skin, clothing, or the painted surfaces of the vehicle. Spilt electrolyte should be flushed immediately with ample amounts of water. Irritation to eyes or skin from contact with electrolyte requires immediate medical attention. 379) Ventilate when charging or using the battery in an enclosed space. 380) Always wear protective eye goggles when working near the battery. 381) Keep it out of reach of children. 382) Using the battery with insufficient fluid irreparably damages the battery and may cause an explosion. IMPORTANT 188) Incorrect assembly of electrical and electronic devices may cause severe damage to your vehicle. Contact a Fiat Dealership if you want to install accessories after purchasing the vehicle (alarms, radiophone, etc.): they will suggest the most suitable devices and advise you whether a higher capacity battery needs to be installed. 189) If the vehicle needs to be off the road for a long period under conditions of intense cold, remove the battery and take it to a heated location, otherwise it may freeze. 190) Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic parts and so on into contact with sulphuric acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack, stain or discolour them. If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth, chamois or the like and an aqueous solution of neutral detergent then immediately rinse the affected parts with plenty of water. 191) If the vehicle must remain unused for a long time at a very low temperature, remove the battery and take it to a warm place, to avoid freezing. 192) Never disconnect the battery when the ignition switch or the operation mode is in the “ON” position; doing so could damage the vehicle’s electrical components. 193) Never short-circuit the battery. This could cause it to overheat and be damaged. 194) If the battery is to be quick-charged, first disconnect the battery cables. 195) In order to prevent a short circuit, be sure to disconnect the negative (-) terminal first. IMPORTANT 4) Batteries contain substances which are very dangerous for the environment. For battery replacement, contact a Fiat Dealership. 259 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE WIPER BLADE REPLACEMENT IMPORTANT 383) 196) Do not operate the windscreen wiper with the blades lifted from the windscreen. 196) 1. Lift the wiper arm off the windscreen. 2. Pull the wiper blade until its stopper (A) disengages from the hook (B). Then, pull the wiper blade further to remove it. WARNING 465 4. Insert the wiper blade into the arm, starting with the opposite end of the blade from the stopper. Make sure the hook (B) is fitted correctly in the grooves in the blade. 464 AG0005274 NOTE Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the windscreen; it could damage the glass. 3. Attach the retainers (C) to a new wiper blade. Refer to the illustration to ensure that the retainers are correctly aligned as you attach them. NOTE If retainers are not supplied with the new wiper blade, use the retainers from the old blade. 5. Push the wiper blade until the hook (B) engages securely with the stopper (A). 466 260 AA3001992 AG0006284 383) Driving with worn windscreen/rear window wiper blades is a serious hazard, because visibility is reduced in bad weather. GENERAL MAINTENANCE Fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaust gas leakage Look under the body of your vehicle to check for fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaust gas leaks. Exterior and interior lamp operation Operate the combination lamp switch to check that all lamps are functioning properly. If the lamps do not illuminate, the probable cause is a blown fuse or defective lamp bulb. Check the fuses first. If there is no blown fuses, check the lamp bulbs. For information regarding the inspection and replacement of the fuses and the bulbs, refer to “Fuses” and “Replacement of lamp bulbs”. Meter, gauge and indicator/ warning lamps operation Start the engine to check the operation of all instruments, gauges, and indicator and warning lamps. If there is anything wrong, we recommend you to have your vehicle inspected. Hinges and latches lubrication Check all latches and hinges, and, if necessary, have them lubricated. VEHICLE CARE PRECAUTIONS IMPORTANT 384) 197) 5) In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, it is necessary to perform regular maintenance using the proper procedures. Always maintain your vehicle in compliance with any environmental pollution control regulations. Carefully select the materials used for washing, etc., to be sure that they do not contain corrosives. If in doubt, we recommend you to consult a specialist for the selection of these materials. 5) Detergents pollute the environment. Only wash your vehicle in areas equipped to collect and treat wastewater from this type of activity. WARNING 384) Cleaning products can be dangerous. Always follow the instructions of the cleaning product supplier. IMPORTANT 197) To avoid damage, never use the following to clean your vehicle: Petrol; Paint Thinner; Benzine; Kerosene; Turpentine; Naphtha; Lacquer Thinner; Carbon Tetrachloride; Nail Polish Remover; Acetone. 261 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 262 CLEANING THE INTERIOR OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE Do not use synthetic fiber or dry cloth. They can cause discolouring or damaging the surface. After cleaning the interior of your vehicle with water, cleaner or similar, wipe and dry in a shady, well-ventilated area. NOTE Do not place a deodorizer on the instrument panel or near lamps and instruments. The ingredients for deodorizer can cause discolouring or cracking. NOTE If your vehicle has the demister heater element of the rear window, to clean the inside of the rear window, always use a soft cloth and wipe the window glass along the demister heater element so as not to cause damage. Plastic, fabric and flocked parts 1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth soaked in a mild soap and water solution. 2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it out well. Using this cloth, wipe off the detergent thoroughly. Upholstery 1. To maintain the value of your new vehicle, handle the upholstery carefully and keep the interior clean. Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean the seats. If stained, synthetic leather should be cleaned with an appropriate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a mild soap and water solution. 2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum cleaner and remove any stains with carpet cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by lightly dabbing with a clean colourfast cloth and stain remover. NOTE Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and protectants containing silicones or wax. Such products, when applied to the instrument panels or other parts, may cause reflections on the windscreen and obscure vision. Also, if such products get on the switches of the electrical accessories, it may lead to failure of these accessories. Genuine leather 1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a soft cloth soaked in a mild soap and water solution. 2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it out well. Using this cloth, wipe off the detergent thoroughly. 3. Apply leather protecting agent to the genuine leather surface. 385) 386) 198) NOTE If genuine leather is wet with water or is washed in water, wipe off water as quickly as possible with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew may grow. NOTE Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene, alcohol and petrol, acid or alkaline solvents may discolour the genuine leather surface. Be sure to use neutral detergents. NOTE Remove oil substances quickly as they can stain genuine leather. NOTE The genuine leather surface may harden and shrink if it is exposed to direct rays of the sun for long hours. When your vehicle is parked, place it in the shade as much as possible. NOTE When the temperature of the vehicle interior rises in summer, vinyl products left on the genuine leather seat may deteriorate and stick to the seat. WARNING 385) Do not keep aerosol cans in the vehicle: they might explode. Aerosol cans must not be exposed to a temperature exceeding 50°C. When the vehicle is exposed to sunlight, the internal temperature can greatly exceed this value. 386) Never use flammable products, such as petrol ether or rectified petrol to clean the inside of the car. The electrostatic charges which are generated by rubbing during the cleaning operation may cause a fire. IMPORTANT 198) Do not use organic substances (solvents, benzine, kerosene, alcohol, petrol, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions. These chemicals can cause discolouring, staining or cracking of the surface. If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure their ingredients do not include the substances mentioned above. CLEANING THE EXTERIOR OF YOUR VEHICLE If the following is left on your vehicle, it may cause corrosion, discolouration and stains, wash the vehicle as soon as possible. Seawater, road deicing products. Soot and dust, iron powder from factories, chemical substance (acids, alkalis, coaltar, etc.). Droppings from birds, carcasses of insects, tree sap, etc. Washing Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust picked up from the road surface can damage the paint coat and body of your vehicle if left in prolonged contact. Frequent washing and waxing is the best way to protect your vehicle from this damage. This will also be effective in protecting it from environmental elements such as rain, snow, salt air, etc. Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with water to remove dust. Next, using an ample amount of clean water and a car washing brush or sponge, wash the vehicle from top to bottom. Use a mild car washing soap if necessary. Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a soft cloth. After washing the vehicle, carefully clean the joints and flanges of the doors, bonnet and other sections where dirt is likely to remain. 199) 200) 201) 202) 203) 204) 205) 206) 6) During cold weather The salt and other chemicals spread on the roads in some areas in winter can have a harmful effect on the vehicle body. You should therefore wash the vehicle as often as possible in accordance with our care-instructions. It is recommended to have a preservative applied and the underfloor protection checked before and after the cold weather season. After washing your vehicle, wipe off all water drops from the rubber parts around the doors to prevent the doors from freezing. Waxing Waxing the vehicle will help prevent the adherence of dust and road chemicals to the paintwork. Apply a wax solution after washing the vehicle, or at least once every three months to assist displacing of water. Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight. You should wax after the surfaces have cooled. For information on how to use wax refer to the instruction manual of the wax. 207) 263 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Polishing The vehicle should only be polished if the paintwork has become stained or lost its lustre. Do not polish parts with a mat coating and the plastic bumpers. Doing so could cause stains or damage the finish. Cleaning plastic parts Use a sponge or chamois leather. If a car wax adheres on a grey or black rough surface of the bumper, moulding or lamps, the surface becomes white. In such a case, wipe it off using lukewarm water and soft cloth or chamois leather. 208) 209) Chrome parts In order to prevent spots and corrosion of chrome parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and apply a special protective coating. This should be done more frequently in winter. Aluminium wheels (if so equipped) Remove dirt using a sponge while sprinkling water on the wheel.Use neutral detergent on any dirt that cannot be removed easily with water. Rinse off the neutral detergent after washing the wheel.Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamois leather or a soft cloth. 210) 211) 212) 213) 264 Window glass The window glass can normally be cleaned using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner can be used to remove oil, grease, insect carcasses, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth. Never use a cloth that is used for cleaning a painted surface to clean a window. Wax from the painted surface could get on the glass and lower glass transparency and visibility. NOTE To clean the inside of the rear window, always use a soft cloth and wipe the window glass along the demister heater element so as not to cause damage. NOTE Do not use pure windscreen washer fluid for cleaning the front windscreen and rear screen; dilute it by at least 50% in water. Wiper blades Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove grease, insect carcasses, etc., from the wiper blades. Replace the wiper blades when they no longer wipe properly. Engine compartment Clean the engine compartment at the beginning and end of winter. Pay particular attention to flanges, crevices and peripheral parts where dust containing road chemicals and other corrosive materials might collect. If salt and other chemicals are used on the roads in your area, clean the engine compartment at least every three months. Never spray or splash water on the electrical components in the engine compartment, as this may cause damage. Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic parts and so on into contact with sulphuric acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack, stain or discolour them. If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth, chamois or the like and an aqueous solution of neutral detergent then immediately rinse the affected parts with plenty of water. Versions with tonneau cover Hand washing is recommended for the tonneau cover; modern automatic washing systems equipped with soft brushes which do not apply excessive pressure with specific products may be used. Never use high-pressure washing systems. If a water jet is used, direct away from the edges of the fabric and the rear window to prevent water infiltration. Versions with stickers or wrapping To correctly clean and wash the stickers and/or wrapping parts, proceed as follows: Avoid washing with rollers and/or brushes in washing stations. Then, wash the vehicle, only by hand, using pH-neutral detergents; dry it with a wet chamois leather. Abrasive products and/or polishes should not be used for cleaning the vehicle. If high pressure jets or cleaners are used to wash the vehicle, hold at least 40 cm away from the bodywork to avoid damage or alteration. It should be remembered that the build up of water can damage the car over a period of time. Wash the bodywork using a low pressure jet of water. Use a sponge to wipe a slightly soapy solution over the bodywork, frequently rinsing the sponge. Rinse with plenty of water and dry with a jet of air or a chamois leather. Dry the less visible parts with special care, such as the door frames, bonnet and the headlight frames, where water may stagnate more easily. The car should not be taken to a closed area immediately, but left outside so that residual water can evaporate. Do not wash the car after it has been parked in the sun. Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in the same way as the rest of the vehicle. Where possible, do not park under trees: the resinous substances that many species release give the paint a dull appearance and increase the possibility of triggering rusting processes. NOTE Any stains (caused by water) on the stickers or wrapping can be removed by dampening the area again and drying it with a soft, nonabrasive cloth. NOTE Bird droppings must be washed off immediately and thoroughly as the acid they contain is particularly aggressive. NOTE Avoid (if at all possible) parking the car under trees; remove vegetable resins immediately as, when dried, it may only be possible to remove them with abrasive products and/or polishes, which is highly inadvisable as they could alter the paint, the stickers or the wrapping. IMPORTANT 199) Avoid washing with rollers and/or brushes in washing stations. Wash the vehicle only by hand using neutral pH detergents; dry it with a wet chamois leather. Abrasive products and/or polishes should not be used for cleaning the car. Bird droppings must be washed off immediately and thoroughly as the acid they contain is particularly aggressive. Avoid (if at all possible) parking the vehicle under trees; remove vegetable resins immediately as, when dried, it may only be possible to remove them with abrasive products and/or polishes, which is highly inadvisable as they could alter the typical opaqueness of the paint. Do not use pure windscreen washer fluid for cleaning the front windscreen and rear window; dilute it min. 50% with water. Only use pure screen washer fluid when strictly necessary due to outside temperature conditions. 200) When washing the under side of your vehicle or wheel, be careful not to injure your hands. 201) If your vehicle has rain sensor wipers, place the wiper switch lever in the “OFF” position to deactivate the rain sensor before washing the vehicle. Otherwise, the wipers will operate in the presence of water spray on the windscreen and may get damaged as a result. 202) Refrain from excessively using a car wash as its brushes may scratch the paint surface, causing it to lose its gloss. Scratches will be especially visible on darker coloured vehicles. 265 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 266 203) Never spray or splash water on the electrical components in the engine compartment. Doing so could have an adverse effect on the engine startability. Exercise caution also when washing the underbody; be careful not to spray water into the engine compartment. 204) Some types of hot water washing equipment apply high pressure and heat to the vehicle. They may cause heat distortion and damage to the vehicle resin parts and may result in flooding of the vehicle interior. Therefore maintain a good distance of approx. 70 cm or more between the vehicle body and the washing nozzle. Also, when washing around the door glass, hold the nozzle at a distance of more than 70 cm and at right angles to the glass surface. 205) After washing the vehicle, drive the vehicle slowly while lightly depressing the brake pedal several times in order to dry out the brakes. Leaving the brakes wet could result in reduced braking performance. Also, there is a possibility that they could freeze up or become inoperative due to rust, rendering the vehicle unable to move. 206) Using an automatic car wash, pay attention to the following items, referring to the operation manual or consulting a car wash operator. If the following procedure is not followed, it could result in damage to your vehicle: 1 – the outside rear view mirrors are retracted. 2 – If your vehicle is equipped with the pillar antenna, it can be retracted. If your vehicle is equipped with the roof antenna, it can be removed. 3 – The wiper arms are secured in place with tape. 4 – If your vehicle has rain sensor wipers, place the wiper switch lever in the “OFF” position to deactivate the rain sensor. 207) Waxes containing high abrasive compounds should not be used. 208) Do not use a scrubbing brush or other hard tools as they may damage the plastic part surface. 209) Do not bring the plastic parts into contact with petrol, light oil, brake fluids, engine oils, greases, paint thinners and sulphuric acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack, stain or discolour the plastic parts. If they touch the plastic parts, wipe them off with soft cloth, chamois or the like and an aqueous solution of neutral detergent then immediately rinse the affected parts with water. 210) Do not use a brush or other hard implement on the wheels. Doing so could scratch the wheels. 211) Do not use any cleaner that contains an abrasive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing so could cause the coating on the wheels to peel or become discoloured or stained. 212) Do not directly apply hot water using a steam cleaner or by any other means. 213) Contact with seawater and road deicer can cause corrosion. Rinse off such substances as soon as possible. IMPORTANT 6) Detergents pollute the environment. Only wash your vehicle in areas equipped to collect and treat waste water from this type of activity. TYRES 387) Tyre size UP TO 3 PASSENGERS MAX. LOAD OR TRAILER TOWING Front Rear Front Rear 205R16C 110/108R 8PR 2.4 bar (240 kPa) {35 psi} 2.4 bar (240 kPa) {35 psi} 2.4 bar (240 kPa) {35 psi} 4.5 bar (450 kPa) {65 psi} 245/70R16 111S RF 2.0 bar (200 kPa) {29 psi} 2.0 bar (200 kPa) {29 psi} 2.0 bar (200 kPa) {29 psi} 2.9 bar (290 kPa) {42 psi} 245/65R17 111S RF 2.2 bar (220 kPa) {32 psi} 2.2 bar (220 kPa) {32 psi} 2.2 bar (220 kPa) {32 psi} 2.9 bar (290 kPa) {42 psi} Check the tyre inflation pressure of all the tyres while they are cold; if insufficient or excessive, adjust to the specified value. After the tyre inflation pressure has been adjusted, check the tyres for damage and air leaks. Be sure to put caps on the valves. 267 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 268 for use. When these wear indicators appear, the tyres must be replaced with new ones. In the case of the 4-wheel drive vehicles, when replacement of any of the tyres is necessary, replace all of them. Wheel condition 388) 389) 390) 214) Replacing tyres and wheels 215) 216) 467 AA0002549 1. Location of the tread wear indicator 2. Tread wear indicator Check the tyres for cuts, cracks and other damage. Replace the tyres if there are deep cuts or cracks. Also check each tyre for pieces of metal or pebbles. The use of worn tyres can be very dangerous because of the greater chance of skidding or hydroplaning. The tread depth of the tyres must exceed 1.6 mm in order for the tyres to meet the minimum requirement for use. At least 3 mm for snow (winter) tyre (for markets, where provided). Tread wear indicators will appear on the surface of the tyre as the tyre wears, thereby indicating that the tyre no longer meets the minimum requirement Tyre rotation Tyre wear varies with vehicle conditions, road surface conditions and individual driver’s driving habits. To equalize the wear and help extend tyre life, it is recommended to rotate the tyres immediately after discovery of abnormal wear, or whenever the wear difference between the front and rear tyres is recognizable. When rotating tyres, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tyre pressure, improper wheel alignment, out of balance wheel, or severe braking. Consult your authorised Fiat dealer to determine the cause of irregular tread wear. 468 AHE100140 391) 217) 218) 469 AA0002552 Snow tyres 391) NOTE For markets / versions, where provided, the identification letters indicated on the winter tyres provide information on the permissible speeds for M&S tyres: QMS: up to 160 kph TMS: up to 190 kphThe respective maximum speed should absolutely be observed and a signboard to be introduced into the field of view of the driver, in case the maximum vehicle speed indicated in the vehicle registration a certificate is greater. Snow traction device (tyre chains) 219) 220) The use of snow tyres is recommended for driving on snow and ice. To preserve driving stability, mount snow tyres of the same size and tread pattern on all four wheels. Snow tyres worn more than 50 % are no longer suitable for use as snow tyres. The pattern depth shall be at least 3mm (for markets / versions, where provided). Snow tyres which do not meet specifications must not be used. NOTE The laws and regulations concerning snow tyres (driving speed, required use, type, etc.) vary. Find out and follow the laws and regulations in the area you intend to drive. NOTE If flange nuts are used on your vehicle, change to tapered nuts when steel wheels are used. Tyre size Wheel size 205R16C 16x6 J 16x6 JJ 245/70R16 16x7 J 16x7 JJ 245/65R17 17x7 1/2J Max. chain height [mm] 22 When driving with snow traction device (tyre chains) on the tyres, do not drive faster than 50 km/h. When you reach roads that are not covered in snow, immediately remove the snow traction device (tyre chains). 221) 222) 223) 224) 225) 226) 227) 228) If snow traction device (tyre chains) have to be used, ensure that they are fitted only on the drive wheels (rear) in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. On 4WD vehicles in which the driving power is distributed preferentially to the rear wheels, ensure that the snow traction device (Tyre chains) are fitted on the rear. Use only snow traction device (Tyre chains) which are designed for use with the tyres mounted on the vehicle: use of the incorrect size or type of snow traction device (Tyre chains) could result in damage to the vehicle body. Contact a Fiat Dealership before putting on snow traction device (tyre chains). The max. snow traction device (tyre chains) height is as follows. The laws and regulations concerning the use of snow traction device (tyre chains) vary. Always follow local laws and regulations. In most countries, it is prohibited by the law to use of snow traction device (tyre chains) on roads without snow. WARNING 387) Driving with tyres that are worn, damaged or improperly inflated can lead to a loss of control or blow out of the tyres which can result in a collision with serious or fatal injury. 388) Remember that the road holding qualities of your vehicle also depend on the correct inflation pressure of the tyres. 269 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 270 389) If the pressure is too low, the tyre will overheat and could be seriously damaged. 390) Never submit alloy rims to repainting treatments requiring the use of temperatures exceeding 150°C. The mechanical properties of the wheels could be impaired. 391) Avoid switching the tyres from the right side of the vehicle to the left side and vice versa. IMPORTANT 214) Always use tyres of the same size, same type, and same brand, and which have no wear differences. Using tyres of different size, type, brands or degree of wear, will increase the differential oil temperature, resulting in possible damage to the driving system. Further, the drive train will be subjected to excessive loading, possibly leading to oil leakage, component seizure, or other serious faults. 215) Avoid using different size tyres from the one listed and the combined use of different types of tyres, as this can affect driving safety. 216) Even if a wheel has the same rim size and offset as the specified type of wheel, its shape may prevent it from being fitted correctly. Consult a Fiat dealership before using wheels that you have. 217) If the tyres have arrows (A) indicating the correct direction of rotation, swap the front and rear tyres on the left hand side of the vehicle and the front and rear tyres on the right hand side of the vehicle separately. Keep each tyre on its original side of the vehicle. When fitting the tyres, make sure the arrows point in the direction in which the wheels will turn when the vehicle moves forward. Any tyre whose arrow points in the wrong direction will not perform to its full potential. 218) Avoid the combined use of different types of tyres. Using different types of tyres can affect vehicle performance and safety. 219) If winter tyres with a lower speed rating than that indicated in the Registration Document are used, do not exceed the maximum speed corresponding to the speed rating of the tyres used. 220) Observe permissible maximum speed for your snow tyres and the legal speed limit. 221) Choose a clear straight stretch of road where you can pull off and still be seen while you are fitting the snow traction device (Tyre chains). 222) Do not fit snow traction device (Tyre chains) before you need them. This will wear out your tyres and the road surface. 223) After driving around 100-300 metres, stop and retighten the snow traction device (Tyre chains). 224) Drive cautiously and do not exceed 50 km/h. Remember that preventing accidents is not the purpose of snow traction device (tyre chains). 225) When snow traction device (Tyre chains) are installed, take care that they do not damage the disc wheel or body. 226) An aluminium wheel can be damaged by a snow traction device (Tyre chains) while driving. When fitting a snow traction device (Tyre chains) on an aluminium wheel, take care that any part of the snow traction device (Tyre chains) and fitting cannot be brought into contact with the wheel. 227) When installing or removing a snow traction device (Tyre chains), take care that hands and other parts of your body are not injured by the sharp edges of the vehicle body. 228) Install the snow traction device (Tyre chains) only on the rear tyres and tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Everything you may find useful for understanding how your vehicle is made and works is contained in this chapter and illustrated with data, tables and graphics. For the enthusiasts and the technician, but also just for those who want to know every detail of their vehicle. VEHICLE LABELING . . . . . . ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS . . VEHICLE DIMENSIONS . . . . VEHICLE PERFORMANCE . . VEHICLE WEIGHTS . . . . . . ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. . . . . TYRES AND WHEELS . . . . . REFILL CAPACITIES . . . . . . FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS. . FUEL CONSUMPTION / CO 2 EMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 .274 .276 .282 .283 .288 .289 .290 .293 . . . .296 271 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS VEHICLE LABELING Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) The vehicle identification number is stamped as shown in the illustration. 471 AHA113380 Vehicle Information code plate The vehicle information code plate is located as shown in the illustration. 470 AHA101413 Vehicle identification number plate (RHD vehicles only) The vehicle identification number is stamped on the plate riveted to the left front corner of the vehicle body. It is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windscreen. 472 AHA106535 The plate shows model code, engine model, transmission model and body colour code, etc. 272 473 AA0117333 Please use this number when ordering replacement parts. 1. Model code 2. Engine model code 3. Transmission model code 4. Final gear ratio 5. Body colour code 6. Interior code 7. Option code Engine model/number Engine model and engine number are stamped on the engine cylinder block as shown in the illustrations. 474 AHA101426 273 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 274 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS 2.4 150 cv Diesel Engine (4N15) Engine model 4N15 Engine type Euro 5 — Euro 6 No. of cylinders 4 in line Total displacement 2,442 cc Bore 86.0 mm Stroke 105.1 mm Camshaft Double overhead Mixture preparation Electronic direct injection Maximum output (EEC net) 113 kW/ 3,500 r/min Maximum torque (EEC net) 380 Nm/ 1,500~2,500 r/min 2.4 180 cv 4WD Diesel Engine (4N15) Engine model 4N15 Engine type Euro 5 — Euro 6 No. of cylinders 4 in line Total displacement 2,442 cc Bore 86.0 mm Stroke 105.1 mm Camshaft Double overhead Mixture preparation Electronic direct injection Maximum output (EEC net) 133 kW/ 3,500 r/min(*) Maximum torque (EEC net) 430 Nm/2,500 r/min(*) (*) Vehicles with high power engine 392) WARNING 392) Modifications or repairs to the fuel supply system that are not carried out properly or do not take the system’s technical specifications into account may cause malfunctions leading to a risk of fire. 275 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS VEHICLE DIMENSIONS Club Cab 475 276 AH5101927 Reference Length 1 Front track 2 Overall width 1,785 mm, 1,815 mm(*1) 3 Front overhang 865 mm 4 Wheel base 3,000 mm 5 Rear overhang 6 1,520 mm Without rear bumper 1,330 mm With rear bumper 1,410 mm Without rear bumper 5,195 mm With rear bumper 5,275 mm Overall length 7 Ground clearance (unladen) 200 mm, 205 mm(*1) 8 Overall height (unladen) 1,775 mm, 1,780 mm(*1) 9 Rear track 1,515 mm 10 Cargo bed length 1,850 mm 11 Cargo bed width 1,470 mm 12 Cargo bed height 845 mm, 850 mm(*1) (*1) Vehicles with wide fender The vehicle overall length and height may vary depending on the equipment installed. Minimum turning radius Body 6.3 m Wheel 5.9 m 277 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Double Cab 476 278 AH5102328 Reference Length 1 Front track 2 Overall width 1,785 mm, 1,815 mm(*) 3 Front overhang 865 mm 4 Wheel base 3,000 mm 5 Rear overhang 6 1,520 mm Without rear bumper 1,340 mm With rear bumper 1,420 mm Without rear bumper 5,205 mm With rear bumper 5,285 mm Overall length 7 Ground clearance (unladen) 200 mm, 205 mm(*) 8 Overall height (unladen) 1,775 mm, 1,780 mm(*) 9 Rear track 1,515 mm 10 Cargo bed length 1,520 mm 11 Cargo bed width 1,470 mm 12 Cargo bed height 845 mm, 850 mm(*) (*) Vehicles with wide fender Minimum turning radius Body 6.3 m Wheel 5.9 m 279 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Single Cab 477 280 AH5101914 Reference Length 1 Front track 1,520 mm 2 Overall width 1,785 mm 3 Front overhang 4 Wheel base 5 Rear overhang 865 mm 3,000 mm Without rear bumper 6 1,215 mm With rear bumper 1,295 mm Without rear bumper 5,080 mm With rear bumper 5,160 mm Overall length 7 Ground clearance (unladen) 200 mm 8 Overall height (unladen) 1,780 mm 9 Rear track 1,515 mm 10 Cargo bed length 2,265 mm 11 Cargo bed width 1,470 mm 12 Cargo bed height 845 mm Body 6,3 m Wheel 5,9 m Minimum turning radius 281 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS VEHICLE PERFORMANCE Single cab Maximum speed Maximum speed Vehicles without wide fender Vehicles with wide fender 169 km/h 179 km/h Double cab Vehicles without wide fender Maximum speed (1)Vehicles with high power engine 282 169 km/h Club cab 169 km/h Vehicles with wide fender M/T A/T 174 km/h 179 km/h 173 km/h 177 km/h (1) VEHICLE WEIGHTS Single Cab Reference Weight Without optional parts 1.790 kg With full optional parts 1.835 kg Kerb weight Maximum gross vehicle weight 2.850 kg Front 1.260 kg Rear 1.840 kg With brake 3.000 kg Maximum axle weight Maximum towable weight Without brake 750 kg Maximum trailer-nose weight 120 kg Maximum gross combination weight 5.820 kg Maximum permissible weight of the coupling device 34 kg Seating capacity 2 persons NOTE Trailer specifications indicate the manufacturer’s recommendation. 283 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Club Cab Vehicles without wide fender LHD Vehicles with wide fender RHD Without optional parts 1,820 kg 1,805 kg 1,840 kg With full optional parts 1,910 kg 1,895 kg 1,930 kg Kerb weight Maximum gross vehicle weight 2,850 kg Front 1,260 kg Rrear 1,840 kg With brake 3,000 kg Maximum axle weight Maximum towable weight Without brake Maximum trailer-nose weight Maximum gross combination weight Maximum permissible weight of the coupling device Seating capacity 750 kg 120 kg 5,820 kg 34 kg 4 persons, 2 persons (*) (*) Vehicles equipped with rear seatless option NOTE: Trailer specifications indicate the manufacturer’s recommendation. NOTE: When loading luggage and/or towing a trailer, make sure not to exceed any of the above maximum weights all the time. NOTE: The trailer weights related specifications are not applicable to use in some markets, the correct maximum weights are stated in the registration book of the vehicle. 284 Double Cab 2WD Hi-Rider Without optional parts 1,765 kg With full optional parts 1,850 kg Kerb weight Maximum gross vehicle weight 2,800 kg Front 1,260 kg Rear 1,840 kg With brake 2,700 kg Without brake 750 kg Maximum axle weight Maximum towable weight Maximum trailer-nose weight 110 kg Maximum gross combination weight 5,450 kg Maximum permissible weight of the coupling device 34 kg Seating capacity 5 persons NOTE: Trailer specifications indicate the manufacturer’s recommendation. NOTE: When loading luggage and/or towing a trailer, make sure not to exceed any of the above maximum weights all the time. NOTE: The trailer weights related specifications are not applicable to use in some markets, the correct maximum weights are stated in the registration book of the vehicle. 285 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Diesel engine 2.4 (4N15) 4WD M/T LHD RHD Vehicles without wide fender Vehicles with wide fender Without optional parts 1,870 kg 1,840 kg (*2) 1,875 kg 1,855 kg (*2) 1,860 kg 1,855 kg (*1) With full optional parts 1,960 kg 1,915 kg (*2) 1,955 kg 1,950 kg (*1) 1,950 kg (*2) 1,950 kg 1,960 kg (*1) 2,900 kg 2,850 kg (*2) 2,905 kg 2,850 kg (*2) 2,905 kg 2,900 kg (*1) Kerb weight Maximum gross vehicle weight Front 1,260 kg Rear 1,840 kg With brake 3,100 kg Without brake 750 kg Maximum axle weight Maximum towable weight Maximum trailer-nose weight Maximum gross combination weight 125 kg 5,950 kg 5,900 kg (*2) 5,950 kg Maximum permissible weight of the coupling device 34 kg Seating capacity 5 persons (*2) Versions for specific markets (*1) Vehicles with the Start&Stop NOTE: The trailer weights related specifications are not applicable to use in some markets, the correct maximum weights are stated in the registration book of the vehicle. NOTE: Trailer specifications indicate the manufacturer’s recommendation. NOTE: When loading luggage and/or towing a trailer, make sure not to exceed any of the above maximum weights all the time. 286 Diesel engine 2.4 (4N15) 4WD A/T LHD RHD Vehicles without wide fender Vehicles with wide fender Without optional parts 1,870 kg 1,875 kg 1,855 kg(*2) 1,860 kg With full optional parts 1,960 kg 1,955 kg 1,955 kg(*2) 1,950 kg 2,900 kg 2,910 kg 2,850 kg(*2) 2,910 kg Kerb weight Maximum gross vehicle weight Front 1,260 kg Rear 1,840 kg With brake 3,100 kg Without brake 750 kg Maximum axle weight Maximum towable weight Maximum trailer-nose weight Maximum gross combination weight 125 kg 5,950 kg 5,950 kg 5,900 kg(*2) Maximum permissible weight of the coupling device 34 kg Seating capacity 5 persons 5,950 kg (*2) Versions for specific markets NOTE: Trailer specifications indicate the manufacturer’s recommendation. NOTE: When loading luggage and/or towing a trailer, make sure not to exceed any of the above maximum weights all the time. NOTE: The trailer weights related specifications are not applicable to use in some markets, the correct maximum weights are stated in the registration book of the vehicle. 287 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 288 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Except for vehicles with the Start&Stop system All vehicles Alternator capacity Vehicles with the Start&Stop system 12 V Voltage Battery Vehicles for Specific Markets Type (JIS) 95D31L – 80Ah 115D31L – 84Ah(*) 115D31L – 84Ah T-105 – 86Ah 95 A, 130 A(*) 130 A 95 A, 130 A(*) (*) Optional NOTE The vehicles equipped with Start&Stop have a dedicated Start&Stop battery type. Use of a different battery could cause the battery to run down quickly or Start&Stop system not to operate normally. Please contact a Fiat Dealership when replacing the battery. TYRES AND WHEELS Tyre size Tyres Size 205R16C 8PR 110/108R 245/70R16 111S RF 245/65R17 111S 16x6J, 16x6JJ 16x7J, 16x7JJ 17x7 1/2J Wheel Offset 38 mm NOTE Contact a Fiat Dealership for details on the combination used on your vehicle. 289 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS REFILL CAPACITIES 478 VANODIESEL3231EM A — RHD vehicles No. 290 Quantity 1 Engine coolant (Includes 0.65 litre in the reserve tank) 2 Brake fluid 7.7 litres As required Lubricants PARAFLU UP Contractual Technical Reference N° F101.M01 (1) DOT4 TUTELA TOP 4/S Contractual Technical Reference N° F005.F15 No. 3 4 Quantity Clutch fluid Engine oil As required Oil pan 8.0 litres Oil filter 0.3 litres Oil cooler 0.1 litres As required Lubricants DOT4 TUTELA TOP 4/S Contractual Technical Reference N° F005.F15 SELENIA MULTIPOWER C3 Contractual Technical Reference N° F129.F11 TUTELA GI/Z Contractual Technical Reference N°F001.A16 5 Power Steering 6 Washer fluid 4.2 litres P ETRONAS DURANCE SC 35 Contractual Technical Reference N° F001.D16 Automatic Transmission fluid 10.9 litres TUTELA TRANSMISSION GI/PA Contractual Technical Reference N°F001.A16 Manual transmission oil 5M/T (1) 2.2 litres TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARSYNTH Z3 Contractual Technical Reference N°F001.A16 TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARSYNTH Z4 Contractual Technical Reference N°F002.A16 Manual transmission oil 6M/T (1) Super select 4WD II 1.34 litres Easy select 4WD 1.15 litres 2WD 2.3 litres Transfer oil Differential oil Front 1.2 litres Rear 2.3 litres 4WD for 5M/T: TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARSYNTH Z3 Contractual Technical Reference N°F001.A16 for 6M/T, A/T: TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARSYNTH Z4 Contractual Technical Reference N°F002.A16 TUTELA TRANSMISSION AXLE Z Contractual Technical Reference N°F002.A16 TUTELA TRANSMISSION AXLE Z-LS Contractual Technical Reference N°F003.A16 (1) If so equipped 291 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS No. Quantity Refrigerant (Air conditioning) Amount 0.52 kg Co 2 equivalent 0.743 t GWP 1,430 HFC-134a (2) (2) Contains fluorinated greenhouse gases NOTE For the Automatic transmission fluid, use only the Fiat Genuine products. Use of a different fluid could damage the transmission. No. Quantity Manual transmission oil 2.2 litres Super select 4WD II 1.34 litres Easy select 4WD 1.15 litres 2WD 2.3 litres Transfer oil Differential oil Front 1.2 litres Rear 2.3 litres 4WD Refrigerant (Air conditioning) (2) Contains fluorinated greenhouse gases 292 Lubricants Amount 0.52 kg Co 2 equivalent 0.743 t GWP 1,430 Lubricants TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARSYNTH Z3 Contractual Technical Reference N°F001.A16 for 5M/T: TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARSYNTH Z3 Contractual Technical Reference N°F001.A16 for 6M/T, A/T: TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARSYNTH Z4 Contractual Technical Reference N°F002.A16 TUTELA TRANSMISSION AXLE Z Contractual Technical Reference N°F002.A16 TUTELA TRANSMISSION AXLE Z-LS Contractual Technical Reference N°F003.A16 HFC-134a (2) FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Product specifications Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of the Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration. Lubricant Engine oil With DPF Without DPF Characteristics Specification Original Fluids and Lubricants Replacement interval SAE 5W-30 ACEA C3 9.55535-S3 or MS-11106 SELENIA MULTIPOWER C3 Contractual Technical Reference N° F129.F11 According to Scheduled Servicing Plan If lubricants compliant with the required specifications are not available, products that comply with the minimum required characteristics can be used for topping up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed. 229) 293 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Lubricant Specification Original Fluids and Lubricants Application Synthetic lubricant ATF 9.55550-AV 6 TUTELA TRANSMISSION GI/PA Contractual Technical Reference N°F001.A16 Automatic transmission fluid Synthetic lubricant SAE 75W-80 API GL-3 9.55550-MZ 9 TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARSYNTH Z3 Contractual Technical Reference N°F001.A16 Manual transmission and transfer oil for 5M/T Synthetic lubricant SAE 75W-80 API GL-4 9.55550-MZ 10 TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARSYNTH Z4 Contractual Technical Reference N°F002.A16 Manual transmission and transfer oil for 6M/T Synthetic lubricant SAE 75W-80 API GL-4 9.55550-MZ 10 TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARSYNTH Z4 Contractual Technical Reference N°F002.A16 Transfer oil for A/T Synthetic lubricant SAE 80 API GL-5 9.55550-DA 12 TUTELA TRANSMISSION AXLE Z Contractual Technical Reference N°F002.A16 Differential oil for 2WD and 4WD without multi plate type LSD Synthetic lubricant SAE 80 API GL-5 9.55550-DA 13 TUTELA TRANSMISSION AXLE Z-LS Contractual Technical Reference N°F003.A16 Differential oil for 4WD with multi plate type LSD DOT 4 9.55597 or MS.90039 TUTELA TOP 4/S Contractual Technical Reference N° F005.F15 Hydraulic brakes and hydraulic clutch controls Synthetic lubricant ATF 9.55550-AG 4 TUTELA GI/Z Contractual Technical Reference N°F001.A16 Lubricants and greases for drive transmission Brake fluid Clutch fluid Power Steering 294 Characteristics Lubricant Protective agent for radiators Washer fluid Characteristics Specification Original Fluids and Lubricants Application CUNA NC 956-16 ASTM D 3306 9.55523 or MS.90032 PARAFLU UP Contractual Technical Reference N° F101.M01 (1) Engine Coolant Mixture of spirits and surfactants. Exceeds CUNA NC 956-11 specifications. 9.55522 or MS-90043 PETRONAS DURANCE SC 35 Contractual Technical Reference N° F001.D16 To be used diluted or undiluted in screen washer/wiper systems (1) The product used for initial filling and PARAFLU UP can be fully mixed, even though the colours may differ. PARAFLU UP may be used for topping up amounts of up to 1 litre. Over this amount we recommend completely changing the coolant in the percentages given. IMPORTANT 229) The use of products with specifications different than those indicated above could cause damage to the engine that is not covered by the warranty. 295 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FUEL CONSUMPTION / CO2 EMISSION COMBINED USE CO2 (g/km) Fuel consumption (L/100km) With Start&Stop 6M/T 166 6.3 Without Start&Stop 5A/T 185 7.0 With Start&Stop 6M/T 169 6.4 6M/T 173 188 (*) 192 (**) 6.6 7.1 (*) , 7.3 (**) 5A/T 189 197 (*) , 203 (**) 7.2 7.5 (*) , 7.7 (**) 2WD Hi-Rider 4WD Without Start&Stop (*) Vehicles for Russia (**)Vehicles for Ukraina 296 Transmission Euro 5 engine COMBINED USE Transmission CO2 (g/km) Fuel consumption (L/100km) With Start&Stop 6M/T 177 166 (*) 6.7 6.3 (*) Without Start&Stop 5A/T 192 185 (*) 7.3 7.0 (*) With Start&Stop 6M/T 180 169 (*) 6.9 6.4 (*) 6M/T 186 188 (**) 191 (***) 173 (*) 7.1 7.1 (**) 7.2 (***) 6.6 (*) 5A/T 196 197 (**) 201 (***) 189 (*) 7.5 7.5 (**) 7.6 (***) 7.2 (*) Euro 6 engine 2WD Hi-Rider 4WD Without Start&Stop (*) Vehicles for Turkey (**) Vehicles for Russia (***) Vehicles for Ukraine NOTE: The results given do not express or imply any guarantee of the fuel consumption of the particular vehicle. The vehicle itself has not been tested and there are inevitably differences between individual vehicles of the same model. In addition, this vehicle may incorporate particular modifications. 297 MAINTAIN YOUR VEHICLE IN TIP TOP CONDITIONS WITH Mopar Vehicle Protection offers a series of service contracts that are designed to give all our customers the pleasure of driving their vehicle without any hitch's and concerns. Our product portfolio consists of a wide and flexible range of extended warranty and maintenance plans endorsed by FCA. Each with a series of different coverage tiers, in terms of durability and mileage, built to accommodate you’re driving needs. Service contracts are made by experts that know every part of your vehicle, and commit themselves to maintain it in tip top conditions. Our knowledge and passion is tailored around designing products that promises all our drivers “worry-free driving”. Only with Mopar Vehicle Protection you are ensured that all service operations are performed by highly qualified and specialized technicians in authorized FCA repair facilities, using the right tools, equipment and only original parts, all over Europe. Check which Service Contract plans are available on your market today and choose the Service Contract that suits your driving habits best. Ask your local dealer for further information. NOTE INDEX 4 Wheel drive operation . . . . . . . .178 Accessory socket . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Active safety systems . . . . . . . . . .137 Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . .56 Air purifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Ashtray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Assist grip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Automatic climate control air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . .159 Auxiliary driving system . . . . . . . . .141 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Bleeding the fuel system . . . . . . . .211 Bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Cargo area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Cargo loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . .72 ,252 Central Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Checking levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . .116 Child-protection rear doors (Double cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle .263 Cleaning the interior of your vehicle .262 Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Coat hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Combination headlamps and dipper switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Convenient hook . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Dead lock system . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Demanding vehicle use. . . . . . . . .250 Diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . .72 Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Driving, alcohol and drugs . . . . . . .145 Easy select 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Economical driving . . . . . . . . . . .144 Electric window control . . . . . . . . .70 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Electronic immobilizer . . . . . . . . . .13 Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . .209 Emission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . .74 Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Engine overheating . . . . . . . . . . .210 Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . .274 Engine switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Era Glonass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 External Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . .293 Fog lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Force limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Fuel selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 General maintenance . . . . . . . . .261 Graphical index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Handling of 4 wheel drive vehicles .181 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . .47 Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Headlamp levelling switch . . . . . . . .46 Heater/Manual air conditioning . . . . .58 High Load System. . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Horn switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 How to change a tyre . . . . . . . . . .216 If the vehicle breaks down. . . . . . .208 Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Important operation tips for the air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . .40 Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Interior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 ISOFIX positions . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Key number tag. . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Keyless Entry System. . . . . . . . . . .14 INDEX Keyless operation system . . . . . . . .17 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Lane departure warning . . . . . . . .195 Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . .157 Masking the headlamps . . . . . . . . .48 Multi information display . . . . . . . . .90 Operation under adverse driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . .41 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Periodic checks . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . .257 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Read this carefully . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Rear Differential lock . . . . . . . . . .174 Rear gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Rear view camera . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Rear window demister switch . . . . .68 Refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Replacement of lamp bulbs . . . . . .235 Safe driving techniques . . . . . . . .145 Tools, jack and jack handle . . . . . .211 safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 SBR system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Scheduled Servicing Plan . . . . . . .245 Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Seat belts Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Service precautions . . . . . . . . . . .244 Side airbags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Sports mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Start&Stop System . . . . . . . . . . .154 Starting and stopping the engine. . .150 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Steering wheel height and reach adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Steering wheel lock . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Storage spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Super Select 4WD II. . . . . . . . . . .169 Supplemental restraint system airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Turbocharger operation . . . . . . . .153 Turn-signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Tyres and wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Use of the Owner Handbook . . . . . .3 Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Vehicle care precautions . . . . . . . .261 Vehicle changes/alterations . . . . . . . .5 Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . .276 Vehicle labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Vehicle performance . . . . . . . . . .282 Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . .52 Wiper blade replacement . . . . . . .260 FCA Italy S.p.A. - MOPAR - Technical Services - Service Engineering Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 3 - 10040 Volvera - Turin (Italy) Print no. 603.91.226 - 0 6 / 2017 - 3 Edition WHY CHOOSING GENUINE PARTS We really know your car because we invented, designed and built it: we really know every single detail. At Fiat Service authorised workshops you can find technicians directly trained by us, offering quality and professionalism for all service operations. Fiat workshops are always close to you for the regular servicing operations, season checks and practical recommendations by our experts. With Original Parts distributed by MOPAR®, you maintain the reliability, comfort and performance features that you bought your new car for over time. Always ask for Genuine Parts for the components used on our cars; we recommend them because they come from our steady commitment in research and development of highly innovative technologies. For all these reasons: rely on Genuine Parts, because they are the only ones designed by FCA for your car. SAFETY: BRAKING SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT: PARTICULATE FILTERS, CLIMATE CONTROL MAINTENANCE COMFORT: SUSPENSION AND WINDSCREEN WIPERS PERFORMANCE: SPARK PLUGS, INJECTORS AND BATTERIES LINEACCESSORI ROOF RACK BARS, WHEEL RIMS ENGLISH The data contained in this publication is intended merely as a guide. FCA Italy S.p.A. reserves the right to modify the models and versions described in this booklet at any time for technical and commercial reasons. If you have any further questions please consult your FIAT dealer. Printed in recycled paper without chlorine.